Home

Agilent Technologies 1670G Printer Accessories User Manual

1. N oO Stop the acquisition amp copy the acquired data to the compare reference listing 1 N PB NN WN OUTPUT 707 STOP OUTPUT 707 MENU 1 10 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 COMPARE MENU REFERENCE OUTPU 707 MACHINEI COMPARE COPY N Hs T NN oy Ul N J The logic analyzer acquisition is now stopped the Compare menu is displayed and the data is now in the compare reference b lasting Ikxkx xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkkkxkkkxkkxkkxkxkxkkxkkkxkxkxkxkkkxkkxkxkkkkkxkxkx Display the last line of the compare listing and start the analyzer in a repetitive mode If your analyzer does not have extended memory setting the line to 61439 causes a warning but the listing still 742 moves to the last line 340 no states until the trigger is found 350 360 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER SEQUENCE 2 1 370 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER TERM A SCOUNT HFF 380 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER STOREl NOSTATE 390 OUTPUT 707 MENU 1 3 400 410 KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KK KK KK KKK 420 Change the displayed menu to the state listing and start the state 430 analyzer in repetitive mod 440 450 OUTPUT 707 MENU 1 7 460 OUTPUT 707 RMODE REPETITIVE 470 OUTPUT 707 START 480 490 KKK KKK
2. Status Byte Structures and Concepts 6 3 Status Reporting Event Status Register Event Status Register The Event Status Register is an IEEE 488 2 defined register The bits in this register are latched Once an event happens which sets a bit that bit will only be cleared if the register is read Service Request Enable Register The Service Request Enable Register is an 8 bit register Each bit enables the corresponding bit in the status byte to cause a service request The sixth bit does not logically exist and is always returned as azero To read and write to this register use the SRE and SRE commands Bit Definitions The following mnemonics are used in figure 6 1 and in chapter 8 Common Commands MAV message available Indicates whether there is a response in the output queue ESB event status bit Indicates if any of the conditions in the Standard Event Status Register are set and enabled MSS master summary status Indicates whether the device has a reason for requesting service This bit is returned for the STB query RQS request service Indicates if the device is requesting service This bit is returned during a serial poll RQS will be set to O after being read via a serial poll MSS is not reset by STB Status Reporting Bit Definitions MSG message Indicates whether there is a message in the message queue Not implemented in the Agilen
3. el space Ti msus wm MSUS c CD Da space directory name Lal Of DOWNload space name je msus a description gt C o type I u oo block_data gt 16500514 MMEMory Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram 12 3 MMEMory Subsystem Figure 12 1 Continued Y A pe INI Tidlize gt H r space LiF gt Se MSUS gt LOAD gt space o name El C CONFig C gt Fe Ban nodule LOAD m ASSembler space ia_name le msus o module space directory name amp ze L uU MSUS D E space nm msus Msi Be v g space m msus J A 16500S15 MMEMory Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram continued 12 4 Figure 12 1 Continued MMEMory Subsystem Y PURGe space name LOA com G space gt msus o new name STORe gt space name ED CONFig C Cay a description C module H UPLoad space gt name e msus gt VOLume G space
4. Example 10 DIM Label 6 Response 80 15 PRINT This program shows the values for a signal s Compare listing 20 INPUT Enter signal label Label 25 OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM HEADER OFF Turn headers off from responses 30 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE RANGE 35 ENTER XXX First Last Read in the range s end points 40 PRI LINE VALUE of Label 45 FOR State First TO Last Print compare value for each state 50 OUTPUT XXX MACH2 COMPARE DATA LabelS 7 VALS State 55 ENTER XXX ResponseS 60 PRINT State Responses 65 NEXT State 70 END 20 7 Query Returned Format lt difference_ occurrence gt lt line_number gt Example Command lt line_num gt Example COMPare Subsystem FIND FIND MACHine 1 2 COMPare FIND lt difference_occurrence gt The FIND query is used to get the line number of a specified difference occurrence first second third etc within the current compare range as dictated by the RANGe command A difference is counted for each line where at least one of the current labels has a discrepancy between its acquired state data listing and its compare data image Invoking the FIND query updates both the Listing and Compare displays so that the line number returned is in the center of the screen MACHine 1 2 COMPare FIND lt difference_occurrence gt lt line_number gt lt NL gt integer from 1 to 245760
5. T PUT 707 MACH1 TWAVEFORM INSERT COUNT ALL PUT 707 MACH1 TWAVEFORM RANGE 1E 6 PUT 707 MENU 1 5 i kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkxkxkkkxkkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkkkkxkkkkxk Set the marker mode MMODE to time so t for marker measurements Place the X marker on 03 hex and the O marker on 07 hex Then 03h after fter the X marker is found 11 the timing he trigger and occurrence of ra OUTPUT 707 MAC OUTPUT 707 MAC OUTPUT 707 MAC OUTPUT 707 MAC OUTPUT 707 MAC 1 OUTPUT 707 MAC WAIT 2 OUTPUT 707 MAC WAIT 2 hat patterns are available analyzer to find the first the first occurrence of 07h INE1 TWAVEFORM MMODE PATT ERN INE1 TWAVEFORM XPATTERN INE1 TWAVEFORM OPATTERN COUNT H03 COUNT H07 INE1 TWAVEFORM XCONDITION ENTERING INE1 TWAVEFORM OCONDITION ENTERING INE1 TWAVEFORM XSEARCH 1 INE1 TWAVEFORM OSEARCH 1 TRIGGER XMARKER i kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkkxkkkxkxkkxkkkxkkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkkkkxkkkxkxk Run the timing analyzer in single mode OU PUT 707 RMOD OU WAI
6. Query TIMebase DELay The DELay query returns the current delay setting Returned Format TIMebase DELay lt delay_time gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX TIM DEL 34 4 Command Example Query Returned Format Example TIMebase Subsystem MODE MODE TIMebase MODE TRIGgered AUTO The MODE command sets the oscilloscope timebase to either Auto or Triggered mode When the AUTO mode is chosen the oscilloscope waits approximately 50 ms for a trigger to occur Ifa trigger is not generated within that time then auto trigger is executed Ifa signal is not applied to the input a baseline is displayed If there is a signal at the input and the specified trigger conditions have not been met within 50 ms the waveform display will not be synchronized to a trigger When the TRIGgered mode is chosen the oscilloscope waits until a trigger is received before data is acquired The TRIGgered mode should be used when the trigger source signal has less than a 20 Hz repetition rate or when the trigger events counter is set so that the number of trigger events would not occur before 50 ms The Auto Trig On field in the trigger menu is the same as the AUTO mode over GPIB or RS 232 C The TRIGgered command is the same as the Auto Trig Off on the front panel OUTPUT XXX TIM MODE AUTO TIMebase MODE J The MODE query returns the current Timebase mode T
7. Status AND 1 Repeat the MESR query until measurement is complete KAKKKKKXKKKKKKKX KK KKKKkkk VIEW THE R ESULTS kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkkkkkxxkx k Display the State Listing and selec allows you to see the beginning of t a line number in the listing that the listing on the logic analyzer 43 7 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 Programming Examples Making a State Analyzer Measurement LINE display OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 SLIS OUTPUT 707 MENU 1 7 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 SLIS END COLUMN 1 16 SCOUNT D ECIMAL 43 8 a II DU a DS I SS SS E CES HRR SEP DRE SED Programming Examples Making a State Compare Measurement Making a State Compare Measurement This program example acquires a state listing copies the listing to the compare listing acquires another state listing and compares both listings to find differences This program is written so that you can run it with the E2433 Logic Analyzer Training Board This example is the same as the State Compare example in chapter 3 of the Logic Analyzer Training Kit KKKKKKKKKKK STATE COMPARE EXAMP LE kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkkkxkkkkkxkxkkkxk E for the Agilent 1670G series Logic Analyzer I KAKKRKKRRKARKR SELECT THE Agilent 1670G MODULE kok kk kk kk module slot in which the Agilent 167
8. Query MACHine 1 2 STRigger TAKenbranch The TAKenbranch query returns the current setting Returned Format MACHine 1 2 STRigger TAKenbranch STORe NOSTore lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 STRIGGER TAKENBRANCH 16 19 Command lt N gt lt timer_num gt Example Query Returned Format Example STRigger STRace Subsystem TCONtrol TCONtrol MACHine 1 2 STRigger TCONtrol lt N gt lt timer_num gt OFF STARt PAUSe CONTinue The TCONtrol timer control command allows you to turn off start pause or continue the timer for the specified level The time value of the timer is defined by the TIMER command There are two timers and they are available for either machine but not both machines simultaneously integer from 1 to the number of existing sequence levels maximum 12 112 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 STRIGGER TCONTROL6 1 PAUSE MACHine 1 2 STRigger TCONTROL lt N gt lt timer_num gt The TCONtrol query returns the current TCONtrol setting of the specified level MACHine 1 2 STRigger TCONTROL lt N gt lt timer_num gt OFF STARt PAUSe CONTinue lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 STRIGGER TCONTROL6 1 16 20 Command lt term_id gt lt label_name gt lt pattern gt Example STRigger STRace Subsystem TERM TERM MACHine 1 2 STRigger TERM lt term_id gt lt label_na
9. 18 4 Command Example Query Returned Format Example Command Example SWAVeform Subsystem ACCumulate ACCumulate MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform ACCumulate ON 1 OFF 0 The ACCumulate command allows you to control whether the waveform display gets erased between individual runs or whether subsequent waveforms are displayed over the previous waveforms OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SWAVEFORM ACCUMULATE ON MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform ACCumulate The ACCumulate query returns the current setting The query always shows the setting as the characters 0 off or 1 on MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform ACCumulate 0 1 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SWAVEFORM ACCUMULATE ACQuisition MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform ACQuisition AUTOmatic MANual The ACQuisition command allows you to specify the acquisition mode for the state analyzer The acquisition modes are automatic and manual OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SWAVEFORM ACQUISITION AUTOMATIC 18 5 Query Returned Format Example Command lt marker_type gt Example Command Example SWAVeform Subsystem CENTer MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform ACQuisition The ACQusition query returns the current acquisition mode MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform ACQuisition AUTOmatic MANual lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SWAVEFORM ACQUISITION CENTer MACHine 1
10. Message Communication and System Functions Introduction This chapter describes the operation of instruments that operate in compliance with the IEEE 488 2 syntax standard It is intended to give you enough basic information about the IEEE 488 2 standard to successfully program the logic analyzer You can find additional detailed information about the IEEE 488 2 standard in ANSVIEEE Std 488 2 1987 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands The Agilent Technologies 1670G series logic analyzer is designed to be compatible with other IEEE 488 2 compatible instruments Instruments that are compatible with IEEE 488 2 must also be compatible with IEEE 488 1 GPIB bus standard however IEEE 488 1 compatible instruments may or may not conform to the IEEE 488 2 standard The IEEE 488 2 standard defines the message exchange protocols by which the instrument and the controller will communicate It also defines some common capabilities which are found in all IEEE 488 2 instruments This chapter also contains a few items which are not specifically defined by IEEE 488 2 but deal with message communication or system functions The syntax and protocol for RS 232 C program messages and response messages for the 1670G series logic analyzer are structured very similarly to those described by 488 2 In most cases the same structure shown in this chapter for 488 2 also works for RS 232 C Because of this no additional in
11. OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM HEADER OFF OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM LONGFORM OFF 1 Status 0 OUTPUT 707 MESR1 ENTER 707 Status 0 0 0 0 a a a 01 01 00 HM OU IA uN NN Ro NN OV Owe WN FR 1 E TS TC TE A ES E SS SEA E E E E Ze ES a a ENES Print the MESR register status CLEAR SC REEN PRINT Measurement complete status is Status AND 1 PRINT 0 not complete 1 complete Repeat the MESR query until measurement is complete WAIT 1 IF Status AND 1 1 THEN GOTO 630 GOTO 510 END PRINT TABXY 30 15 Measurement is complete 43 17 FROG OOS ON OT HS ECR Ja oooooo0o00o0o0 0 J 004aQNnNRp WU NNNDNNDNDNDNDNDNDNt oVVOonN oa Oe wN H OLY O 00 0 9 5 0 Ci 9 1010 OS Programming Examples Sending Queries to the Logic Analyzer Sending Queries to the Logic Analyzer This program example contains the steps required to send a query to the logic analyzer Sending the query alone only puts the requested information in an output buffer of the logic analyzer You must follow the query with an ENTER statement to transfer the query response to the controller When the query response is sent to the logic analyzer the query is properly terminated in the logic analyzer If you send the query but fail to send an ENTER statement the logic analyzer will display the error message Query Interrupted when it receives the next command from the controller and the query r
12. 12 9 Command lt name gt lt new_name gt lt msus gt Example MMEMory Subsystem COPY COPY MMEMory COPY lt name gt lt msus gt lt new_name gt lt msus gt The COPY command copies one file to a new file or an entire disk s contents to another disk The two lt name gt parameters are the filenames The first pair of parameters specifies the source file The second pair specifies the destination file An error is generated if the source file doesn t exist or if the destination file already exists A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form gof NNNNN NNN g of NNNNNNNN NNN INTernall for the flexible disk drive To copy the contents of FILE1 to FILE2 OUTPUT XXX MM EMORY COPY up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form Mass Storage Unit specifier INTernal0 for the hard disk drive and FIIL Bar EL EIL 12 10 Command lt name gt lt msus gt lt description gt lt type gt lt block_data gt Example MMEMory Subsystem DOWNload DOWNload MMEMory DOWNload lt name gt lt msus gt lt description gt lt type gt lt block_data gt The DOWNload
13. 19 6 SCHart Subsystem VAXis Query MACHine 1 2 SCHart VAXis The VAXis query returns the current vertical axis label and scaling Returned Format MACHine 1 2 SCHart VAXis lt label_name gt lt low_value gt lt high_value gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SCHART VAXIS 19 7 20 COMPare Subsystem Introduction Commands in the state COMPare subsystem provide the ability to do a bit by bit comparison between the acquired state data listing and a compare data image The commands are e CLEar e CMASk e COPY e DATA e FIND e LINE e MENU e RANGe e RUNTil e SET 20 2 COMPare Subsystem Figure 20 1 compare Clear gt MASK space H s gt abel name care_spec gt a OMASk space Is abel_name gt DATA wm Space label_name eC em ine num gt data_pattern H r ine_num gu data_pattern gt DATA e space label_name HC ine_num gt FIND space m difference_occurrence gt LINE gt space I ine num gt gt RA Ge space PART al gt start_line Pe gt stop_line an FULL v RUNTi 1 gt SET 16550503 COMPare Subsystem Syntax Diagram
14. OTAG MACHine 1 2 TLISt OTAG lt time_value gt The OTAG command specifies the tag value on which the O Marker should be placed The tag value is time Ifthe data is not valid tagged data no action is performed real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST OTAG 40 0E 6 MACHine 1 2 TLISt OTAG The OTAG query returns the O Marker position in time regardless of whether the marker was positioned in time or through a pattern search If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E3 MACHine 1 2 TLISt OTAG lt time_value gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST OTAG 24 14 Command Example Command lt run_until_ spec gt lt value gt Example Query TLISt Subsystem REMove REMove MACHine 1 2 TLISt REMove The REMove command removes all labels except the leftmost label from the listing menu OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST REMOVE RUNTIil Run Until MACHine 1 2 TLISt RUNTil lt run_until_spec gt The RUNTil command defines a stop condition when the trace mode is repetitive Specifying OFF causes the analyzer to make runs until either STOP is selected from the front panel or the STOP command is issued There are four conditions based on the time between the X and O markers e The difference is less than LT some value e The difference is greater than GT some value e The difference is inside some rang
15. The TIMER command sets the time value for the specified timer The limits of the timer are 400 ns to 500 seconds in 16 ns to 500 us increments The increment value varies with the time value of the specified timer real number from 400 ns to 500 seconds in increments which vary from 16 ns to 500 us OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER TIMER1 100E 6 MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TIMER 1 2 The TIMER query returns the current time value for the specified timer MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TIMER 1 2 lt time_value gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER TIMER1 22 21 Command lt time_val gt lt poststore gt Example Query Returned Format Example TTRigger TTRace Subsystem TPOSition Trigger Position TPOSition Trigger Position MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TPOSition STARt CENTer END DELay lt time_val gt POSTstore lt poststore gt The TPOSition command sets the trigger at the start center end or any position in the trace poststore Poststore is defined as 0 to 100 percent with a poststore of 100 percent being the same as putting the trigger start position and a poststore of O percent being the same as ending the trace with the trigger The DELay mode sets the time between the trigger point and the start of the trace causing the trace to begin after the trigger point real number from either 2 x sample period
16. 1 14 Example Receiving Information from the Instrument After receiving a query logic analyzer instruction followed by a question mark the logic analyzer interrogates the requested function and places the answer in its output queue The answer remains in the output queue until it is read or until another command is issued When read the message is transmitted across the bus to the designated listener typically a controller The input statement for receiving a response message from an logic analyzer s output queue usually has two parameters the device address and a format specification for handling the response message All results for queries sent in a program message must be read before another program message is sent For example when you send the query MACHINE1 ASSIGN you must follow that query with an input statement In BASIC this is usually done with an ENTER statement The format for handling the response messages is dependent on both the controller and the programming language To read the result of the query command SYSTEM LONGFORM you can execute this BASIC statement to enter the current setting for the long form command in the numeric variable Setting ENTER XXX Setting Example Introduction to Programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Response Header Options Response Header Options The format of the returned ASCII string depends
17. CAUTION MMEMory Subsystem INITialize INITialize MM EMory I NITialize LIF DOS lt msus gt The INITialize command formats the disk in either LIF Logical Information Format or DOS Disk Operating System Ifno format is specified then the initialize command will format the disk in the LIF format Mass Storage Unit specifier INTernal0 for the hard disk drive and INTernal1 for the flexible disk drive OU OU PU PU XXX XXX MM EMORY INI MM EMORY INI IALIZ E DOS TALIZE LIF INT ERNALO Once executed the initialize command formats the specified disk permanently erasing all existing information from the disk After that there is no way to retrieve the original information 12 13 Command lt name gt lt msus gt lt module gt Example MMEMory Subsystem LOAD CONFig LOAD CONFig MMEMory LOAD CONfig lt name gt lt msus gt lt module gt The LOAD command loads a configuration file from the disk into the logic analyzer software options or the system The lt name gt parameter specifies the filename from the disk The optional lt module gt parameter specifies which module s to load the file into The accepted values are 0 for system and 1 for logic analyzer Not specifying the lt module gt parameter is equivalent to performing a LOAD ALL from the front p
18. Query Syntax un EQuence PROGram lt line_number gt Returned Format F External Pattern END IF WAIT event gt SIG IMB START LOOP REPEAT TIMES ND LOOP BREAK MACRO Macro INIT EQUENCE START NIT SEQUENCE END MAIN EQUENCE START MAIN SEQUENCE END lt data_value gt lt data_value gt WM EA es Example 10 OUTPUT XXX 20 OUTPUT XXX un EQ PROG 248 NOOP 17 34 121 EQ PROG 1786 WAIT A 17 34 121 un 30 OUTPUT XXX SEQ PROG 2652 REPEAT 26 17 34 SLAVER 40 OUTPUT XXX SEQ PROG 3166 MACR4 HABCD 41 Passes a single parameter to this instance of MACRO 4 50 OUTPUT XXX SEQ PROG 3186 MACR6 0 51 Assume no parameter defined for MACRO 6 39 13 Command Command Syntax lt program line number gt lt program line range gt Example REMove The REMove command allows you to remove one or several lines from the pattern generator program If only one parameter number is given that line number is deleted If two numbers are given the range of lines between those two values inclusive is deleted The command REMove ALL deletes the entire program SEQuence REMove lt program line number lt program line range gt ALL gt
19. 22 7 Example Selector Example TTRigger TTRace Subsystem TTRigger TTRace Trace Trigger Qualifier Rules The following rules apply to qualifiers e Qualifiers are quoted strings and therefore need quotes e Expressions are evaluated from left to right e Parentheses are used to change the order evaluation and therefore are optional e An expression must map into the combination logic presented in the combination pop up menu within the TTRigger menu rar AORB A OR B AND C A OR B AND C AND IN_RANGE2 A OR B AND C AND IN_RANGE1 IN_RANGE1 AND A OR B AND C TTRigger TTRace Trace Trigger MACHine 1 2 TTRigger The TTRigger selector is used as a part of a compound header to access the settings found in the Timing Trace menu It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch directly below the MACHine level in the command tree OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER TAG TIME Command Example Query Returned Format Example Command TTRigger TTRace Subsystem ACOQuisition ACQuisition MACHine 1 2 TTRigger ACQuisition AUTOmatic MANual The ACQuisition command specifies the acquisition mode for the Timing analyzer OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER ACQUISITION AUTOMATIC MACHine 1 2 TTRigger ACQuisition The ACQuisition query returns the current acquisition mo
20. Command ACCumulate ACQMode ACQuisition ARM ASSign AUToload AUTorange BASE BEEPer BRANch BUCKet CAPability CARDcage CATalog CD CENTer CESE CESR CLEar CLOCk CLRPattern CLRStat CMASk COLumn COPY DATA DELay DELete DOWNload DSP EDGE EOI ERRor FIND GLEDge HAXis HEADer Subsystem SCHart SWAVeform TWAVeform TFORmat STRigger SWAVeform TTRigger TWAVeform MACHine MACHine MMEMory TINTerval SYMBol Mainframe STRigger TTRigger OVERView Mainframe Mainframe MMEMory MMEMory SWAVeform TWAVeform Mainframe Mainframe COMPare STRigger TTRigger SFORmat SLISt SWAVeform TLISt TWAVeform SWAVeform TWAVeform COMPare SLISt TLISt COMPare MMEMory COMPare SLISt SYSTem TLISt SWAVeform TWAVeform WLISt INTermodule MMEMory SYSTem TTRigger Mainframe SYSTem COMPare STRigger TTRigger TTRigger SCHart SYSTem Command HIGH HISTogram HSTatistic HTIMe INITialize INPort INSert LABel LER LEVelarm LINE LOAD LOCKout LONGform LOW MACHine MASTer MENU MESE MESR MKDir MLENgth MMEMory MMODe MODE MOPQual MQUAal MSI NAME OCONdition OMARker OPATtern OSEarch OSTate OTAG OTHer Subsystem OVERView SPA MODE HISTogram INTermodule MMEMory INTermodule INTermodule SWAVeform TWAVeform WLISt SFORmat TFORmat OVERView HISTogram Mainframe MACHine COMPare SLISt TLISt WLISt MMEMory Mainframe SYSTem OVERView Mainframe
21. Index 6 Copyright Agilent Technologies 1992 2002 All Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws Restricted Rights Legend Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to restrictions set forth in subparagraph C 1 Gi of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause in DFARS 252 227 7013 Agilent Technologies 3000 Hanover Street Palo Alto CA 94304 U S A Rights for non DOD U S Government Departments and Agencies are set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 1 2 Document Warranty The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Agilent Technologies makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Safety This apparatus has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC Publication 348 Safety Requirements for Measuring Apparatus and has been supplied in a safe condition This is a Safety Class I instrument provided with terminal for protective earthing Before applying power verify that the correct safety precautions are taken see the following warning
22. Introduction This chapter describes the interface functions and some general concepts of RS 232 C The RS 232 C interface on this instrument is Agilent s implementation of EIA Recommended Standard RS 232 C Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Communications Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange With this interface data is sent one bit at a time and characters are not synchronized with preceding or subsequent data characters Each character is sent as a complete entity without relationship to other events Programming Over RS 232 C Interface Operation Interface Operation The Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer can be programmed with a controller over RS 232 C using either a minimum three wire or extended hardwire interface The operation and exact connections for these interfaces are described in more detail in the following sections When you are programming an Agilent 1670G series over RS 232 C with a controller you are normally operating directly between two DTE Data Terminal Equipment devices as compared to operating between a DTE device and a DCE Data Communications Equipment device When operating directly between two DTE devices certain considerations must be taken into account For a three wire operation XON XOFF must be used to handle protocol between the devices For extended hardwire operation protocol may be handled either with XON XOFF or by manipulating the CTS and RTS lines o
23. OUTPUT 707 START WAIT 2 Allow the analyzer to fill memory at least once OUTPUT 707 STOP OUTPUT 707 MENU 1 10 43 11 1190 1200 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 1310 1320 1330 1340 1350 1360 1370 1380 1390 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 KB DB DB BB Wa 1500 1510 1520 1530 1540 1550 1551 1560 1570 1580 1590 1591 1600 1610 Programming Examples Making a State Compare Measurement PKKKK KK KK KK KKKK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK AAA A I U Dimension strings in which the compare find query COMPARE FIND enters the line numbers and error numbers DIM Line 20 DIM Error 4 DIM Comma 1 1 KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK AAA AAA AAA Display the Difference listing I OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 COMPARE MENU DIFFERENCE i kkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkkkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkxkxkkkxkxkkxkkkxkkxkxkkkxkkxkxkkkkxkxkxkkxkkkxkkxkxkkkxkkxkxkkkkkxkkx k Loop to query all 508 possible errors 1 FOR Error 1 TO 508 I Read the compare differences 1 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 COMPARE FIND amp VALS Error I i kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkxkkkxkxkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkxkkkxkkxkxkkkxkkxkkx Format the Error string data for display on the controller screen 1 IF Er
24. The SETColor command is used to change a grayscale shade on the logic analyzer screen or to return to the default screen colors The colors on a remote display are not affected Four parameters are sent with the command to change a color e Color Number first parameter e Hue second parameter e Saturation third parameter e Luminosity last parameter lt color gt An integer from 0 to 7 lt hue gt An integer from 0 to 100 lt sat gt An integer from 0 to 100 lt lum gt An integer from 0 to 100 Color Number 0 cannot be changed Example OUTPUT XXX SETCOLOR 3 60 100 60 OUTPUT XXX SETC DEFAULT Query SETColor lt color gt The SETColor query returns the values for a specified grayscale shade Returned Format SETColor lt color gt lt hue gt lt sat gt lt lum gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX SETCOLOR 3 9 21 Command Example Command Example Instrument Commands STARt STARt STARt The STARt command starts the logic analyzer running in the specified run mode see RMODe The STARt command is an overlapped command An overlapped command is a command that allows execution of subsequent commands while the device operations initiated by the overlapped command are still in progress OUTPUT XXX START STOP STOP The STOP command stops the logic analyzer The STOP command is an overla
25. lt number_of_samples gt lt NL gt El SWAV EFORM D ELAY Command lt label_name gt lt bit_id gt lt bit_num gt Example Command lt memory_length gt Example SWAVeform Subsystem INSert INSert MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform INSert lt label_name gt lt bit_id gt The INSert command adds waveforms to the state waveform display Waveforms are added from top to bottom on the screen When 96 waveforms are present additional waveforms replace the last waveform Bit numbers are zero based so a label with 8 bits is referenced as bits O through 7 Specifying OVERlay causes a composite waveform display of all bits or channels for the specified label Specifying ALL inserts all of the bits individually string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters OVERlay lt bit_num gt ALL integer representing a label bit from 0 to 31 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SWAVEFORM INSERT ABC OVERLAY OUTPUT XXX MACH1 SWAV INSERT POD1 B1001 MLENgth MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform MLENgth lt memory_length gt The MLENgth command specifies the analyzer memory depth Valid memory depths range from 4096 states or samples through the maximum system memory depth minus 8192 Memory depth is affected by acquisition mode If the lt memory_depth gt value sent is not a legal value the closest legal setting is used 4096 8192 16384 32768
26. For more information on the specific oscilloscope commands refer to chapters 29 through 36 of this manual 28 4 Command Example See Also Oscilloscope Root Level Commands DiGitize DIGitize DIGitize The DIGitize command is used to acquire waveform data for transfer over GPIB and RS 232 C The command initiates Repetitive Run for the oscilloscope and the analyzer if it is grouped with the oscilloscope via Group Run Ifa RUNtil condition has been specified in any module the oscilloscope and the grouped analyzer acquire data until the RUNtil conditions have been satisfied The Acquire subsystem commands may be used to set up conditions such as acquisition type and average count for the DIGitize command See the Acquire subsystem for the description of these commands When a count number in the average acquisition type has been specified the oscilloscope and grouped analyzer acquire data until these conditions have been satisfied When both the RUNtil and the ACQuire COUNt have been satisfied the acquisition stops For faster data transfer over the interface bus display a menu that has no waveforms on screen The DIGitize command is an overlap command so ensure that all data has been acquired and stored inthe channel buffers before executing any other commands The MESE command and the MESR query may be used to check for run complete or a WAlt instruction may be inserted after the DIGitize command to
27. WLISt XTIMe lt time_value gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX WLIST XTIME 14 10 15 SFORmat Subsystem Introduction The SFORmat subsystem contains the commands available for the State Format menu in the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer These commands are e CLOCk e LABel e MASTer e MOPQual e MQUal e REMove e SETHold e SLAVe e SOPQual e SQUal e THReshold SFORmat Subsystem Figure 15 1 a gt y SFORmat CLOCK lt N gt space NASTer gt DEMultiplex LABel space gt lobel_name gt Lo gt polarity ER Je clock bits LATE f Je upper _bits Le Daa lower bits HRM Laser J space ee lobel_name gt master J space y clock id me gt clock_spec Het1AsTer Jar space yA clock id gt Hex MOPQual space clock_pair_id a Da qual_operation u pa MOPQual gt space gt clock _pair_id gt wm MQUOL gt space gt qual_num Lm gt clock _id e gt qual_level m Maua J space gual num gt Y 1555504 A SFORmat Subsystem Syntax Diagram 15 3 SFORmat Subsystem Figure 15 1 continued Y Remove space ALL 4 label_name f e SETHoId BY gt spac
28. gt XOTime gt label name Far label name LC label_pattern H r occurrence E TRiGger E STARt H r XSEarch XTIMe space Nal time_value XTIMe TWAVeform Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued 16555515 23 5 Table 23 1 TWAVeform Subsystem TWAVeform Parameter Values Parameter delay_value module_spec bit_id label_name label_pattern occurrence time_value time_range run_until_spec GT LT value time_val sample_period marker_type memory_length percent Value real number between 2500 s and 2500 s T integer from 0 to 31 string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters B 0O 1IX 01011121314 1516171X H 0 1121314 15 16 7 8 9 A B C D E F X el 10 11 12131415 16 171819 integer real number real number between 10 ns and 10 ks OFF LT lt value gt GT lt value gt INRange lt value gt lt value gt OUTRange lt value gt lt value gt greater than less than real number real number from 2x sample_period to 524288 x sample_period real number from Ans to 41us X O XO TRIGger 4096 8192 16384 32768 65536 131072 262144 524288 1032192 integer from 1 to 100 23 6 Selector Example Command lt setting gt Example Query Returned Format Example TWAVeform Subsystem
29. real number OUTPUT XXX MARKER TAVERAGE 32 12 Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example MARKer Subsystem TMAXimum TMAXimum MARKer TMAXimum The TMAXimum query returns the value of the maximum time between the X and O markers If there is no valid data the query returns 9 9E37 MARKer TMAXimum lt time_value gt lt NL gt real number OUTPUT XXX MARKER TMAXIMUM TMINimum MARKer TMINimum The TMINimum query returns the value of the minimum time between the X and O markers If there is no valid data the query returns 9 9537 MARKer TMINimum lt time_value gt lt NL gt real number OUTPUT XXX MARKER TMINIMUM 32 13 Command Example Query Returned Format lt state gt Example MARKer Subsystem TMODe TMODe MARKer TMODe OFF ON AUTO The TMODe command allows you to select the time marker mode The choices are OFF ON and AUTO When OFF time marker measurements cannot be made When the time markers are turned on the X and O markers can be moved to make time and voltage measurements The AUTO mode allows you to make automatic marker placements by specifying channel slope and occurrence count for each marker Also the Statistics mode may be used when AUTO is chosen Statistics mode allows you to make minimum
30. 20 12 21 TFORmat Subsystem Introduction The TFORmat subsystem contains the commands available for the Timing Format menu in the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer These commands are ACQMode LABel e REMove THReshold TFORmat Subsystem Figure 21 1 FEN e Ned Y TFORmat gt ACOMode J space FULL gt HALF pa ACQMode gt e LaBe Ds space name ear polarity A clock_bits D NG 1 Ds upper_bits C Ds lower_bits gt e LABeI my space e REMove my space H THReshold lt N gt DZ space TIL gt gt THReshold lt N gt 16555510 TFORmat Subsystem Syntax Diagram 21 3 Table 21 1 Selector Example TFORmat Subsystem TFORmat Timing Format TFORmat Subsystem Parameter Values Parameter Value lt N gt an integer from 1 to 8 indicating pod name string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters polarity POSitive NEGative upper_bits format integer from 0 to 65535 for a pod pods are assigned in decreasing order lower_bits format integer from 0 to 65535 for a pod pods are assigned in decreasing order value voltage real number 6 00 to 6 00 clock_bits format integer from 0 to 65535 for a clock clocks are assigned in decreasing order TFORmat Timing Format MACHine 1 2 TFORm
31. Command lt time_value gt Example Query Returned Format Example Command Example TWAVeform Subsystem RANGe RANGe MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform RANGe lt time_value gt The RANGe command specifies the full screen time in the timing waveform menu Itis equivalent to ten times the seconds per division setting on the display The allowable values for RANGe are from 10 ns to 10 ks real number between 10 ns and 10 ks OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM RANGE 100E 9 MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform RANGE The RANGe query returns the current full screen time MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform RANGe lt time_value gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM RANGE REMove MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform REMove The REMove command deletes all waveforms from the display OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM REMOVE 23 16 TWAVeform Subsystem RUNTIl Run Until RUNTil Run Until Command MACHine 1 2 TwWAVeform RUNTil lt run_until_spec gt The RUNTil command defines stop criteria based on the time between the X and O markers when the trace mode is in repetitive When OFF is selected the analyzer will run until either STOP is selected from the front panel or the STOP command is sent Run until options are e Less Than LT a specified time value e Greater Than GT a specified time value e In Range INRange between two time values
32. E SINGLE PUT 707 START 1 2 i kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkkkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkkxkxkkkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkkxkkkxkkkxkxkx id WR urn the longform and headers on dimens HU SG 707 SYS PUT FOT SYS time 100 ER 707 Mtime NT Mtime ata send the XOTIME query and print th OTIME query da Di ta EM LONGFORM ON EM HEADER ON PUT 707 MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XOTIME ion a string for the query e string containing the 43 4 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 0 J004s NR 27 95 2 2 I u EI Eo E SED a A SED 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Programming Examples Making a State Analyzer Measurement Making a State Analyzer Measurement This state analyzer program selects the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer displays the configuration menu defines a state machine displays the state trigger menu and sets a state trigger for multilevel triggering This program then starts a single acquisition measurement while checking for measurement completion This program is written so that you can run it with the E2433 Logic Analyzer Training Board kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkk kxkxx k STATE ANALYZER EXAMPLE kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkkxk xxk kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxx for the Agilent 1670G Logic Analyzer kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkx
33. FORMAT LABEL B POSITIVE 0 255 50 OUTPUT XXX SEQ REMOVE ALL 60 OUTPUT XXX SEQ INSERT 0 NOOP H7F HFF 70 OUTPUT XXX SEQ INSERT 4 NOOP H7F HFF 80 OUTPUT XXX RMODE REPETITIVE 90 OUTPUT XXX START 100 END The three Xs XXX after the OUTPUT statement in the above example refer to the device address required for programming over either GPIB or RS 232 C Refer to your controller manual and programming language reference manual for information on initializing the interface Program Comments Line 10 selects the pattern generator Line 20 removes all labels previously assigned 37 3 Programming the Pattern Generator Selecting the Pattern Generator Line 30 assigns label A positive polarity and assigns the seven least significant bits of pod 5 Line 40 assigns label B and assigns all eight bits of pod 4 Line 50 removes all program lines Line 60 inserts a new line after line 0 in the INIT SEQUENCE portion of the program Line 70 inserts a new line after line 4 in the MAIN SEQUENCE portion of the program Recall that the default MAIN SEQUENCE already has two lines of program Line 80 Sets the RMODE to repetitive If the program is to be run only once select the RMODE SINGLE command Line 90 Starts the program Selecting the Pattern Generator Before you can program the pattern generator you must first select it otherwise there is no way to direc
34. With a three wire interface the software as compared to interface hardware controls the data flow between the logic analyzer and the controller The three wire interface provides no hardware means to control data flow between the controller and the logic analyzer Therefore XON OFF protocol is the only means to control this data flow The three wire interface provides a much simpler connection between devices since you can ignore hardware handshake requirements The communications software you are using in your computer controller must be capable of using XON XOFF exclusively in order to use three wire interface cables For example some communications software packages can use XON XOFF but are also dependent on the CTS and DSR lines being true to communicate The logic analyzer uses the following connections on its RS 232 C interface for three wire communication e Pin7 SGND Signal Ground e Pin2 TD Transmit Data from logic analyzer e Pin3 RD Receive Data into logic analyzer The TD Transmit Data line from the logic analyzer must connect to the RD Receive Data line on the controller Likewise the RD line from the logic analyzer must connect to the TD line on the controller Internal pull up resistors in the logic analyzer assure the DCD DSR and CTS lines remain high when you are using a three wire interface Extended Interface with Hardware Handshake With the extended interface both the software and the hardware
35. an integer specifying the program line to be removed an integer specifying the last line number in a range of lines to remove OUTPUT XXX SEQ REM 1 4 39 14 40 MACRo Subsystem MACRo Subsystem The commands of the MACRo subsystem allow you to write and edit macros for use in the pattern generator program Up to 100 macros may be called into the main listing program The macros are labeled Macro0 through Macro99 Macro0 is always available initial contents are START END lines only All other macros are created whenever a MACRo lt gt subheader that is not yet defined is used The new macro will then appear on all macro lists until a MACRo lt gt REMove command is issued A macro can be named MACRo lt gt NAME command but cannot be referenced by remote control commands using that name The SEQuence COLumn command is used to define the ordering of the sequence display listing Macro display listings will appear in the same order as the main sequence Changing the display while on a macro listing will also affect the main sequence when you return to that display listing The SEQuence EPATtern command is used to define event patterns that are shared by both the main sequence and all macros Changing an event pattern definition for use by a single macro will change its definition for all other macros and the main sequence The command REMove ALL can be used to totally clear the contents of a mac
36. lt value gt OUTRange lt value gt lt value gt real number from 9E9 to 9E9 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST RUNTIL GT 800 0E 6 MACHine 1 2 SLISt RUNTil The RUNTil query returns the current stop criteria MACHine 1 2 SLISt RUNTil lt run_until_spec gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST RUNTIL 17 16 Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example SLISt Subsystem TAVerage TAVerage MACHine 1 2 SLISt TAVerage The TAVerage query returns the value of the average time between the X and O Markers Ifthe number of valid runs is zero the query returns 9 9E37 Valid runs are those where the pattern search for both the X and O markers was successful resulting in valid delta time measurements MACHine 1 2 SLISt TAVerage lt time_value gt lt NL gt real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST TAVERAGE TMAXimum MACHine 1 2 SLISt TMAXimum The TMAXimum query returns the value of the maximum time between the X and O Markers If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 MACHine 1 2 SLISt TMAXimum lt time_value gt lt NL gt real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST TMAXIMUM 17 17 Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example Query Returned Format lt valid_runs gt lt total_runs gt Example SLISt
37. 1 0 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM HEADER Headers should be turned off when returning values to numeric variables Command Example Query Returned Format Example SYSTem Subsystem LONGform LONGform SYSTem LONGform ON I1 OFF O The LONGform command sets the longform variable which tells the instrument how to format query responses Ifthe LONGform command is set to OFF command headers and alpha arguments are sent from the instrument in the abbreviated form Ifthe the LONGform command is set to ON the whole word will be output This command has no affect on the input data messages to the instrument Headers and arguments may be input in either the longform or shortform regardless of how the LONGform command is set OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM LONGFORM ON SYSTem LONGform The query returns the status of the LONGform command SYSTem LONGform 1 0 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM LONGFORM Command lt pathname gt lt start gt lt end gt Example Query SYSTem Subsystem PRINt PRINt SYSTem PRINt ALL DISK lt pathname gt lt msus gt SYSTem PRINt PARTial lt start gt lt end gt DISK lt pathname gt lt msus gt SYSTem PRINt SCReen DISK lt pathname gt lt msus gt BTIF CTIF PCX EPS The PRINt command initiates a print of the screen or listing buffer over the current PRINTER communication
38. 1 If your logic analyzer is a 1670G or 1671G model then the next number is 35 and the last three numbers are 1 A 1 indicates no card is installed The second part of the string is five single digit numbers which indicate whether the card s software is installed The possible values are 0 and 1 where 0 indicates the card software is not recognized or not loaded The value for the logic analyzer will always be 1 CARDcage lt ID gt lt ID gt lt ID gt lt ID gt lt ID gt lt assign gt lt assign gt lt assign gt lt assign gt lt assign gt lt NL gt For the Agilent 1670G and Agilent 1671G logic analyzers the returned string is CARDcage 34 35 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 For the Agilent 1672G logic analyzer the returned string is CARDcage 34 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 An integer indicating the identification number 1 for not installed An integer indicating the card assignment 0 for not loaded OUTPUT XXX CARDCAGE 9 8 Command lt value gt Example Query Returned Format Example Table 9 3 Instrument Commands CESE Combined Event Status Enable CESE Combined Event Status Enable iC ES E lt value gt The CESE command sets the Combined Event Status Enable register This register is the enable register for the CESR register and contains the combined status of all ofthe MESE Module Event Status Enable registers ofthe Agilent 1670G series lo
39. 20 3 COMPare Subsystem COMPare Table 20 1 COMPare Subsystem Parameter Values Parameter Value label_name string of up to 6 characters care_spec MA reer care don t care line_num integer from 245760 to 245760 data_pattern B O 1 X 0 0 1 2 3 4 15 6I7IX FH 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 17 8 9 A B CI D E F X dra 011121314151617 819 difference_occurrence integer from 1 to 245760 start_line integer from 245760 to 245760 stop_line integer from lt start_line gt to 245760 COMPare Selector MACHine 1 2 COMPare The COMPare selector is used as part of a compound header to access the settings found in the Compare menu It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch directly below the MACHine level in the command tree Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 COMPARE FIND 819 20 4 Command Example Command lt label_name gt lt care_spec gt Example Query Returned Format COMPare Subsystem CLEar CLEar MACHine 1 2 COMPare CLEar The CLEar command clears all don t cares in the reference listing and replaces them with zeros except when the CLEar command immediately follows the SET command see SET command OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE CLEAR CMASk MACHine 1 2 COMPare CMASk lt label_name gt lt care__spec gt The CMASk Compare Mask command allows you to set the bits in the channel
40. Bit Position Bit Weight Enables 15 8 Not used 7 128 Not used 6 64 MSS Master Summary Status 5 32 ESB Event Status 4 16 MAV Message Available 3 8 LCL Local 2 4 Not used 1 2 Not used 0 1 MSB Module Summary RST Reset The RST command is not implemented on the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer The Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer will accept this command but the command has no effect on the logic analyzer The RST command is generally used to place the logic analyzer in a predefined state Because the Agilent 1670G series allows you to store predefined configuration files for individual modules or for the entire system resetting the logic analyzer can be accomplished by simply loading the appropriate configuration file For more information refer to chapter 12 MMEMory Subsystem Command lt mask gt Example Query Returned Format lt mask gt Example Common Commands SRE Service Request Enable SRE Service Request Enable SRE lt mask gt The SRE command sets the Service Request Enable Register bits The Service Request Enable Register contains a mask value for the bits to be enabled in the Status Byte Register A one in the Service Request Enable Register will enable the corresponding bit in the Status Byte Register A zero will disable the bit Refer to table 8 5 for the bits in the Service Request Enable Register and what they mask Refer to Ch
41. HEXadecimal OCTal DECimal TWOS ASCii SYMBol IASSembler for labels or ABSolute RELative for tags integer from 1032192 to 1032192 B O 1 X 0 011121314151617IX H 0 1 12 314 5 16 7 8 9 A B C D E F X 0111213141516171819 integer from 1032192 to 1032192 real number OFF LT lt value gt GT lt value gt INRange lt value gt lt value gt OUTRange lt value gt lt value gt real number 24 6 Selector Example Command TLISt Subsystem TLISt TLISt MACHine 1 2 TLISt The TLISt selector is used as part of acompound header to access those settings normally found in the Timing Listing menu It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch directly below the MACHine level in the command tree OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST LINE 256 COLumn MACHine 1 2 TLISt COLumn lt col_num gt lt module_num gt MACHine 1 2 lt label_name gt lt base gt The COLumn command configures the timing analyzer list display by assigning a label name and base to one of the 61 vertical columns in the menu A column number of 1 refers to the leftmost column When a label is assigned to a column it replaces the original label in that column When the label name is TAGS the TAGS column is assumed and the next parameter must specify RELative or ABSolute A label for tags must be assigned in order to use
42. MACHine 1 2 SLISt XOTime The XOTime query returns the time from the X to the O marker when marker mode is time or the number of states from the X to the O marker when marker mode is state If there is no data in the time mode the query returns 9 9E37 If there is no data in the state mode the query returns 2147483647 MACHine 1 2 SLISt XOTime lt XO_time gt lt XO_states gt lt NL gt real number integer OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST XOTIME 17 19 Command lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt Example Query Returned Format Example SLISt Subsystem XPATtern XPATtern MACHine 1 2 SLISt XPATtern lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt The XPATtern command allows you to construct a pattern recognizer term for the X marker which is then used with the XSEarch criteria when moving the marker on patterns Since this command deals with only one label at a time a complete specification could require several invocations When the value of a pattern is expressed in binary it represents the bit values for the label inside the pattern recognizer term In whatever base is used the value must be between 0 and Dee 1 since a label may not have more than 32 bits Because the lt label_pattern gt parameter may contain don t cares it is handled as a string of characters rather than a number string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters B O 1 X O 0111213141516
43. Programmer s Guide Publication number 01670 97021 March 2002 For Safety information Warranties and Regulatory information see the pages behind the Index Copyright Agilent Technologies 1992 2002 All Rights Reserved Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzers il In This Book This programmer s guide contains general information instrument level commands logic analyzer commands oscilloscope module commands pattern generator module commands and programming examples for programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G series logic analyzers This guide focuses on how to program the instrument over the GPIB and the RS 232 C interfaces For information on using Ethernet refer to the LAN section of your User s Guide Instruments covered by the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Programmer s Guide The Agilent 1670G series logic analyzers are available with or without oscilloscope measurement capabilities and pattern generator capabilities The Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer has a hard disk drive and optional Ethernet capability What is in the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Programmer s Guide The Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Programmer s Guide is organized in six parts 3 3 8 s 3 1 1 J8 0 0 JE E E Introduction to Programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G Programming Over GPIB Programming Over RS 232 C Programming and Documentation Conventions Message Com
44. SFORmat COMPare Mainframe Mainframe Mainframe MMEMory STRigger SWAVeform SCHart TTRigger TWAVeform Mainframe SLISt TLISt TWAVeform SFORmat SPA SFORmat SFORmat MMEMory MACHine TLISt TWAVeform OVERView SLISt TLISt TWAVeform SLISt TLISt TWAVeform SLISt TLISt WLISt SLISt TLISt HISTogram Table 4 2 continued Programming and Documentation Conventions Tree Traversal Rules Alphabetic Command Cross Reference Command OTIMe OVERlay OVERView OVSTatistic PACK PATTern PRINt PURGe PWD RANGe REMove REName RESource RMODe RTC RUNTIl SELect SEQuence SET SETColor SETHold SETup SKEW SLAVe SOPQual SPA SPERiod SQUal STARt STOP STORe TAG TAKenbranch TAVerage TCONtrol TERM Subsystem TWAVeform WLISt SLISt SPA OVERView MMEMory SYMBol SYSTem MMEMory MMEMory COMPare STRigger SWAVeform SYMBol TTRigger TWAVeform WLISt HISTogram SFORmat SLISt SWAVeform SYMBol TFORmat TLISt TWAVeform MACHine MMEMory MACHine Mainframe Mainframe COMPare SLISt TLISt TWAVeform Mainframe STRigger TTRigger COMPare Mainframe SFORmat SYSTem INTermodule SFORmat SFORmat Mainframe TTRigger TWAVeform SFORmat Mainframe Mainframe MMEMory STRigger STRigger STRigger SWAVeform SLISt TLISt TWAVeform STRigger TTRigger STRigger TTRigger Command THReshold TIMER TINTerval TMAXimum TMINimum TPOSition TREE TSTatist
45. integer from 245760 to 245760 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE FIND 26 LINE MACHine 1 2 COMPare LINE lt line_num gt The LINE command allows you to center the compare listing data about a specified line number integer from 245760 to 245760 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE LINE 511 20 8 Query Returned Format Example Command Example Command lt start_line gt lt stop_line gt Example COMPare Subsystem MENU MACHine 1 2 COMPare LINE The LINE query returns the current line number specified MACHine 1 2 COMPare LINE lt line_num gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE LINE MENU MACHine 1 2 COMPare MENU REFerence DIFFerence The MENU command allows you to display the reference or the difference listing in the Compare menu OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE MENU REFERENCE RANGe MACHine 1 2 COMPare RANGe FULL PARTial lt start_line gt lt stop_line gt The RANGe command allows you to define the boundaries for the comparison The range entered must be a subset of the lines in the acquire memory integer from 245760 to 245760 integer from lt start_line gt to 245760 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE RANGE PARTIAL 511 512 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE RANGE FULL 20 9 Query Returne
46. lt state_terms gt EDGE 1 2 for timing analyzer 13 8 lt new_text gt lt state_terms gt Example Query Returned Format Example Command lt res_id gt lt state_terms gt Example MACHine Subsystem RESource string of up to 8 alphanumeric characters A B C D E F G I RANGel RANGe2 TIMerl TIMer2 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 RENAME A DATA MACHine 1 2 RENAME lt res_id gt The REName query returns the current names for specified terms assigned to the specified analyzer MACHine 1 2 RENAME lt res_id gt lt new_text gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINEIl RENAME D RESource MACHine 1 2 RESource lt res_id gt lt res_id gt The RESource command allows you to assign resource terms A through G and I Range 1 and 2 and Timer 1 and 2 to a particular analyzer machine 1 or 2 In the timing analyzer only two additional resource terms are available These terms are EDGE 1 and 2 These terms will always be assigned to the the machine that is configured as the timing analyzer In the State analyzer only two additional resource terms are available These terms are H and J These terms cannot be assigned to a timing analyzer lt state_terms gt H J for state analyzer or lt state_terms gt EDGE 1 2 for timing analyzer A B C D E F G I RANGel RANGe2 TIMerl T
47. msus MMEMory Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram continued 16500516 12 5 Table 12 1 MMEMory Subsystem MMEMory Parameter Values Parameter auto_file msus name description directory_name type block_data ia_name new_name module Values A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN Mass Storage Unit specifier INTernal0 for the hard disk drive and INTernal1 for the flexible disk drive A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters A string of up to 64 characters for DOS disks ending in a directory name Separators can be the slash orthe backslash character The string oftwo periods represents the parent ofthe present working directory An integer refer to table 12 2 Data in IEEE 488 2 format A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following
48. 13 9 esponse data 1 20 esponses 1 16 MODe command 9 18 Root 4 6 R R R R R R Eo RQS 6 4 RS 232C 3 2 3 10 5 2 RUNTil command query 17 16 20 10 20 11 23 18 24 15 S SCHart selector 19 4 SCHart Subsystem 19 1 19 3 19 4 19 5 19 6 19 7 SDC 2 6 Section data 27 6 Section data format 27 4 Section header 27 6 SELect command 9 19 Select command tree 9 20 Selected device clear 2 6 SEQuence command query 16 16 22 17 Sequential commands 4 4 Serial poll 6 7 Service Request Enable Register 6 4 SET command 20 12 SETColor command 9 21 SETup 11 11 27 12 SETup command query 11 11 11 12 SFORmat selector 15 6 SFORmat Subsystem 15 1 15 3 15 4 15 5 15 6 15 7 15 8 15 9 15 10 15 11 15 12 15 13 15 14 15 15 15 16 15 17 Shortform 1 11 Simple commands 1 8 SLAVe command query 15 14 SLISt selector 17 7 SLISt Subsystem 17 1 17 3 17 4 17 5 17 6 17 7 17 8 17 9 17 10 17 11 17 12 17 13 17 14 17 15 17 16 17 17 17 18 17 19 17 20 17 21 17 22 Spaces 1 7 SPERiod command query 22 18 23 19 Square brackets 4 5 STARt command 9 22 state analyzer program example 28 5 Status 1 22 6 2 8 3 Status byte 6 6 Status registers 1 22 8 3 Status reporting 6 2 Stop bits 3 9 STOP command 9 22 STORe command query 16 17 STORe CONFig command 12 20 STRace selector 16 9 STRigger selector 16 9 STRigger STRace Subsystem 16 1 16 3 16 4 16 5 16 6
49. 16 7 16 8 16 9 16 10 16 11 16 12 16 13 16 14 16 15 16 16 16 17 16 18 16 19 16 20 16 21 16 22 16 23 String data 1 13 String variables 1 18 STTRace selector 22 8 Subsystem COMPare 20 2 MACHine 13 2 MMEMory 12 2 SCHart 19 2 SFORmat 15 1 15 3 15 4 15 5 15 6 15 7 15 8 15 9 15 10 15 11 15 12 15 13 15 14 15 15 15 16 15 17 SLISt 17 1 17 3 17 4 17 5 17 6 17 7 17 8 17 9 17 10 17 11 17 12 17 13 17 14 17 15 17 16 17 17 17 18 17 19 17 20 17 21 17 22 STRigger STRace 16 1 16 3 16 4 16 5 16 6 16 7 16 8 16 9 16 10 16 11 16 12 16 13 16 14 16 15 16 16 16 17 16 18 16 19 16 20 16 21 16 22 16 23 SWAVeform 18 2 SYMBol 26 1 26 3 26 4 26 5 26 6 26 7 26 8 SYSTem 11 2 TFORmat 21 1 21 3 21 4 21 5 21 6 21 7 21 8 TLISt 24 1 24 3 24 4 24 5 24 6 24 7 24 8 24 9 24 10 24 11 24 12 24 13 24 14 24 15 24 16 24 17 24 18 24 19 24 20 24 21 TTRigger TTRace 22 1 22 3 22 4 22 5 22 6 22 7 22 8 22 9 22 10 22 11 22 12 22 13 22 14 22 15 22 16 22 17 22 18 22 19 22 20 22 21 22 22 TWAVeform 23 1 23 3 23 4 23 5 23 6 23 7 23 8 23 9 23 10 23 11 23 12 23 13 23 14 23 15 23 16 23 17 23 18 23 19 23 20 23 21 23 22 23 23 23 24 23 25 WLISt 14 1 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 7 14 8 14 9 14 10 Subsystem commands 4 6 Suffix multiplier 5 9 Suffix units 5 10 SWAVeform selector 18 4 SWAVeform Subsystem
50. 65536 131072 262144 516096 1032192 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SWAVEFORM MLENGTH 262144 18 8 Query Returned Format Example Command lt number_of_ samples gt Example Query Returned Format Example SWAVeform Subsystem RANGe MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform MLENgth The MLENgth query returns the current analyzer memory depth selection MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform MLENgth lt memory_length gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SWAVEFORM MLENGTH RANGe MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform RANGe lt number_of_samples gt The RANGe command allows you to specify the number of samples across the screen on the State Waveform display It is equivalent to ten times the states per division setting states Div on the front panel A number between 10 and 5000 may be entered integer from 10 to 5000 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SWAVEFORM RANGE 80 MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform RANGE The RANGe query returns the current range value MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform RANGe lt number_of_samples gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SWAVEFORM RANGE 18 9 Command Example Command Example Query Returned Format Example SWAVeform Subsystem REMove REMove MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform RI EMove The REMove command clears the waveform display OUTPUT XXX MACHIN El SWAV EFORM RE
51. DELay lt delay_arg gt 38 4 Command Query Command Syntax lt label name gt lt po larity gt FORMat Subsystem LABel LABel The LABel command inserts a new label or modifies the contents of an existing label If more than 126 labels are specified and an attempt is made to insert another new label the last label bottom label will be modified Only 16 labels may be inserted or modified at a time If more than 16 labels are specified per command you will receive an error message Pattern generator channels can be assigned to only one label at a time If duplicate assignments are made the last channel assignments take precedence The second parameter sets the channel polarity Ifthe polarity is not specified the last polarity assignment is used The last parameters assign the active channels for each pod Each assignment parameter is a binary encoding of the channel assignments ofthe pod The pods are numbered in the same order as they appear in the format menu with zero representing the left most pod pod 5 of the pattern generator A 1 in a bit position means that the associated channel in that pod is included in the label A 0 in a bit position excludes the channel from the label The minimum value for any pod specification is 0 the maximum value for all pods is 255 A value of 255 includes all channels of a pod assignment The query must specify a label name and returns the current pod assignme
52. IST query allows the instrument to identify itself during parallel poll by allowing the controller to read the current state of the IEEE 488 1 defined ist local message in the instrument The response to this query is dependent upon the current status of the instrument Figure 8 2 shows the IST data structure lt id gt lt NL gt Oor 1 Indicates the ist local message is false Indicates the ist local message is true OUTPUT XXX IST 8 9 Common Commands IST Individual Status Figure 8 2 DEVICE DEFINED CONDITIONS SUMMARY MESSAGE DEVICE DEFINED Y i yy vt Yyyyyy V VY STATUS BYTE CONDITIONS 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 vss ESB MAV 3 2 1 REGTSTER STB i tes amp e amp eg amp I amp u Ma A o 2 amp 2 S ke amp el La A e amp La A e amp I A La amp e amp 18 14 13 12 11 1a 9 8 7le ls 4a 3 2 1 e ent eek ee se TATUS PRE 1650 BL2B IST Data Structure 8 10 Command Example Query Returned Format Example Common Commands OPC Operation Complete OPC Operation Complete OPC The OPC command will cause the instrument to set the operation complete bit in the Standard Event Sta
53. MACHINE2 SFORMAT SQUAL 1 J LOW MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SQUal lt qual_num gt The SQUal query returns the qualifier specified for the slave clock MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SQUal lt clock_id gt lt qual_level gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT SQUAL 1 THReshold MACHine 1 2 SFORmat THReshold lt N gt TIL ECL lt value gt The THReshold command allows you to set the voltage threshold for a given pod to ECL TTL or a specific voltage from 6 00 V to 6 00 V in 0 05 volt increments 15 16 lt N gt lt value gt TTL ECL Example Query Returned Format Example SFORmat Subsystem THReshold pod number an integer from 1 to 8 voltage real number 6 00 to 6 00 default value of 1 6 V default value of 1 3 V OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SFORMAT THRESHOLD1 4 0 MACHine 1 2 SFORmat THReshold lt N gt The THReshold query returns the current threshold for a given pod MACHine 1 2 SFORmat THReshold lt N gt lt value gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SFORMAT THRESHOLD4 15 17 15 18 16 STRigger STRace Subsystem Introduction The STRigger subsystem contains the commands available for the State Trigger menu in the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer The State Trigger subsystem will also accept the STRace selector as used in previous 16500 series logic analyzer modules to eliminate the n
54. MACHine 1 2 STRigger ACQuisition The ACQuisition query returns the current acquisition mode specified MACHine 1 2 STRigger ACQuisition AUTOmatic MANual lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER ACQUISITION Command Example lt to_level_ number gt lt number_of_ levels gt lt branch_ lifier gt qua lt N gt STRigger STRace Subsystem BRANch BRANch MACHine 1 2 STRigger BRANch lt N gt lt branch_qualifier gt lt to_level_number gt The BRANch command defines the branch qualifier for a given sequence level When this branch qualifier is matched it will cause the trigger sequence to jump to the specified sequence level The terms used by the branch qualifier A through J are defined by the TERM command The meaning of IN_RANGE and OUT_RANGE is determined by the RANGE command Within the limitations shown by the syntax definitions complex expressions may be formed using the AND and OR operators Expressions are limited to what you could manually enter through the State Trigger menu For required and allowable use of parentheses the syntax definitions on the next page show only the required ones Additional parentheses are allowed as long as the meaning of the expression is not changed Figure 16 2 shows a complex expression as seen in the State Trigger menu The following statements are all correct and have the same meaning Notice that the conventional rul
55. MOVE TAKenbranch MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform TAKenbranch STORe NOSTore The TAKenbranch command controls whether the states that cause branching are stored or not stored This command is only available when the acquisition mode is set to manual OUTPUT XXX MACHIN E2 SWAV EFORM TAK MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform TAKenbranch The TAKenbranch query returns the current setting STORe NOSTore lt NL gt MACHine 1 2 SWAVe form TA Kenbranch OUTPUT XXX MACHIN E2 SWAV EFORM TAK ENBRANCH ENBRANCH STORE 18 10 Command lt percent gt Example Query Returned Format Example SWAVeform Subsystem TPOSition TPOSition MACHine 1 2 SwWAVeform TPOSition STARt CENTer END POSTstore lt percent gt The TPOSition command controls where the trigger point is placed The trigger point can be placed at the start center end or at a percentage of poststore The poststore option is the same as the User Defined option when setting the trigger point from the front panel The TPOSition command is only available when the acquisition mode is set to manual integer from 1 to 100 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SWAVEFORM TPOSITION CENTER MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform TPOSition The TPOSition query returns the current trigger setting MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform TPOSition STARt CENTer END POSTstore
56. OFF 10 DIM String 100 20 OUTPUT XXX SELECT 1 30 OUTPUT XXX SPA1 HISTogram RANGe 4 40 ENTER XXX String 50 PRINT String 60 END 25 20 SPA Subsystem HISTogram TTYPe HISTogram TTYPe Command SPA 1 2 HISTogram TTYPe ALL QUALified The HISTogram TTYPe command sets the trigger to trigger on anystate or on qualified state A query returns the current trace type setting Example OUTPUT XXX SPA2 HISTogram TTYPe ALL Query SPA 1 2 HISTogram TTYPe Returned Format SPA 1 2 HISTogram TTYPe ALL QUALified lt NL gt Example 10 DIM String 100 20 OUTPUT XXX SELECT 1 30 OUTPUT XXX SPA1l HISTogram TTYPe 40 ENTER XXX String 50 PRINT String 60 END 25 21 Command lt min_time gt lt max_time gt Example OU OU PUT XXX SPA2 PUT XXX SPAIl Command lt label_name gt lt start_pattern gt SPA Subsystem TINTerval AUTorange TINTerval AUTorange SPA 1 2 TINTerval AUTorange LOGarithmic LINear lt min_time gt lt max_time gt The TINTerval AUTorange command automatically sets the Time Interval ranges in a logarithmic or linear distribution over the specified range of time When the AUTorange command is executed the data accumulators and statistic counters are reset real number real number INTerval AUTora
57. Only two oscilloscope waveforms can be displayed at any time The first parameter is optional when inserting an oscilloscope waveform The parameter specifies the instrument from which the waveform is to be taken If an instrument is not specified the oscilloscope is assumed The second parameter is the label of the waveform that is to be added to the current display If you specify the waveform is from the analyzer by setting the first parameter to 1 then you must also specify which bit string of 1 alpha and 1 numeric character enclosed by single quotes for oscilloscope waveforms or a string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters enclosed by single quotes for analyzer waveforms integer from 0 to 31 OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY INSERT C1 OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY INSERT 1 WAVE 10 For a complete explanation ofthe label name and the lt bit_id gt for the logic analyzer refer to chapter 15 SFORmat Subsystem 31 6 Command lt N gt lt label_str gt Example Query Returned Format Example DISPlay Subsystem LABel LABel DISPlay LABel CHANnel lt N gt lt label_str gt The LABel command is used to assign a label string to an oscilloscope channel For single channel traces the label string up to five characters appears on the left of the waveform area of the display Note that the label string cannot be used in place of the channel number when programm
58. SYMBol PATTern lt label_name gt lt symbol_name gt lt pattern_value gt lt label_name gt string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters lt symbol_name gt string of up to 16 alphanumeric characters lt pattern_value gt string of one of the following forms BO1X for binary 001234567X for octal H0123456789ABCDEFX for hexadecimal 10123456789 for decimal Example OUTPUT XXX SYMBol PATTern STAT MEM_RD HOLXxX 41 5 Command Command Syntax lt label _hame gt lt symbol _name gt lt start_value gt lt stop_value gt Example SYMBol Subsystem RANGe RANGe The RANGe command allows you to create a symbol for a range of values on a label Note that Don t Cares are not allowed in range symbols SYMBol RANGe lt label_name gt lt symbol_name gt lt start_value gt lt stop_value gt string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters string of up to 16 alphanumeric characters string in one of the following forms BOl for binary 001234567 for octal H0123456789ABCDEF for hexadecimal 0123456789 for decimal OUTPUT XXX SYMBol RANGe STAT IO_ACCESS H0000 HO00F 41 6 SYMBol Subsystem REMove REMove Command The REMove command deletes all symbols from the symbol menu Command Syntax SYMBol REMove Example
59. SYSTem DATA command and query The PACKed option default uploads data in a compressed format This option is used to upload data for archiving or for reloading back into the analyzer When an analyzer configuration is saved to disk the PACKed data format is always used regardless of the current DBLock selection The UNPacked option uploads data in a format that is easy to interpret and process The UNPacked format cannot be downloaded back into the analyzer OUTPUT XXX DBLOCK PACKED Query Returned Format Example Command Example Command Example Module Level Commands MACHine DBLock The DBLock query returns the current data block format selection DBLock PACKed UNPacked lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX DBLock MACHine MACHine 1 2 The MACHine command selects which of the two machines analyzers the subsequent commands or queries will refer to MACHine is also a subsystem containing commands that control the logic analyzer system level functions Examples include pod assignments analyzer names and analyzer type See chapter 13 for details about the MACHine Subsystem OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 NAME DRAMTEST WLISt WLISt The WLISt selector accesses the commands used to place markers and query marker positions in Timing State Mixed mode The WLISt subsystem also contains commands that allows you to insert waveforms from other time corre
60. Subsystem CLEar The following example would be used to specify this complex qualifier OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER BRANCHl A OR B AND F OR G LA F 24 Terms A through E RANGE 1 and TIMER 1 must be grouped together and terms F through J RANGE 2 and TIMER 2 must be grouped together In the first level terms from one group may not be mixed with terms from the other For example the expression A OR IN_RANGE2 AND C OR G is not allowed because the term C cannot be specified in the F through J group In the first level the operators you can use are AND NAND OR NOR XOR NXOR Either AND or OR may be used at the second level to join the two groups together Itis acceptable for a group to consist of a single term Thus an expression like B AND G is legal since the two operands are both simple terms from separate groups CLEar MACHine 1 2 STRigger CLEar All SEQuence RESource The CLEar command allows you to clear only the Sequence levels clear only the resource term patterns or clear all settings in the State Trigger menu and replace them with the default OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER CLEAR RESOURCE 16 12 Command lt N gt lt occurrence gt lt proceed_ qualifier gt Example STRigger STRace Subsystem FIND FIND MACHine 1 2 STRigger FIND lt N gt lt proceed_qualifier gt lt occurrence gt The FIND command
61. TWAVeform TWAVeform MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform The TWAVeform selector is used as part of a compound header to access the settings found in the Timing Waveforms menu It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch below the MACHine level in the command tree OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM DELAY 100E 9 ACCumulate MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform ACCumulate lt setting gt The ACCumulate command controls whether the waveform display gets erased between each individual run or whether subsequent waveforms are displayed over the previous ones O OFF or 1IO0N OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TNAVEFORM ACCUMULATE ON MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform ACCumulate The ACCumulate query returns the current setting The query always shows the setting as the characters 0 off or 1 on MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform ACCumulate 0 1 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM ACCUMULATE Command Example Query Returned Format Example Command lt marker_type gt Example TWAVeform Subsystem ACQuisition ACQuisition MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform ACQuisition AUTOmatic MANual The ACQuisition command specifies the acquisition mode for the timing analyzer The acquisition modes are automatic and manual OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TWAVEFORM ACQUISITION AUTOMATIC MACHine 1 2 TIWAVeform ACQOuisition The ACQuisition q
62. Value RUN INTermodule MACHine 1 2 NONE lt pod_num gt lt pod_num gt integer from 1 to 8 integer from 1 to 11 representing sequence level string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters lt state_terms gt H J for state analyzer or lt state_terms gt EDGE 1 2 for timing analyzer string of up to 8 alphanumeric characters A B C D E F G I RANGE 1 2 TIMER 1 2 lt res_id gt lt res_id gt MACHine MACHine lt N gt The MACHine lt N gt selector specifies which of the two analyzers machines available in the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer which the commands or queries will refer to Because the MACHine lt N gt command is a root level command it will normally appear as the first element of a compound header 1 2 the machine number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 NAME TIMING 13 4 Command lt arm_source gt Example Query Returned Format Example MACHine Subsystem ARM ARM MACHine 1 2 ARM lt arm_source gt The ARM command specifies the arming source of the specified analyzer machine The RUN option disables the arm source For example if you do not want to use either the intermodule bus or the other machine to arm the current machine you specify the RUN option RUN INTermodule MACHine 1 2 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 ARM MACHINE2 MACHine 1 2 ARM The ARM query returns th
63. gt 5 XTAG space time_volue te la state_value El XTAG SLISt Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued 16555508 17 5 Table 17 1 SLISt Subsystem SLISt Subsystem Parameter Values Parameter mod_num mach_num col_num line_number label_name base line_num_mid_screen label_pattern occurrence time_value state_value run_until_spec value Value 1 2through 10 not used 112 integer from 1 to 61 integer from 1032192 to 1032192 a string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters BINary HEXadecimal OCTal DECimal TWOS ASCii SYMBol IASSembler for labels or ABSolute RELative fortags integer from 1032192 to 1032192 B O 1 X I 4 0 01 11 213141 5 6 7 X H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9JA IB ICI ID E F X 0 1 2 3 41516 17 1819 integer from 1032192 to 1032192 real number real number OFF LT lt value gt GT lt value gt INRange lt value gt lt value gt OUTRange lt value gt lt value gt real number 17 6 Selector Example Command SLISt Subsystem SLISt SLISt MACHine 1 2 SLISt The SLISt selector is used as part of a compound header to access those settings normally found in the State Listing menu It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch directly below the MACHine level in the command tree OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST LINE 256 COLumn MACHine
64. gt SETup SYSTem Subsystem Commands Syntax Diagram 2 16500522 Table 11 1 SYSTem Subsystem SYSTem Parameter Values Parameter block_data string pathname Values Data in IEEE 488 2 format A string of up to 68 alphanumeric characters A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 64 alphanumeric characters for DOS in one of the following forms NNNNNNNN NNN when the file resides in the present working directory or NAME_DIR FILENAME when the files does not reside in the present working directory 11 4 Command Example lt block_data gt lt block_length_ specifier gt lt length gt lt section gt lt section_ header gt lt section_data gt SYSTem Subsystem DATA DATA SYSTem DATA lt block_data gt The DATA command allows you to send and receive acquired data to and from a controller in block form This helps saving block data for e Reloading to the logic analyzer e Processing data later in the logic analyzer e Processing data in the controller The format and length of block data depends on the instruction being used and the configuration of the analyzer This chapter describes briefly the syntax of the Data command and query See chapter 27 DATA and SETup Commands for additional information OUTPU
65. it replaces the last waveform The first parameter specifies from which module the waveform is coming however the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzers are single module instruments and this parameter is not needed It is described here as a reminder that programs for the 16500 logic analysis system can be used The second parameter specifies the label name that will be inserted The optional third parameter specifies the label bit number overlay or all Ifa number is specified only the waveform for that bit number is added to the screen If you specify OVERlay all the bits of the label are displayed as a composite overlaid waveform If you specify ALL all the bits are displayed sequentially If you do not specify the third parameter ALL is assumed 1 string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters integer from 0 to 31 OUTPUT XXX WLIST INSERT WAVE 9 Command lt line_num_mid_ screen gt Example Query Returned Format Example Query Returned Format lt state_num gt Example WLISt Subsystem LINE LINE WLISt LINE lt line_num_mid_screen gt The LINE command allows you to scroll the timing analyzer listing vertically The command specifies the state line number relative to the trigger that the analyzer highlights at the center of the screen integer from 1032192 to 1032192 OUTPUT XXX WLIST LINE 0 WLISt LINE The LINE
66. may be used only once with each OVERlay command string of 1 alpha and 1 numeric character enclosed by single quotes OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY OVERLAY C1 C2 31 8 Command lt module_ number gt lt label gt Example Command Example DISPlay Subsystem PLUS PLUS DISPlay PLUS lt module_number gt lt label gt lt label gt The PLUS command algebraically adds two channels and inserts the resultant waveform to the current display The first parameter is an optional module specifier always 2 for the oscilloscope The next two parameters are the labels of the waveforms that are to be added Always 2 string of 1 alpha and 1 numeric character enclosed by single quotes OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY PLUS 2 C1 C2 REMove DISPlay REMove The REMove command removes all displayed waveforms from the current display OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY REMOVE 31 10 32 MARKer Subsystem Introduction The oscilloscope has four markers for making time and voltage measurement These measurements may be made automatically or manually Additional features include the run until time RUNTil mode and the ability to center on trigger or markers in the display area CENTer and The RUNTil mode allows you to set a stop condition based on the time interval between the X marker and the O marker When this condition is met the oscilloscope will stop acquiring
67. or 16 ns whichever is greater to 516096 x sample period integer from 0 to 100 representing percentage of poststore OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER TPOSITION END OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER TPOSITION POSTstore 75 MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TPOSition The TPOSition query returns the current trigger position setting MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TPOSition STARt CENTer END DELay lt time_val gt POSTstore lt poststore gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER TPOSITION 22 22 23 TWAVeform Subsystem Introduction The TWAVeform subsystem contains the commands available for the Timing Waveforms menu in the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer These commands are e ACCumulate e ACQuisition e CENTer e CLRPattern e CLRStat e DELay e INSert e MLENgth e MMODe e OCONdition e OPATtern e OSEarch e OTIMe RANGe REMove RUNTil SPERiod TAVerage TMAXimum TMINimum TPOSition VRUNs XCONdition XOTime XPATtern XSEarch XTIMe 23 2 Figure 23 1 TWAVeform Subsystem Y Twavetorm Ea ACCumulate space S o aC ACOuisition Des space py LE pa ACQuisition CENTer space marker type Ce CLRPattern y space mx y 2 CLRStat DELay space gt delay_value e DELay INSer
68. samples a a DELay a label_name mad BD bit_id paa memory_length INSert space MLENgth space MLENgth RANGe gt space range_values De RANGe gt REMove g TTI TAKenbranch N gt space gt NOSTore pe TAKenbranch to He TPosition space STAR gt gt CENTer END ar POSTstore ek gt j gt percent TPOSition 16555509 SWAVeform Subsystem Syntax Diagram 18 3 Table 18 1 Selector Example SWAVeform Subsystem SWAVeform SWAVeform Subsystem Parameter Values Parameter Value number_of_samples integer from 1032192 to 1032192 label_name string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters bit_id OVERlay lt bit_num gt ALL bit_num integer representing a label bit from 0 to 31 range_values integer from 10 to 5000 representing 10x states Division mark_type X O XO TRIGger percent integer from 0 to 100 memory_length 4096 8192 16384 32768 65536 131072 262144 524288 1032192 SWAVeform MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform The SWAVeform State Waveform selector is used as part of a compound header to access the settings in the State Waveform menu It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch directly below the MACHine level in the command tree OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SWAVEFORM RANGE 40
69. since a label must contain 32 or less bits the value of the start pattern or stop pattern will be between 233 1 and 0 Since a label can only be defined across a maximum of two pods a range term is only available across a single label therefore the end points of the range cannot be split between labels When these values are expressed in binary they represent the bit values for the label at one of the range recognizers end points Don t cares are not allowed in the end point pattern specifications string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters 112 BOTE yt POTES ASISTE H O 1 213 4 516 7 819 AIBICIDIEIF 0 11213141516171819 a fB 0 1 0 0 1 2 13 14151617 H 0 1 21 3 4 516 7 8 9 AIBICIDIEIF 0 11213141516171819 9 22 16 Example Query Returned Format Example Command lt number_of_ levels gt lt level_of_ trigger gt Example TTRigger TTRace Subsystem SEQuence OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER RANGE1 DATA 127 255 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER RANGE2 ABC BO0001111 HCF MACHine 1 2 TTRigger RANGe lt N gt The RANGe query returns the range recognizer end point specifications for the range MACHine 1 2 TTRiger RANGe lt N gt lt label_name gt lt start_pattern gt lt stop_pattern gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MAC
70. 1 2 SLISt COLumn lt col_num gt lt module_num gt MACHine 1 2 lt label_name gt lt base gt The COLumn command allows you to configure the state analyzer list display by assigning a label name and base to one of the 61 vertical columns in the menu A column number of 1 refers to the leftmost column When a label is assigned to a column it replaces the original label in that column When the label name is TAGS the TAGS column is assumed and the next parameter must specify RELative or ABSolute A label for tags must be assigned in order to use ABSolute or RELative state tagging 17 7 lt col_num gt lt module_num gt lt label_name gt lt base gt Example Query Returned Format Example Command Example SLISt Subsystem CLRPattern integer from 1 to 61 1 2 through 10 are not used a string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters BINary HEXadecimal OCTal DECimal TWOS ASCii SYMBol IASSembler for labels or ABSolute RELative for tags OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST COLUMN 4 A HEX MACHine 1 2 SLISt COLumn lt col_num gt The COLumn query returns the column number label name and base for the specified column MACHine 1 2 SLISt COLumn lt col_num gt lt module_num gt MACHine 1 2 lt label_name gt lt base gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST COLUMN 4 CLRPattern MACHine 1 2 SLISt CLRPatte
71. 1 is not high then check the instrument at address 7 to see if bit 6 of its status register is high 6 Assoon as the instrument with status bit 6 high is found check the rest of the status bits to determine what is required The SPOLL 707 command causes much more to happen on the bus than simply reading the register This command clears the bus automatically addresses the talker and listener sends SPE serial poll enable and SPD serial poll disable bus commands and reads the data For more information about serial poll refer to your controller manual and programming language reference manuals After the serial poll is completed the RQS bit in the Status Byte Register will be reset if it was set Once a bit in the Status Byte Register is set it will remain set until the status is cleared with a CLS command or the instrument is reset Error Messages Introduction This chapter lists the error messages that are returned by the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzers Error Messages Device Dependent Errors Device Dependent Errors 200 201 202 203 300 Label not found Pattern string invalid Qualifier invalid Data not available RS 232 C error Command Errors 100 101 110 111 120 121 123 129 130 131 132 133 134 139 142 143 144 Command error unknown command generic error Invalid character received Command header error Header delimiter error Numeric argu
72. 41 42 43 44 45 E Es IE EEE is SR E S I ES R SEP JAK SB0 Programming Examples Sending Queries to the Logic Analyzer Send the query In this example the MENU query is sent All queries except the SYSTem DATA and SYSTem SETup can be sent with this program OUTPUT 707 MENU kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkkxkxkkxkxkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkkxkkkxkkxkxkkkxkkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkkkkkxkkkkxk he two lines that follow transfer the query response from the query buffer to the controller and then print the response ER 707 Query T Query 43 19 43 20 Index CLS command 8 5 ESE command 8 6 ESR command 8 7 IDN command 8 9 gt IST command 8 9 OPC command 8 11 OPT command 8 12 PRE command 8 13 RST command 8 14 SRE command 8 15 STB command 8 16 TRG command 8 17 TST command 8 18 WAI command 8 19 wy 4 5 32767 4 4 9 9E 37 4 4 ms 4 5 4 5 U l b gt 4 5 4 5 5 A ACCumulate command query 18 5 19 4 19 5 23 8 ACQMode command query 21 5 ACQuisition command query 16 9 18 5 22 9 23 9 Analyzer 1 Data Information 27 7 Analyzer 2 Data Information 27 8 Angular brackets 4 5 Arguments 1 7 ARM command query 13 5 ARMLine selector 10 5 ASSign command query 13 6 AUToload command 12 7 B BASE command 26 5 Bases 1 12 Basic 1 3 Baud rate 3 9 BEEPer command 9 6 Bit definitio
73. 9 4 Table 9 1 Instrument Commands Mainframe Parameter Values Parameter value module menu enable_value index day month year hour minute second color hue sat lum display name Values An integer from 0 to 65535 An integer 0 or 1 2through 10 unused An integer An integer from 0 to 255 An integer from 0to5 An integer from 1 through 31 An integer from 1 through 12 An integer from 1990 through 2089 An integer from O through 23 An integer from 0 through 59 An integer from 0 through 59 An integer from 1 to 7 An integer from 0 to 100 An integer from 0 to 100 An integer from 0 to 100 A string containing an Internet Address and a display number Command Example Query Returned Format Example Instrument Commands BEEPer BEEPer B T EPer ON 1 OFF 0 The BEEPer command sets the beeper mode which turns the beeper sound of the instrument on and off When BEEPer is sent with no argument the beeper will be sounded without affecting the current mode OUTPUT XXX BEEPER OUTPUT XXX BEEP ON BEEPer The BEEPer query returns the mode currently selected BEEPer 1 0 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX BEEPER 9 6 Instrument Commands CAPability CAPability Query CAPability The CAPability query returns the system language and lower level
74. ABSolute or RELative state tagging TLISt Subsystem CLRPattern lt col_num gt integer from 1 to 61 lt module_num gt 1 2through 10 not used lt label_name gt a string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters lt base gt BINary HEXadecimal OCTal DECimal TWOS ASCii SYMBol IASSembler for labels or ABSolute RELative for tags Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST COLUMN 4 2 A HEX Query MACHine 1 2 TLISt COLumn lt col_num gt The COLumn query returns the column number instrument machine label name and base for the specified column Returned Format MACHine 1 2 TLISt COLumn lt col_num gt lt module_num gt MACHine 1 2 lt label_name gt lt base gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST COLUMN 4 CLRPattern Command MACHine 1 2 TLISt CLRPattern X OJALL The CLRPattern command clears the patterns in the selected Specify Patterns menu Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST CLRPATTERN O 24 8 Query Returned Format lt line_number gt lt label_name gt lt pattern_ string gt Example Command lt line_num_mid_ screen gt Example TLISt Subsystem DATA DATA MACHine 1 2 TLISt DATA lt line_number gt lt label_name gt The DATA query returns the value at a specified line number for a given label The format will be the same as the one shown in the
75. Example TWAVeform Subsystem INSert MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform DELay The DELay query returns the current time offset delay value from the trigger MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform DELay lt time_value gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM DELAY INSert MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform INSert lt module_spec gt lt label_name gt sbit_id gt OVERlay ALL The INSert command inserts waveforms in the timing waveform display The waveforms are added from top to bottom up to a maximum of 96 waveforms Once 96 waveforms are present each time you insert another waveform it replaces the last waveform The second parameter specifies the label name that will be inserted The optional third parameter specifies the label bit number overlay or all Ifa number is specified only the waveform for that bit number is added to the screen If you specify OVERlay all the bits of the label are displayed as a composite overlaid waveform If you specify ALL all the bits are displayed sequentially If you do not specify the third parameter ALL is assumed 1 string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters integer from 0 to 31 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM INSERT 1 WAVE 9 23 10 Command lt memory_length gt Example Query Returned Format Example TWAVeform Subsystem MLENgth MLENgth MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform MLENgth lt memory_length gt The
76. G OTG H OTH I OTI J OTJ IN_RANGE1 OUT_RANGE1 IN RANGE2 OUT RANGE2 IMER1 lt TIMER1 gt IMER2 lt TIMER2 gt Qualifier Rules The following rules apply to qualifiers PA Qualifiers are quoted strings and therefore need quotation marks Expressions are evaluated from left to right Parentheses are used to change the order evaluation and so are optional An expression must map into the combination logic presented in the combination pop up menu within the STRigger menu see figure 16 2 on page 16 11 AORB A ORB AND C A OR B AND C AND IN_RANGE2 A OR B AND C AND IN_RANGE1 IN_RANGE1 AND A OR B AND C 16 8 Selector Example Command Example Query Returned Format Example STRigger STRace Subsystem STRigger STRace State Trigger STRigger STRace State Trigger MACHine 1 2 STRigger The STRigger selector is used as a part of a compound header to access the settings found in the State Trace menu It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch directly below the MACHine level in the command tree OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TAG TIME ACQuisition MACHine 1 2 STRigger ACQuisition AUTOmatic MANual The ACQuisition command allows you to specify the acquisition mode for the State analyzer OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER ACQUISITION AUTOMATIC
77. Ko HE oO J Y JJ VAYA O JO OT SSI TND FF CS K 00 gt OD SDS 0 0 10 ER MEP 1 100 10 0 10 0 0 0 101 III SE Ut 0 00 0 I I I OU I OU I OU OU OU OU OU i OU I OU OU OU OU I OU OU OU Programming Examples Making a TPUT 707 MENU 1 Create a 5 level fourth level TPUT 707 MACHIN td State Analyzer Measurement 37 trigger specification with the trigger on the 1 STRIGGER SEQUENCE 5 4 Define pattern terms A B C D and E to be 11 22 33 44 and 59 decimal respectively PUT 707 MACHINEIl RIGGER TERM A SCOUNT 11 PUT 707 MACHINEIl RIGGER TERM B SCOUNT 22 PUT 707 MACHINEIl PUT 707 MACHINEIl B RIGGER TERM C SCOUNT 33 RIGGER TERM D SCOUNT 44 PUT 707 MACHINEIl E nn nn nun RIGGER TERM E SCOUNT 59 Define a Range having a lower limit of 50 and an upper limit of 58 TPUT 707 MACHIN KKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK El STRIGGER RANGE1 SCOUNT 50 58 CONFIGURE SEQUE CE LEVEL 1 KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK Store NOSTATE in level 1 and Then find resource term A once PU S d 07 MACHIN E pa RIGGER STORE1 NOSTATE PU
78. Listing display MACHine 1 2 TLISt DATA lt line_number gt lt label_name gt lt pattern_string gt lt NL gt integer from 1032192 to 1032192 string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters B O 1 X O 0111213141516171X H 0 1 213 14 5 1617 8 9 A B C D E F X 011121314151617 819 E OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST DATA 512 RAS LINE MACHine 1 2 TLISt LINE lt line_ num mid screen gt The LINE command moves the timing analyzer listing vertically The command specifies the state line number relative to the trigger that the analyzer highlights at the center of the screen integer from 1032192 to 1032192 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST LINE 0 Query Returned Format Example Command lt marker_mode gt Example Query Returned Format Example TLISt Subsystem MMODe Marker Mode MACHine 1 2 TLISt LINE The LINE query returns the line number for the state currently in the box at the center of the screen MACHine 1 2 TLISt LINE lt line_num_mid_screen gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST LINE MMODe Marker Mode MACHine 1 2 TLISt MMODe lt marker_mode gt The MMODe command selects the mode controlling the marker movement and the display of marker readouts When PATTern is selected the markers will be placed on patterns When TIME is selected the markers move o
79. N gt OFFSet lt value gt The OFFSet command sets the voltage that is represented at center screen for the selected channel The allowable offset voltage values are shown in the table below The table represents values for a Probe setting of 1 1 The offset value is recompensated whenever the probe attenuation factor is changed 112 allowable offset voltage value shown in the table below Vertical Range Offset Voltage 16 mV 400 mV 2V gt 400 mV 1 6 V 10 V gt 1 6V 10V 50 V gt 10 V 40 V 250 V OUTPUT XXX CHANL OFFS 1 5 CHANnel lt N gt OFFSet The OFFSet query returns the current value for the selected channel CHANnel lt N gt OFFSet lt value gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX CHANNEL1 OFFSET 30 6 Command lt N gt lt atten gt Example Query Returned Format Example CHANnel Subsystem PROBe PROBe CHANnel lt N gt PROBe lt atten gt The PROBe command specifies the attenuation factor for an external probe connected to a channel The command changes the channel voltage references such as range offset trigger level and automatic measurements The actual sensitivity is not changed at the channel input The allowable probe attenuation factor is an integer from 1 to 1000 112 An integer from 1 to 1000 OUTPUT XXX CHAN1 PROB 10 CHANnel lt N gt PROBe The PROBe query returns the probe attenuation factor for the selected channe
80. OUTPUT XXX SYMBol REMove SYMBol Subsystem WIDTh WIDTh Command The WIDTh command specifies the number of characters displayed when symbols are used Note that the WIDTh command does not affect the displayed length of the symbol value Command Syntax SYMBol WIDTh lt label_name gt lt width_value gt lt label_name gt string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters lt width_value gt integer from 1 to 16 Example OUTPUT XXX SYMBol WIDTh DATA 9 42 DATA and SETup Commands lt block length specifier gt lt length gt Example lt section gt lt section header gt Data and Setup Commands The DATA and SETup commands are system commands that allow you to send and receive instrument configuration setup and program data to and from a controller in block form This is useful for saving block data for re loading the pattern generator This chapter explains how to use these commands The block data for the DATA command is broken into byte positions and descriptions The SETup command block data is not described in detail No changes should be made to the config section of the block data Definition of Block Data Block data is made up ofa block length specifier and a variable number of sections lt block length specifier gt lt section 1 gt lt section N gt 8 lt length gt the total length of all sections in byte format must be represented
81. Quar Common Commands Syntax Diagram 15500 5X01 8 4 Table 8 1 Command Example Common Commands CLS Clear Status Common Command Parameter Values Parameter Values mask An integer 0 through 255 pre_mask An integer 0 through 65535 CLS Clear Status ECES The CLS common command clears all event status registers queues and data structures including the device defined error queue and status byte If the CLS command immediately follows a lt program message terminator gt the output queue and the MAV Message Available bit will be cleared Refer to chapter 6 Status Reporting for a complete discussion of status OUTPUT XXX CLS 8 5 Command lt mask gt Example Query Returned Format Example Common Commands ESE Event Status Enable ESE Event Status Enable ESE lt mask gt The ESE command sets the Standard Event Status Enable Register bits The Standard Event Status Enable Register contains a bit to enable the status indicators detailed in table 8 2 A 1 in any bit position of the Standard Event Status Enable Register enables the corresponding status bit in the Standard Event Status Register Refer to Chapter 6 Status Reporting for a complete discussion of status An integer from 0 to 255 In this example the ESE 32 command will enable CME Command Error bit 5 of the Standard Event Status Enable Register Therefore w
82. SPA 1 2 OVERView LOW lt low_pattern gt lt NL gt Example 10 DIM String 100 20 OUTPUT XXX SELECT 1 30 OUTPUT XXX SPA1 OVERView LOW 40 ENTER XXX String 50 PRINT String 60 END 25 11 Command lt memory_length gt Example Query Returned Format Example SPA Subsystem OVERView MLENgth OVERView MLENgth SPA 1 2 OVERView MLENgth lt memory_length gt The MLENgth command specifies the memory depth Valid memory depths range from 4096 states or samples through the maximum system memory depth minus 8192 states Memory depth is affected by acquisition mode If the lt memory_depth gt value sent with the command is not a legal value the closest legal setting will be used 4096 8192 16384 32768 65536 131072 262144 524288 1032192 OUTPUT XXX SPA1 OVERVIEW MLENGTH 262144 SPA 1 2 OVERView MLENgth The MLENgth query returns the current analyzer memory depth selection SPA 1 2 OVERView MLENgth lt memory_length gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER MLENGTH 25 12 SPA Subsystem OVERView OMARker OVERView OMARker Command SPA 1 2 OVERView OMARker lt o_pattern gt The OVERView OMARker command sends the O marker to the lower boundary of the bucket where the specified pattern is located A request to place the marker outside the defined
83. Subsystem HISTogram OTHer HISTogram OTHer SPA 1 2 HISTogram OTHer INCLuded EXCLuded The HISTogram OTHer command selects including or excluding the other histogram bucket A query returns data indicating whether the other bucket is currently included or excluded OUTPUT XXX SPA2 HISTogram OTHer INCLuded OUTPUT XXX SPA1 HISTogram OTHer EXCLuded SPA 1 2 HISTogram OTHer SPA 1 2 HISTogram OTHer INCLuded EXCLuded lt NL gt 10 DIM String 100 20 OUTPUT XXX SELECT 1 30 OUTPUT XXX SPA2 HISTogram OTHer 40 ENTER XXX String 50 PRINT String 60 END 25 18 Command lt label_name gt lt pattern gt Example Query Returned Format Example SPA Subsystem HISTogram QUALifier HISTogram QUALifier SPA 1 2 HISTogram QUALifier lt label_name gt lt pattern gt The HISTogram QUALifier command sets the pattern associated with the specified label The pattern is a condition for triggering and storing the measurement A query of a label returns the current pattern setting for that label string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters FB O 1 0 011121314151617 H 011 21314 151617 8 9 JAIBICIDIEIF 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 17 819 OUTPUT XXX SPA2 HISTogram QUALifier A 255 SPA 1 2 HISTogram QUALifier lt label_name gt SPA 1 2 HISTo
84. Subsystem INSert INSert The INSert command is the basic command used to build a pattern generator sequence This command is used to insert or add a sequence statement after the specified line number The first parameter is the line number The instruction is inserted in the sequence after the specified line number Sequence lines with instructions other than NOOP cannot be inserted e Immediately after the INIT SEQUENCE START line e Immediately before or after the start of an IF e Immediately before or after the end of an IF e Immediately after the MAIN SEQUENCE START line e After the MAIN SEQUENCE END line e Immediately before the MAIN SEQUENCE END line No sequence lines may be inserted between the INIT SEQUENCE END and the MAIN SEQUENCE START lines If the line number specified is greater than the MAIN SEQUENCE END line number the line will be inserted at the last legal location in the main sequence A legal pattern generator sequence is required to have at least two lines in the main sequence between MAIN SEQUENCE START and MAIN SEQUENCE END lines The second parameter is the instruction for this sequence line The available instructions are described below The third parameter is an optional instruction argument This parameter will only appear when required by a specific instruction The last parameter s are the data assignments for this line These assignments are normally made one per label starting with the
85. TERM 16 21 22 20 TFORmat 21 4 THReshold 15 16 21 8 TIMER 16 22 22 21 TINTerval AUTorange 25 22 TINTerval QUALifier 25 22 TINTerval TINTerval 25 24 TLISt 24 7 TPOSition 16 23 18 11 22 22 23 20 TYPE 13 10 bo es I SE Ion Z 5 a a a A AANNANNANANNR VAXis 19 6 WIDTh 26 8 WLISt 10 6 14 4 XCONdition 23 22 24 18 XPATtern 17 20 23 23 24 19 XSEarch 17 21 23 24 24 20 XTAG 17 22 24 21 XTIMe 14 10 23 25 XWINdow 9 23 Command errors 7 3 Command mode 2 3 Command set organization 4 12 Command structure 1 4 Command tree 4 5 SELect 9 20 Command types 4 6 Common commands 1 9 4 6 8 2 Communication 1 3 COMPare selector 20 4 COMPare Subsystem 20 1 20 3 20 4 20 5 20 6 20 7 20 8 20 9 20 10 20 11 20 12 Complex qualifier 16 11 22 11 Compound commands 1 8 Configuration file 1 4 Controllers 1 3 Conventions 4 5 COPY command 12 10 20 6 D DATA 11 5 27 4 command 11 5 State no tags 27 10 27 11 Data and Setup Commands 27 1 27 3 27 4 27 5 27 6 27 7 27 8 27 9 27 10 27 11 27 12 27 13 Data bits 3 9 8 Bit mode 3 9 Data block Analyzer 1 data 27 7 Analyzer 2 data 27 8 Data preamble 27 6 Section data 27 6 Section header 27 6 Data Carrier Detect DCD 3 5 DATA command query 11 5 20 6 20 7 Data mode 2 3 Data preamble 27 6 27 7 27 8 27 9 DATA query 17 9 24 9 Data Terminal Equipment 3 3 Data Terminal Ready DTR 3 5 D
86. TWAVeform Subsystem XCONdition XCONdition Command MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XCONdition ENTering EXITing gt The XCONdition command specifies where the X marker is placed The X marker can be placed on the entry or exit point of the XPATtern when in the PATTern marker mode Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XCONDITION ENTERING Query MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XCONdition The XCONdition query returns the current setting Returned Format MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XCONdition ENTering EXITing lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XCONDITION XOTime Query MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XOTime The XOTime query returns the time from the X marker to the O marker If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 Returned Format MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XOTime lt time_value gt lt NL gt lt time_value gt real number Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XOTIME 23 21 Command lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt Example Query Returned Format Example TWAVeform Subsystem XPATtern XPATtern MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XPATtern lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt The XPATtern command constructs a pattern recognizer term for the X marker which is then used with the XSEarch criteria and XCONdition when moving the marker on patterns Since this command deals with
87. The FIND query returns the current time qualifier specification for a given sequence level MACHine 1 2 TTRigger FIND lt N gt lt time_qualifier gt lt condition_mode gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER FIND4 MLENgth MACHine 1 2 TTRigger MLENgth lt memory_length gt The MLENgth command specifies the analyzer memory depth Valid memory depths range from 4096 states or samples through the maximum system memory depth minus 8192 states Memory depth is affected by acquisition mode If the lt memory_depth gt value sent with the command is not a legal value the closest legal setting will be used 4096 8192 16384 32768 65536 131072 262144 524288 1032192 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER M G ENGTH 262144 22 15 Query Returned Format Example Command lt label_name gt lt N gt lt start_pattern gt lt stop_pattern gt TTRigger TTRace Subsystem RANGe MACHine 1 2 TTRigger MLENgth The MLENgth query returns the current analyzer memory depth selection MACHine 1 2 TTRigger MLENgth lt memory_length gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER MLENGTH RANGe MACHine 1 2 TTRigger RANGe lt N gt lt label_name gt lt start_pattern gt lt stop_pattern gt The RANGe command specifies a range recognizer term for the specified machine Since a range can only be defined across one label and
88. The complexity of your programs and the tasks they accomplish are limited only by your imagination This programming reference is designed to provide a concise description of each instruction Example Talking to the Instrument In general computers acting as controllers communicate with the instrument by sending and receiving messages over aremote interface such as GPIB or RS 232 C Instructions for programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G series logic analyzer will normally appear as ASCII character strings embedded inside the output statements of a host language available on your controller The host language s input statements are used to read in responses from the Agilent Technologies 1670G series logic analyzer For example HP 9000 Series 200 300 BASIC Y2K updates for currently supported versions of HP BASIC can be found at http hp iwcon com tm y2k cgi bin tm_search pl uses the OUTPUT statement for sending commands and queries to the Agilent Technologies 1670G series logic analyzer After a query is sent the response can be read in using the ENTER statement All programming examples in this manual are presented in HP BASIC This BASIC statement sends a command that causes the logic analyzer s machine 1 to be a state analyzer OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TYPE STATE lt terminator gt Each part of the above statement is explained in this section 1 3 Intro
89. This is not be the case if some other type of command is received within the program message MMEMORY INITIALIZE CLS STORE FILE DESCRIPTION Example Common Commands This program message initializes the disk selects the logic analyzer then stores the file In this example MMEMORY must be sent again in order to reenter the memory subsystem and store the file MMEMORY INITIALIZE SELECT 1 MMEMORY STORE FILE ar DESCRIPTION Status Registers Each status register has an associated status enable mask register By setting the bits in the status enable register you can select the status information you wish to use Any status bits that have not been masked enabled in the enable register will not be used to report status summary information to bits in other status registers Refer to chapter 6 Status Reporting for a complete discussion of how to read the status registers and how to use the status information available from this instrument Figure 8 1 Common Commands 99 xWAI CLS gt gt EsE space H mask m ED E Cine C OPC gt OPC gt OPT gt PRE e space pre mask p PRE gt LCD SRE J space e mask 8 CD GED
90. XTAG lt time_value gt lt state_value gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST XTAG 17 22 18 SWAVeform Subsystem Introduction The commands in the State Waveform subsystem allow you to configure the display so that you can view state data as waveforms on up to 96 channels identified by label name and bit number The 12 commands are analogous to their counterparts in the Timing Waveform subsystem However in this subsystem the x axis is restricted to representing only samples states regardless of whether time tagging is on or off As a result the only commands which can be used for scaling are DELay and RANge The way to manipulate the X and O markers on the Waveform display is through the State Listing SLISt subsystem Using the marker commands from the SLISt subsystem will affect the markers on the Waveform display The commands in the SW AVeform subsystem are e ACCumulate e ACQuisition e CENter e CLRPattern e CLRStat e DELay e INSert e MLENgth e RANGe e REMove e TAKenbranch e TPOSition 18 2 SWAVeform Subsystem Figure 18 1 Cis gt waveform eC accumulate Dana space on i gt Ha ACCumulate pe He Acau sinon Je space Hg j MANual ACQuisition gt CENTer space mark_type gt He CLRPattern je space Hx B ax l ALL CLRstat ma DELay space number of
91. XXX RESUME 37 10 38 FORMat Subsystem FORMat Subsystem The commands of the Format subsystem control the pattern generator values such as data output rate delay and the channels that you want to be active The Format subsystem also lets you specify the clock source and allows you to group channels together under a common user defined name ON i yr Format mC gt o cock Vip eae INTernat el clk period EXTernal LEFifty ES H r CLOCK gt Lage Da space 2 gt abel name e mode gt gt space FULL 2 gt ODe gt N N pa DELay space Te delay_arg DELay RE ove J space ALL gt al Format Subsystem Syntax Diagram label name a string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters chan_assignment an integer from 0 to 255 clk_period a real number specifying the internal clock period delay_arg a integer specifying the delay 38 2 Command Query Command Syntax lt clk_period gt Query Syntax Returned Format Example FORMat Subsystem CLOCk CLOCK The CLOCk command is used to specify the clock source for the pattern generator The choices are INTernal or EXTernal With an internal clock source the clock period must also be specified real number value With an external clock
92. _ underscore the file is for the system MMEMory AUToload 0 lt auto_file gt lt msus gt lt NL gt 12 7 lt auto_file gt Example Query lt msus gt MMEMory Subsystem CATalog A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY AUTOLOAD CATalog MMEMory CATalog All lt msus gt The CATalog query returns the directory of the disk in one of two block data formats The directory consists of a51 character string for each file on the disk when the ALL option is not used Each file entry is formatted as follows NNNNNNNNNN TTTTTTT FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF where N is the filename T is the file type see table 12 2 and F is the file description The optional parameter ALL returns the directory of the disk ina 70 character string as follows NNNNNNNNNNNN TITTTTT FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFE DDMMMYY HH MM SS where N is the filename T is the file type see table 12 2 F is the file description and D M Y and HH MM SS are the date month year and time respectively in 24 hour format Mass Storage Unit specifier INTernal0 for the hard disk drive and INTernall for the flexible disk drive MMEMory Subsystem CD Change Directory Returned Format MMEMory CATalog lt block_data gt lt b
93. a label may not have more than 32 bits Because the lt label_pattern gt parameter may contain don t cares it is handled as a string of characters rather than a number string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters B O 1 X 0 0 112131415l6 7 X H O 112 3 415 6 7 8 9 AIBICID E F xX 9321314861719 saw 0 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM OPATTERN A 511 23 13 Query Returned Format Example Command lt origin gt lt occurrence gt Example TWAVeform Subsystem OSEarch MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OPATtern lt label_name gt The OPATtern query in pattern marker mode returns the pattern specification for a given label name In the time marker mode the query returns the pattern under the O marker for a given label Ifthe O marker is not placed on valid data don t cares X are returned MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OPATtern lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM OPATTERN A OSEarch MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OSEarch lt occurrence gt lt origin gt The OSEarch command defines the search criteria for the O marker which is then used with the associated OPATtern recognizer specification and the OCONdition when moving markers on patterns The origin parameter tells the marker to begin a search from the beginning of the acquisition from the trigger or from the X mark
94. a semicolon is used to separate the functions lt subsystem gt lt function gt lt white space gt lt data gt lt function gt lt white space gt lt data gt lt terminator gt SYSTEM LONGFORM ON HEADER ON Duplicate Keywords Identical function keywords can be used for more than one subsystem For example the function keyword MMODE may be used to specify the marker mode in the subsystem for state listing or the timing waveforms e SLIST MMODE PATTERN sets the marker mode to pattern in the state listing e TWAVEFORM MMODE TIME sets the marker mode to time in the timing waveforms SLIST and TWAVEFORM are subsystem selectors and they determine which marker mode is being modified 1 9 Example Introduction to Programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Query Usage Query Usage Logic analyzer instructions that are immediately followed by a question mark are queries After receiving a query the logic analyzer parser places the response in the output buffer The output message remains in the buffer until it is read or until another logic analyzer instruction is issued When read the message is transmitted across the bus to the designated listener typically a controller Query commands are used to find out how the logic analyzer is currently configured They are also used to get results of measurements made by the logic analyzer This instruction plac
95. be deleted A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN Mass Storage Unit specifier INTernal0 for the hard disk drive and INTernal1 for the flexible disk drive OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY PURGE FILEI OUTPUT XXX MMEM PURG FILEIl INTERNALO Once executed the purge command permanently erases all the existing information about the specified file After that there is no way to retrieve the original information 12 18 Query Returned Format lt directory gt lt msus gt Example Command lt name gt MMEMory Subsystem PWD Present Working Directory PWD Present Working Directory MMEMory PWD lt msus gt The PWD query returns the present working directory for the specified drive If the lt msus gt option is not sent the present working directory will be returned for the current drive MMEMory PWD lt directory gt lt msus gt lt NL gt String of up to 64 characters with the backslash as separator for DOS and LIF disks Mass Storage Unit specifier INTernal0 for the hard disk drive and INTernal1 for the flexible disk drive OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY PWD OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY PWD INTERNAL1 REName MMEMory REName lt name gt lt msus gt lt new_name
96. been acquired for the last acquisition WAVeform VALid 0 1 lt NL gt No data acquired Data has been acquired OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM VALID XINCrement WAVeform XINCrement The XINCrement query returns the X increment currently in the preamble This value is the time difference between the consecutive data points X increment is determined by the RECord mode as follows e In FULL record mode the X increment equals the time period between data samples or sample period e In WINDow record mode the X increment is the time between data points on the display The X increment for WINDow record data will be less than or equal to the sample period WAVeform XINCrement lt value gt lt NL gt X increment value currently in preamble OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM XINCREMENT 36 13 Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example Query Returned Format lt value gt Example WAVeform Subsystem XORigin XORigin WAVeform SOURce CHANnel lt N gt XORigin The XORigin query returns the X origin value currently in the preamble The value represents the time of the first data point in memory with respect to the trigger point WAVeform XORigin lt value gt lt NL gt 112 X origin currently in preamble OUTPUT XXX WAV XOR XREFerence wAVeform XREFerence The XREFerence query returns the current X reference value
97. between 33 1 and 0 Because a label can only be defined across a maximum of two pods a range term is only available across a single label therefore the end points of the range cannot be split between labels When these values are expressed in binary they represent the bit values for the label at one of the range recognizers end points Don t cares are not allowed in the end point pattern specifications string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters FB O 1 O O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 H 0 1 213 14 516 17 8 9 A B C D E F 0111213141516171819 3 is fel GO NIE r eo O O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 H 0 1 213 14 5 16 17 8 9 A B C D E F CO 1 23 4156 789 z a e ES 1 2 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER RANGE1 DATA 127 7255 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER RANGE2 ABC B00001111 HCF 16 15 Query Returned Format Example Command lt number_of_ levels gt lt level_of_ trigger gt Example STRigger STRace Subsystem SEQuence MACHine 1 2 STRigger RANGe lt N gt The RANGe query returns the range recognizer end point specifications for the range MACHine 1 2 STRigger RANGe lt N gt lt label_name gt lt start_pattern gt lt stop_pattern gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER RANGE1 SEQuence MACHine 1 2 STRigger SEQuence lt
98. binary base 2 each bit will correspond to a single channel A 1 in a bit position means the associated channel in that pod is assigned to that pod and bit A 0 in a bit position means the associated channel in that pod is excluded from the label For example assigning B1111001100 is equivalent to entering through the touchscreen A label can not have a total of more than 32 channels assigned to it lt name gt lt polarity gt lt clock_bits gt lt upper_bits gt lt lower_bits gt lt assignment gt Example Query Returned Format Example SFORmat Subsystem LABel string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters POSitive NEGative format integer from 0 to 63 for a clock clocks are assigned in decreasing order format integer from 0 to 65535 for a pod pods are assigned in decreasing order format integer from 0 to 65535 for a pod pods are assigned in decreasing order format integer from 0 to 65535 for a pod pods are assigned in decreasing order OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT LABEL STAT POSITIVE 0 127 40312 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT LABEL SIG 1 B11 B0000000011111111 B0000000000000000 MACHine 1 2 SFORmat LABel lt name gt The LABel query returns the current specification for the selected by name label If the label does not exist nothing is returned The polarity is always retu
99. bus commands 2 6 EEE 488 2 5 2 FC 2 6 nfinity 4 4 nitialization 1 4 TTialize command 12 13 nput buffer 5 3 Sert command 14 6 18 8 23 11 nstruction headers 1 6 nstruction parameters 1 7 nstruction syntax 1 5 nstruction terminator 1 7 nstructions 1 5 nstrument address 2 4 nterface capabilities 2 3 RS 232C 3 9 nterface clear 2 6 nterface code HP IB 2 4 Interface selectcode RS 232C 3 10 Internal errors 7 4 K Keyword data 1 13 Keywords 4 3 L LABel command query 15 7 15 8 21 6 LCL 6 6 LER command 9 11 LEVelarm command query 13 7 LINE command query 14 7 17 9 20 8 24 9 Linefeed 1 7 4 5 LOAD CONFig command 12 14 LOAD IASSembler command 12 15 Local 2 5 Local lockout 2 5 LOCKout command 3 11 9 12 Longform 1 11 LONGform command 1 16 11 9 Lowercase 1 11 M MACHine selector 10 6 13 4 MACHine Subsystem 13 1 13 3 13 4 13 5 13 6 13 7 13 8 13 9 13 10 Mainframe commands 9 2 MASTer command query 15 9 MAV 6 4 MENU command 9 12 20 9 MESE command 9 14 MESR command 9 16 MKDir command 12 16 MLENgth command query 16 14 18 8 22 15 23 12 25 12 MMEMory subsystem 12 2 MMODe command query 17 10 23 13 24 10 Mnemonics 1 13 4 3 MODE command query 25 7 Module Level Commands 10 1 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 MSB 6 6 MSG 6 5 command 12 17 un T i tiple numeric variables 1 21 tiple program commands 1 14
100. can control the data flow between the logic analyzer and the controller This allows you to have more control of data flow between devices The logic analyzer uses the following connections on its RS 232 C interface for extended interface communication Programming Over RS 232 C Extended Interface with Hardware Handshake e Pin7 SGND Signal Ground e Pin2 TD Transmit Data from logic analyzer e Pin3 RD Receive Data into logic analyzer The additional lines you use depends on your controller s implementation of the extended hardwire interface e Pin4 RTS Request To Send is an output from the logic analyzer which can be used to control incoming data flow e Pin5 CTS Clear To Send is an input to the logic analyzer which controls data flow from the logic analyzer e Pin6 DSR Data Set Ready is an input to the logic analyzer which controls data flow from the logic analyzer within two bytes e Pin8 DCD Data Carrier Detect is an input to the logic analyzer which controls data flow from the logic analyzer within two bytes e Pin20 DTR Data Terminal Ready is an output from the logic analyzer which is enabled as long as the logic analyzer is turned on The TD Transmit Data line from the logic analyzer must connect to the RD Receive Data line on the controller Likewise the RD line from the logic analyzer must connect to the TD line on the controller The RTS Request To Send is an output from the logic analyzer which
101. capability sets implemented in the device Table 9 2 lists the capability sets implemented in the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer Returned Format CAPability TIEEE488 1987 SH1 AH1 T5 1L4 SR1 RL1 PP1 DC1 DT1 C0 E2 lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX CAPABILITY Table 9 2 Agilent 1670G Series Capability Sets Mnemonic Capability Name Implementation SH Source Handshake SH1 AH Acceptor Handshake AH1 T Talker or TE Extended Talker T5 Listener or LE Extended Listener L4 SR Service Request SR1 RL Remote Local RL1 PP Parallel Poll PP1 DC Device Clear DC1 DT Device Trigger DT1 C Any Controller Co E Electrical Characteristic E2 Query Returned Format lt ID gt lt assign gt Example Instrument Commands CARDcage CARDcage CARDcage The CARDcage query returns 10 integers which identify the card setup that is installed in the logic analyzer The Agilent 1670G series logic analyzers always return the same series of integers since the analyzers are not expandable the way an 16500 logic analysis system is The string returned by the query is in two parts The first five two digit numbers identify the card type There are five numbers because this command also works on the 16500 logic analysis system which has five card slots The identification number for the logic analyzer is 34 and appears first If your logic analyzer is a 1672G model then the next four numbers are
102. command selects the t Programming Examples Making a State Analyzer Measurement KKEKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK sequence level specified as th KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKKK KK KAKA KK KA rigger in the trigger level kk kk kk kk KK KK KK TPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER FIND4 re P 1 kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxx xx k CONFIGURE SEQUE ce E LEVEL 5 KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK Store anystate on level 5 TPUT 707 MACHINE1 STRIGGER STORES KKK KK KK KKKK KK KK KK START ACQUISITION Place the logic analyzer in single the acquisition is complete PUT 707 RMODE SINGLE PUT 707 CLS PUT 707 START ANYSTATE kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkkkxkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkkkxkkx k acquisition mode then determine when kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxxk kxx CHECK FOR MEASUR EMENT COMP LE TE kk kk kk dk Query the register for a measuremen complete condition OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM HEADER OFF OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM LONGFORM OFF Status 0 OUTPUT 707 MESR1 ENTER 707 Status CLI Print the MESR register status EAR SCREEN PRINT Measurement complete status is PRINT 0 not complete 1 complet I WA TE GO PRINT TABXY 30 15 Measurement is complete ET 1 Status AND 1 1 THEN GOTO 1190 TO 1070
103. command tree traversal Table 4 1 Programming and Documentation Conventions Truncation Rule Truncation Rule The truncation rule for the keywords used in headers and parameters is If the long form has four or fewer characters there is no change in the short form When the long form has more than four characters the short form is Just the first four characters unless the fourth character is a vowel In that case only the first three characters are used There are some commands that do not conform to the truncation rule by design These will be noted in their respective description pages Some examples of how the truncation rule is applied to various commands are shown in table 4 1 Truncation Examples Long Form Short Form OFF OFF DATA DATA START STAR LONGFORM LONG DELAY DEL ACCUMULATE ACC 4 3 Programming and Documentation Conventions Infinity Representation Infinity Representation The representation of infinity is 9 9E 37 for real numbers and 32767 for integers This is also the value returned when a measurement cannot be made Sequential and Overlapped Commands IEEE 488 2 makes the distinction between sequential and overlapped commands Sequential commands finish their task before the execution of the next command starts Overlapped commands run concurrently therefore the command following an overlapped command may be started before the overlapped command is completed The over
104. commands 112 CHANNEL 1 OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM SOURCE 36 11 Query Returned Format Example Query Returned Format lt period gt Example Query Returned Format Example WAVeform Subsystem SPERiod WAVe form SOURce The SOURce query returns the presently selected channel WAVeform SOURce OUTPUT XXX WAV CHANnel lt EFORM SOURCI gt lt NL gt D E SPERiod WAVeform SPERiod The SPERiod query returns the present sampling period The sample period is determined by the DELay and the RANGe commands of the TIMEbase subsystem WAVeform SPERiod time in seconds OUTPUT XXX WAV EFORM SP lt period gt lt NL gt ERIOD TYPE WAVeform TYPE The TYPE query returns the presently acquisition type normal or average The acquisition type is specified in the ACQuire Subsystem using the ACQuire TYPE command NORMal AVERage lt NL gt WAVeform TYPE OUTPUT XXX WAV EFORM TYPE 36 12 Query Returned Format 0 1 Example Query Returned Format lt value gt Example WAVeform Subsystem VALid VALid WAVeform VALid The VALid query checks the oscilloscope for acquired data Ifa measurement is completed and data has been acquired by all channels then the query reports a 1 A 0 is reported if no data has
105. commands that send and receive block data between the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer and a controller Use the DATA instruction to transfer acquired timing and state data and the SETup instruction to transfer instrument configuration data This is useful for e Re loading to the logic analyzer e Processing data later e Processing data in the controller This chapter explains how to use these commands The format and length of block data depends on the instruction being used the configuration of the instrument and the amount of acquired data The length of the data block can be up to 11 Mbytes The SYSTem DATA section describes each part of the block data as it will appear when used by the DATA instruction The beginning byte number the length in bytes and a short description is given for each part of the block data This is intended to be used primarily for processing of data in the controller Data sent to a controller with the DBLock mode set to PACKed can be reloaded into the analyzer Data sent to a controller with the DBLock mode set to UNPacked cannot be reloaded into the analyzer Do not change the block data in the controller if you intend to send the block data back into the logic analyzer for later processing Changes made to the block data in the controller could have unpredictable results when sent back to the logic analyzer 27 2 DATA and SETup Commands Data Format Data Format To understand th
106. configuration file ENU FORMAT 1 ISelect Format menu for machine 1 ODE SINGLE Select run mode TART Run the measurement Introduction to Programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Instruction Syntax Instruction Syntax To program the logic analyzer remotely you must have an understanding of the command format and structure The IEEE 488 2 standard governs syntax rules pertaining to how individual elements such as headers separators parameters and terminators may be grouped together to form complete instructions Syntax definitions are also given to show how query responses will be formatted Figure 1 1 shows the three main syntactical parts of a typical program statement Output Command Device Address and Instruction The instruction is further broken down into three parts Instruction header White space and Instruction parameters Figure 1 1 INSTRUCTION l Y OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM MENU DISPLAY 2 OUTPUT COMMAND DEVICE ADDRESS INSTRUCTION HEADER WHITE SPACE INSTRUCTION PARAMETERS 21650830 Program Message Syntax Output Command The output command depends on the language you choose to use Throughout this guide HP 9000 Series 200 300 BASIC 6 2 is used in the programming examples If you use another language you will need to find the equivalents of BASIC Commands like OUTPUT ENTER and CLEAR in order to
107. containing a start value and a stop value for the specified label The values may be in binary B octal 0 hexadecimal H or decimal default You cannot use don t cares in any base string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters string of up to 16 alphanumeric characters B O 1 s Me 0 0111213 4 5l6I7 H O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A BICID IE F 1213431789 Er B O 1 Ene of0 1 12 3 14 1516 17 H O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A BICIDIE F 014213 P41 S16 7819 a ar sg FM OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SYMBOL RANGE STAT TO_ACC 0 HOOOF Command Example Command lt label_name gt lt width_value gt Example SYMBol Subsystem REMove REMove MACHine 1 2 SYMBol REMove The REMove command deletes all symbols from a specified machine OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SYMBOL REMOVE WIDTh MACHine 1 2 SYMBol WIDTh lt label_name gt lt width_value gt The WIDTh command specifies the width number of characters in which the symbol names will be displayed when symbols are used The WIDTh command does not affect the displayed length of the symbol offset value string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters integer from 1 to 16 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SYMBOL WIDTH DATA 9 26 8 27 DATA and SETup Commands Introduction The DATA and SETup commands are SYSTem
108. convert the examples The instructions are always shown between the double quotes 1 5 Introduction to Programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Device Address Device Address The location where the device address must be specified also depends on the host language that you are using In some languages this could be specified outside the output command In BASIC this is always specified after the keyword OUTPUT The examples in this manual use a generic address of XXX When writing programs the number you use will depend on the cable you use in addition to the actual address If you are using an GPIB see chapter 2 Programming over GPIB If you are using RS 232 C see chapter 3 Programming Over RS 232 C Instructions Instructions both commands and queries normally appear as a string embedded in a statement of your host language such as BASIC Pascal or C The only time a parameter is not meant to be expressed as a string is when the instruction s syntax definition specifies block data There are just a few instructions which use block data Instructions are composed of two main parts the header which specifies the command or query to be sent and the parameters which provide additional data needed to clarify the meaning of the instruction Many queries do not use any parameters Instruction Header The instruction header is one or more keywords separated by colons The command tree
109. description of each command Part 5 Part 5 chapters 37 through 42 explain each command in the subsystem command set for the pattern generator The information covered in Part 5 is only relevant to models containing a pattern generator The commands explained in this part give you access to all the commands used to operate the pattern generator portion of the Agilent 1670G series system This part is designed to provide a concise description of each command STRigger STRace Subsystem SLISt Subsystem SWAVeform Subsystem SCHart Subsystem COMPare Subsystem TFORmat Subsystem TTRIGger TTRACe Subsystem TWAVeform Subsystem TLISt Subsystem SPA Subsystem SYMBol Commands 27 DATA and SETup Commands Oscilloscope Root Level Commands ACQuire Subsystem CHANnel Subsystem lelejs sj lsjlelleilsilsilellelellllel Part 6 Part 6 chapter 43 contains program examples of actual tasks that show you how to get started in programming the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzers The complexity of your programs and the tasks they accomplish are limited only by your imagination These examples are written in HP Basic 6 2 however the program concepts can be used in any other popular programming language that allows communications over GPIB or RS 232 buses DISPlay Subsystem MARKer Subsystem MEASure Subsystem TIMebase Subsystem TRIGger Subsystem WAVeform Subsystems Programming the Pattern G
110. e Out of Range OUTRange between two time values End points for INRange and OUTRange should be at least 2 ns apart since this is the minimum time at which data is sampled This command affects the timing analyzer only and has no relation to the RUNTil commands in the SLISt and COMPare subsystems lt run_until_ OFF LT lt value gt GT lt value gt INRange lt value gt spec gt lt value gt OUTRange lt value gt lt value gt lt value gt real number Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM RUNTIL GT 800 0E 6 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM RUNTIL INRANGE 4 5 5 5 Query MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform RUNTil The RUNTIl query returns the current stop criteria Returned Format MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform RUNTil lt run_until_spec gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM RUNTIL 23 17 Command lt samp_period gt Example Query Returned Format Example Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example TWAVeform Subsystem SPERiod SPERiod MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform SPERiod lt samp_period gt The SPERiod command sets the sample period of the timing analyzer real number from 4 ns to 100 us OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM SPERIOD 50E 9 MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform SPERiod The SPERiod query returns the current sample period MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform SPERiod lt
111. ensure enough time for command execution OUTPUT XXX DIGITIZE Chapter 43 Programming Examples for an example using the DIGitize command 28 5 28 6 29 ACQuire Subsystem Introduction The Acquire Subsystem commands are used to set up acquisition conditions for the DIGitize command of the oscilloscope system The subsystem contains commands to select the type of acquisition and the number of averages to be taken if the average type is chosen Refer to Figure 28 1 for the ACQuire Subsystem Syntax Diagram The ACQuire Subsystem commands are e COUNt e TYPE This chapter applies only to the oscilloscope option 29 2 ACQuire Subsystem Figure 29 1 BEN 19 Gacauire gt oy count space count_arg gt space mm NORMa ACQuire Subsystem Syntax Diagram Table 29 1 ACQuire Parameter Values Parameter Value count_arg 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 The number of averages to be taken of each time point 29 3 Command lt count gt Example Query Returned Format Example ACQuire Subsystem COUNt COUNt ACQuire COUNt lt count gt The COUNt command specifies the number of acquisitions for the running weighted average The COUNt command is only available when the acquisition mode is AVERage This command generates error 211 Legal command but Settings conflict if Normal acquisition mode is specif
112. expression The terms A through J are defined by the TERM command The terms IN_RANGE1 and 2 and OUT_RANGE1 and 2 are defined by the RANGe command Expressions are limited to what you could manually enter through the State Trigger menu Regarding parentheses the syntax definitions below show only the required ones Additional parentheses are allowed as long as the meaning of the expression is not changed A detailed example is provided in figure 16 2 on page 16 11 lt qualifier gt see Qualifier on page 16 7 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TAG OFF OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TAG TIME OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TAG IN RANGE OR NOTF OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TAG IN RANGE OR A AND E 16 18 STRigger STRace Subsystem TAKenbranch Query MACHine 1 2 STRigger TAG The TAG query returns the current count tag specification Returned Format MACHine 1 2 STRigger TAG OFF TIME lt state_tag_qualifier gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TAG TAKenbranch Command MACHine 1 2 STRigger TAKenbranch STORe NOSTore The TAKenbranch command allows you to specify whether the state causing the branch is stored or not stored for the specified machine The state causing the branch is defined by the BRANch command Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 STRIGGER TAKENBRANCH STORE
113. for the device address Generally the interface select code can be any decimal value between 0 and 31 except for those interface codes which are reserved by the controller for internal peripherals and other internal interfaces This value can be selected through switches on the interface card For example if your RS 232 C interface select code is 9 the device address required to communicate over the RS 232 C bus is 9 For more information refer to the reference manual for your interface card or controller Programming Over RS 232 C Lockout Command Lockout Command To lockout the front panel controls use the instrument command LOCKout When this function is on all controls except the power switch are entirely locked out Local control can only be restored by sending the LOCKout OFF command Cycling the power will also restore local control but this will also reset CAUTION certain RS 232 C states It also resets the logic analyzer to the power on defaults and purges any acquired data in the acquisition memory ofallthe installed modules See Also For more information on the LOCKout command see chapter 9 Instrument Commands Programming and Documentation Conventions Introduction This chapter covers the programming conventions used in programming the instrument as well as the documentation conventions used in this manual This chapter also contains a detailed description of the command tree and
114. gt lt section gt lt section_ header gt lt section_data gt Example SYSTem Subsystem SETup The print query should NOT be sent with any other command or query on the same command line The print query never returns a header Also since response data from a print query may be sent directly to a printer without modification the data is not returned in block mode OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM PRINT SCREEN SETup SYStem SETup lt block_data gt The SYStem SETup command configures the logic analyzer module as defined by the block data sent by the controller This chapter describes briefly the syntax of the Setup command and query Because of the capabilities and importance of the Setup command and query a complete chapter is dedicated to it The dedicated chapter is chapter 27 DATA and SETup Commands lt block_length_specifier gt lt section gt 8 lt length gt The total length of all sections in byte format must be represented with 8 digits lt section_header gt lt section_data gt 16 bytes described in the Section Header Description section in chapter 27 Format depends on the type of data The total length of a section is 16 for the section header plus the length of the section data When calculating the value for lt length gt don t forget to include the length of the section headers OUTPUT XXX USING K SYSTEM SETUP lt block_data gt 11
115. gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XTIME 23 24 24 TLISt Subsystem Introduction The TLISt subsystem contains the commands available for the Timing Listing menu in the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer and is the same as the SLISt subsystem except the OCONdition and XCONdition commands The TLISt subsystem commands are e COLumn e CLRPattern e DATA e LINE e MMODe e OCONdition e OPATtern e OSEarch e OSTate e OTAG e REMove e RUNTIl TAVerage TMAXimum TMINimum VRUNs XCONdition XOTag XOTime XPATtern XSEarch XSTate XTAG 24 2 Figure 24 1 TLISt z TLISt Subsystem iJ COLumn Je space Hr col_num Jr label_name nae gt base pa zu gt mod_num c A MACHine 1l2 I COLUMN space col_num H CLRPattern space x DATA gt space line number a i Ds label_name LINE gt space H line_num_mid_screen MODe space OFF PATTern MSTats MMODe H OCONcition Ja space ENTering EXITing H OCONdition OPA Ttern Da space label name Jane pattern yo TLISt Subsystem Syntax Diagram OPA Ttern gt space e lobel_nome Y 165555
116. in figure 4 1 illustrates how all the keywords can be joined together to form a complete header see chapter 4 Programming and Documentation Conventions The example in figure 1 1 shows a command Queries are indicated by adding a question mark to the end of the header Many instructions can be used as either commands or queries depending on whether or not you have included the question mark The command and query forms of an instruction usually have different parameters 1 6 Introduction to Programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Instruction Terminator When you look up a query in this programmer s reference youll find a paragraph labeled Returned Format under the one labeled Query The syntax definition by Returned format will always show the instruction header in square brackets like SYSTem MENU which means the text between the brackets is optional It is also a quick way to see what the header looks like White Space White space is used to separate the instruction header from the instruction parameters If the instruction does not use any parameters white space does not need to be included White space is defined as one or more spaces ASCII defines a space to be a character represented by a byte that has a decimal value of 32 Tabs can be used only if your controller first converts them to space characters before sending the string to the instrument Instruction Parameters Instru
117. in the preamble This value specifies the X value of the first data point in memory and is always 0 WAVeform XREFerence lt value gt lt NL gt X reference value in the preamble OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM XREFERENCE 36 14 Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example WAVeform Subsystem YINCrement YINCrement WAVeform SOURce CHANnel lt N gt YINCrement The YINCrement query returns the Y increment value currently in the preamble This value is the voltage difference between consecutive data values WAVeform YINCrement lt value gt lt NL gt 112 Y increment value in preamble OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM YINCREMENT YORigin WAVeform SOURce CHANnel lt N gt YORigin The YORigin query returns the Y origin value currently in the preamble This value is the voltage at center screen WAVeform YORigin lt value gt lt NL gt 112 Y origin value in preamble OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM YORIGIN 36 15 WAVeform Subsystem YREFerence YREFerence Query WAVeform YREFerence The YREFerence query returns the Y reference value currently in the preamble This value specifies the data value at center screen where Y origin occurs Returned Format WAVeform YREFerence lt value gt lt NL gt lt value gt Y reference data v
118. in this chapter is a sample set of steps you use to perform a serial poll over GPIB The status reporting feature available over the bus is the serial poll IEEE 488 2 defines data structures commands and common bit definitions There are also instrument defined structures and bits The bits in the status byte act as summary bits for the data structures residing behind them In the case of queues the summary bit is set if the queue is not empty For registers the summary bit is set if any enabled bit in the event register is set The events are enabled via the corresponding event enable register Events captured by an event register remain set until the register is read or cleared Registers are read with their associated commands The CLS command clears all event registers and all queues except the output queue If CLS is sent immediately following a lt program message terminator gt the output queue will also be cleared Status Reporting Figure 6 1 EVENT REGISTER MESR gt ENABLE REGISTER MESE gt LOGICAL OR o OAT mxm mxo EVENT REGISTERS ESR 2 loo OVO rom NOTE UR RQC NOT IMPLEMENTED ENABLE 1 REGISTERS ESE ICAL OR QUEUES O OUTPUT M MESSAGE o T mit 9 lt gt zl O m r Oz OOD On ja STB SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE 18500802 REGISTER SRE
119. is used to send and receive the pattern generator main program listings and the macro listings The complete pattern generator data block consists of two sections not countingthe SYMBOL section The sections are Sectionl DATA Section2 MACROS SYSTem DATA lt block data gt SYSTem DATA SYSTem DATA lt block data gt lt NL gt Section 1 DATA The Main Program section contains the program listing data in binary form The length of this section depends on the length of the program listing Section 2 MACROS The MACROS section contains all the program listing for all the macros The length of this section varies depending on the length of the macro listings Command Syntax Query Syntax Returned Format DATA and SETup Commands SYSTem SETup SYSTem SETup The SETup command for the pattern generator is used to configure system parameters such as the pod and bit assignment clock rates and output mode by loading saved configurations The CONFIG section consists of 4082 bytes of information which fully describe the main parameters for the pattern generator The total length of the section is 4082 bytes recall that the section header is 16 bytes The data in this section of the block should not be changed to ensure proper pattern generator operation SYSTem SETup lt block data gt SYSTem SETup SYSTem SETup lt block data gt lt NL gt 42 5 Part 6 Programming Examp
120. kk kk Xk TRANSFER Buff TO Comm COUNT Numbytes WAIT i KHAKKKXKKXKKKKKKKKKk kk RESTORE BUFFER POINT Restore the transfer buffer pointer CONTROL Buff 5 Streg 1 1 KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK SEND TERMINATING LIN the buffer to the Agilent 1670G ERS KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKKKK Di E FE ED KR kk kk Send the terminating linefeed to properly terminate the setup string OUTPUT Comm I PRINT SENT THE SETUP xx END 43 16 Programming Examples Checking for Measurement Completion Checking for Measurement Completion You can append this program or insert it into another program when you need to know when a measurement is complete If it is at the end ofa program it will tell you when measurement is complete If you insert it into a program it will halt the program until the current measurement is complete This program is also in the state analyzer example program in Making a state analyzer measurement on page 28 5 It is included in the state analyzer example program to show how it can be used in a program to halt the program until measurement is complete KKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK CHECK FOR MEASUREMENT COMPLETE kk kk kk Dos DDB BB BB Ho OF WN Enable the MESR register and query the register for a measurement complete condition
121. left most column in the display Note the exception described for the MACRo instruction You cannot assign values to more than 16 labels per instruction SEQuence Subsystem INSert Instructions NOOP The NOOP instruction means there is no instruction for this line BREak The BREak instruction causes the execution of the sequence to stop at this line Use the RESume command to advance to the next sequence line SIGNal The SIGNal instruction is the complement of the WAIT IMB instruction When the pattern generator encounters a SIGNal instruction it will output a signal to the internal Intermodule Bus IMB This signal is used to trigger the logic analyzer WAIT The Wait instruction causes the pattern generator to stop and wait for the occurrence of the specified event pattern s The event patterns are specified elsewhere SEQuence EPATtern command The event to be waited for by this particular command is specified by the optional instruction argument parameter Once the specified event occurs the pattern generator program proceeds to the next state Valid wait events are AIBICGIDIIMB IF The IF instruction allows a sequence of program states to occur if a specified condition is true The IF event pattern can be specified elsewhere SEQuence EPATtern command The condition to be tested by the IF instruction is specified by the optional instruction argument parameter If the specified condition is true the sequence st
122. number_of_levels gt lt level_of_trigger gt The SEQuence command redefines the state analyzer trace sequence First it deletes the current trace sequence Then it inserts the number of levels specified with default settings and assigns the trigger to be at a specified sequence level The number of levels can be between 2 and 12 when the analyzer is armed by the RUN key integer from 2 to 12 integer from 1 to number of existing sequence levels 1 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER SEQUENCE 4 3 16 16 Query Returned Format Example Command lt N gt lt store_ qualifier gt Example STRigger STRace Subsystem STORe MACHine 1 2 STRigger SEQuence The SEQuence query returns the current sequence specification MACHine 1 2 STRigger SEQuence lt number_of_levels gt lt level_of_trigger gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER SEQUENCE STORe MACHine 1 2 STRigger STORe lt N gt lt store_qualifier gt The STORe command defines the store qualifier for a given sequence level Any data matching the STORe qualifier will actually be stored in memory as part of the current trace data The qualifier may be a single term or a complex expression The terms A through J are defined by the TERM command The meaning of IN_RANGE1 and 2 and OUT_RANGE1 and 2 is determined by the RANGe command Expressions are limited to what you
123. of the eight digits represents the total length of the block all sections For example if the total length of the block is 14522 bytes the block length specifier would be 800014522 Each lt section gt consists ofa lt section header gt and lt section data gt The lt section data gt format varies for each section and may be any length For the DATA instruction there is only one lt section gt which is composed of a data preamble followed by the acquisition data This section has a variable number of bytes depending on configuration and amount of acquired data OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM DATA lt block data gt 27 4 lt block data gt lt block length specifier lt length gt lt section gt lt section header gt lt section data gt Query Returned Format DATA and SETup Commands SYSTem DATA lt block length specifier gt lt section gt 8 lt length gt the total length of all sections in byte format must be represented with 8 digits lt section header gt lt section data gt 16 bytes described on the following page format depends on the type of data The total length of a section is 16 for the section header plus the length of the section data When calculating the value for lt length gt remember to include the length ofthe section headers SYSTem DATA The SYSTem DATA query returns the block data to the controller The data sent by the SYSTem DATA query reflec
124. of whether the marker was positioned in time or through a pattern search If data is not valid tagged data the query returns 9 9E37 MACHine 1 2 TLISt XTAG lt time_value gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XTAG 24 21 24 22 25 SPA Subsystem 25 2 SPA Subsystem i gt SPA IZ C MODE SPACE gt OVERView gt pP HIST ogram gt TINTerval gt CN MODE gt OVERView e I e Bucke SPACE size Y bucket_num HIGH fp SPACE gt high_patt pd e HIGH gt LABEL mei SPACE m label name Mo Mei LABel gt Low SPACE H low patt If A LOW gt 1 MLENgtn SPACE m memory m pa MLENgth gt 1 OMARKer SPACE m o_patt m Mi OMARker gt m ovsTatistic ei SPACE XHITs 01670805 25 3 SPA Subsystem 01670506 XMARker SPACE XMARker EN wy HISTogram i HSTatistic j SPACE range_num gt LaBe e SPACE PP label name H OTHer gt SPACE INCLuded ExCLuded e OUALifier SPACE m label name gt H r pattern e auALifier gt SPACE
125. on the indicated channel 112 the desired marker voltage level 2 x maximum offset OUTPUT XXX MARK MARKer AVOLt ER AVOLT CHANN BLL 2 75 The AVOLt query returns the current voltage and channel selection for the A marker MARKer AVOLt CHANnel lt N gt lt level gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MARK ER AVOLT 32 6 Query Returned Format lt level gt Example Command lt N gt lt level gt Example Query Returned Format Example MARKer Subsystem ABVolt ABVolt MARKer Al BVolt The ABVolt query returns the difference between the A marker voltage and the B marker voltage Vb Va MARKer ABVolt lt level gt lt NL gt level in volts of the B marker minus the A marker OUTPUT XXX MARKER ABVOLT BVOLt MARKer BVOLt CHANnel lt N gt lt level gt The BVOLt command moves the B marker to the specified voltage on the indicated channel 112 the desired marker voltage level 2 x maximum offset OUTPUT XXX MARKER BVOLT CHANNEL1 2 75 MARKer BVOLt 7 The BVOLt qu marker ery returns the current voltage and channel selection for the B MARKer BVOLt CHANnel lt N gt lt level gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MARKER BVOLT 32 7 Command Example Command Example Query Returned Format Example MARKer Subsystem CENTer CE
126. on the current settings of the SYSTEM HEADER and LONGFORM commands The general format is lt instruction_header gt lt space gt lt data gt lt terminator gt The header identifies the data that follows the parameters and is controlled by issuinga SYSTEM HEADER ON OFF command Ifthe state ofthe header command is OFF only the data is returned by the query The format of the header is controlled by the SYSTEM LONGFORM ON OFF command If long form is OFF the header will be in its short form and the header will vary in length depending on the particular query The separator between the header and the data always consists of one space A command or query may be sent in either long form or short form or in any combination of long form and short form The HEADER and LONGFORM commands only control the format of the returned data and they have no affect on the way commands are sent Refer to chapter 11 SYSTem Subsystem for information on turning the HEADER and LONGFORM commands on and off The following examples show some possible responses for a MACHINE1 SPORMAT THRESHOLD2 query with HEADER OFF lt data gt lt terminator gt with HEADER ON and LONGFORM OFF MACH1 SFOR THR2 lt white_space gt lt data gt lt terminator gt with HEADER ON and LONGFORM ON MACHINE1 SFORMAT THRESHOLD2 lt white_space gt lt data gt lt terminator gt Example Introduction to Programming t
127. one of the following forms BO1X for binary 001234567X for octal H0123456789ABCDEFX for hexadecimal 01234567839 for decimal lt start_value gt string of one of the following forms B01 for binary 001234567 for octal 4H0123456789ABCDEF for hexadecimal 01234567839 for decimal lt stop_value gt string of one of the following forms B01 for binary 001234567 for octal H0123456789ABCDEF for hexadecimal 01234567839 for decimal lt width_value gt integer from 1 to 16 41 3 SYMBol Subsystem BASE BASE Command The BASE command sets the base in which symbols for the specified label will be displayed in the symbol menu It also specifies the base in which the symbol offsets are displayed when symbols are used Note that BINary is not available for labels with more than 20 bits assigned In this case the base will default to HEXadecimal Command Syntax SYMBol BASE lt label_name gt lt base_value gt lt label_name gt string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters lt base_value gt BINary HEXadecimal OCTal DECimal ASCii Example OUTPUT XXX SYMBol BASE DATA HEXadecimal SYMBol Subsystem PATTern PATTern Command The PATTern command allows you to specify asymbol for a pattern on the specified label The pattern may contain don t cares in the form of XX X s Command Syntax
128. only one label at a time a complete specification could require several iterations When the value of a pattern is expressed in binary it represents the bit values for the label inside the pattern recognizer term In whatever base is used the value must be between 0 and Dre 1 since a label may not have more than 32 bits Because the lt label_pattern gt parameter may contain don t cares it is handled as a string of characters rather than a number string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters B O 1 X 0 0 112131415 617 xX H 0 1 2 3 415 6 7 8 9 JAIBICID IEI F X FOT ASIE FEST DF ee ee JR OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XPATTERN A 511 MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XPATtern lt label_name gt The XPATtern query in pattern marker mode returns the pattern specification for a given label name In the time marker mode the query returns the pattern under the X marker for a given label Ifthe X marker is not placed on valid data don t cares X are returned MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XPATtern lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XPATTERN A 23 22 Command lt origin gt lt occurrence gt Example Query Returned Format Example TWAVeform Subsystem XSEarch XSEarch MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XSEarch lt occurrence gt lt origin gt The XSEarch command defines
129. or met Agilent Technologies P O Box 2197 1900 Garden of the Gods Road Colorado Springs CO 80901 2197 U S A Product Warranty This Agilent Technologies product has a warranty against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment During the warranty period Agilent Technologies will at its option either repair or replace products that prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Agilent Technologies For products returned to Agilent Technologies for warranty service the Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Agilent Technologies and Agilent Technologies shall pay shipping charges to return the product to the Buyer However the Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to Agilent Technologies from another country Agilent Technologies warrants that its software and firmware designated by Agilent Technologies for use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument Agilent Technologies does not warrant that the operation of the instrument software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free Limitation of Warranty The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by the Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modif
130. source the clock frequency range must be specified as one of the following e Less than or equal to 50 MHz LEFifty e Greater than 50 MHz and less than or equal to 100 MHz GTFifty e Greater than 100 MHz GTONe The maximum clock rate is limited by the output channel mode selected see FORMat MODe command FORMat CLOCk INTernal lt clk_period gt FORMat CLOCk EXTernal LEFifty GTFifty GTONe a real number clock period that corresponds to the front panel selectable clock period values FORMat CLOCk FORMat CLOCk INTernal lt clk_period gt FORMat CLOCk EXTernal LEFifty GTFifty GTONe 10 DIM C1 100 20 OUTPUT XXX FORMAT CLOCK 30 ENTER XXX C1 40 PRINT C1 50 END This example queries and prints the current clock settings 38 3 Command Query Command syntax lt delay_arg gt Query syntax Returned format FORMat Subsystem DELay DELay The DELay command is used to specify the clock out delay The clock out delay setting allows positioning of the clock with respect to the data The delay setting that corresponds to zero is uncalibrated and must be measured by the user to determine the basic clock data timing Subsequent settings delay the clock approximately 1 3 ns per step The query returns the current clock out delay value FORMat DELay lt delay_arg gt integer from 0 through 9 FORMat DELay FORMat
131. the marker on patterns Since this command deals with only one label at a time a complete specification could require several iterations When the value of a pattern is expressed in binary it represents the bit values for the label inside the pattern recognizer term In whatever base is used the value must be between 0 and DP 1 since a label may not have more than 32 bits Because the lt label_pattern gt parameter may contain don t cares it is handled as a string of characters rather than a number string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters B O 1 X 0 0111213141516171X H 0 1 21314 15 61718 9 A B C D E F X 0 1 2 3 14 15 16 7 18 19 3 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST OPATTERN DATA 255 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST OPATTERN ABC BXXxXX1101 MACHine 1 2 TLISt OPATtern lt label_name gt The OPATtern query returns the pattern specification for a given label name MACHine 1 2 TLISt OPATtern lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST OPATTERN A 24 12 Command lt occurrence gt lt origin gt Example Query Returned Format Example TLISt Subsystem 0SEarch OSEarch MACHine 1 2 TLISt OSEarch lt occurrence gt lt origin gt The OSEarch command defines the search criteria for the O marker which is then used with associated
132. the search criteria for the X marker which is then used with the associated XPATtern recognizer specification and the XCONdition when moving markers on patterns The origin parameter tells the marker to begin a search with the trigger The occurrence parameter determines which occurrence of the XPATtern recognizer specification relative to the origin to which the marker actually searches An occurrence of 0 zero places a marker on the origin TRIGger STARt integer from 1032192 to 1032192 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XSEARCH 10 TRIGGER MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XSEarch lt occurrence gt lt origin gt The XSEarch query returns the search criteria for the X marker MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XSEarch lt occurrence gt lt origin gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XSEARCH 23 23 TWAVeform Subsystem XTIMe XTIMe Command MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XTIMe lt time_value gt The XTIMe command positions the X marker in time when the marker mode is TIME If data is not valid the command performs no action lt time_value gt real number from 10 0 ks to 10 0 ks Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM XTIME 40 0E 6 Query MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XTIMe The XTIMe query returns the X marker position in time If data is not valid the query returns 9 9537 Returned Format MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform XTIMe lt time_value
133. with the IEEE 488 2 standard Chapter 6 explains status reporting and how it can be used to monitor the flow of your programs and measurement process Chapter 7 contains error message descriptions Part 2 Part 2 chapters 8 through 13 explains each command in the command set for the entire logic analyzer These chapters are organized in subsystems with each subsystem representing a front panel menu The commands explained in this part give you access to common commands instrument commands system level commands disk commands intermodule measurement and module level commands This part is designed to provide a concise description of each command Part 3 Part 3 chapters 14 through 27 explains each command in the subsystem command set for the logic analyzer Chapter 27 contains information on the SYSTem DATA and SYSTem SETup commands for the logic analyzer iv The commands explained in this part give you access to all the commands used to operate the logic analyzer portion of the Agilent 1670 series system This part is designed to provide a concise description of each command Part 4 Part 4 chapters 28 through 36 explain each command in the subsystem command set for the oscilloscope The information covered in Part 4 is only relevant to models containing an oscilloscope The commands explained in this part give you access to all the commands used to operate the oscilloscope This part is designed to provide a concise
134. 0 not used a string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST OV ERlay 25 1 MACHIN E2 DATA REMove MACHine 1 2 SLISt REMove The REMove command removes all labels except the leftmost label from the listing menu OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST REMOVE 17 15 Command lt run_until_ spec gt lt value gt Example Query Returned Format Example SLISt Subsystem RUNTIl Run Until RUNTil Run Until MACHine 1 2 SLISt RUNTil lt run until spec gt The RUNTil command allows you to define a stop condition when the trace mode is repetitive Specifying OFF causes the analyzer to make runs until either STOP is selected from the front panel or the STOP command is issued There are four conditions based on the time between the X and O markers Using this difference in the condition is effective only when time tags have been turned on see the TAG command in the STRace subsystem These four conditions are as follows e The difference is less than LT some value e The difference is greater than GT some value e The difference is inside some range INRange e The difference is outside some range OUTRange End points for the INRange and OUTRange should be at least 8 ns apart since this is the minimum time resolution of the time tag counter OFF LT lt value gt GT lt value gt INRange lt value gt
135. 0 to 255 39 3 Command Query Command Syntax lt column number gt lt label name gt Example Query Syntax Returned Format Example SEQuence Subsystem COLumn COLumn The COLumn command allows you to reorder the labels in the Sequence and Macro menus and set the numerical base for each label Label order in the Format menu is not changed when the COLUMN command is used The first parameter ofthe command specifies the column number followed by a label name and an optional number base If anumber base is not specified the current number base for the label is used The instruction field leftmost column on screen cannot be moved The query must include a column number and returns the label in that column and its base SEQuence COLumn lt column number gt lt label name gt BINary OCTal DECimal HEXadecimal JASCii SYMBol TWOS an integer specifying the column that is to receive the new label a string of up to six alphanumeric characters specifying the label name that is to be moved OUTPUT XXX SEQ COL 1 A HEX SEQuence COLumn lt column number gt SEQuence COLUMN lt column number gt lt label name gt BINary OCTal DECimal HEXadecimal ASC SYMBol TWOS 10 DIM Co 100 20 OUTPUT XXX SEQ COL 1 30 ENTER XXX CoS 40 PRINT Cos 50 END 39 4 SEQu
136. 0G is installed OU OU I Select th PUL TOT ss PUT 707 SYSTEM HEADER OFF ELECT 1 LAK KKKK KK KK KK KK co FIGURE THE Ss ATE ANALYZER KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK I OU OU OU I I OU OU I Name Machine 1 STATE configure Machine 1 as a state analyzer in Compare mode and assign pod 1 to Machine 1 PUT 707 MACHINE1 NAME STATE PUT 707 MACHINE1 TYPE COMPARE PUT 707 MACHINE1 ASSIGN 1 KHAKKKKKXKKKKKKKAK KK KK KKK KKK KK KK IH KH ARA FH AH KH A ARA AAA AAA AAA FH A AK AK AAA AAA Remove all labels previously set up make a label SCOUNT specify positive logic and assign the lower 8 bits of pod 1 to the label PUT 707 MACHINEIl SFORMAT REMOVE ALL PUT 707 MACHINE1 SFORMAT LABEL SCOUNT POS 0 0 255 ER RR Make the gr clock the Master clock and specify the falling edge OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 SFORMAT MASTER J FALLING KHAKKKKKXKKKKKKKAK KK KKK KKK AA ARA KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA Specify two sequence levels the trigger sequence level specify FF hex for the a term which will be the trigger term and store 43 9 Programming Examples Making a State Compare Measurement
137. 1 3 5 0 5 ns 2 3 0 1 0 ns 3 2 5 1 5 ns 4 2 0 2 0 ns 5 1 5 2 5 ns 6 1 0 3 0 ns 7 0 5 3 5 ns 8 0 0 4 0 ns N A Multiple Clocks 0 4 5 0 0 ns 1 4 0 0 5 ns 2 3 5 1 0 ns 3 3 0 1 5 ns 4 2 5 2 0 ns 5 2 0 2 5 ns 6 1 5 3 0 ns 7 1 0 3 5 ns 8 0 5 4 0 ns 9 0 0 4 5 ns ETHOLD lt pod_num gt The SETHold query returns the current setup and hold settings MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SETHold lt pod_num gt lt setup_and_hold_string gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT SETHOLD 3 15 13 Command lt clock_id gt lt clock_spec gt Example Query Returned Format Example SFORmat Subsystem SLAVe SLAVe MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SLAVe lt clock_id gt lt clock_spec gt The SLAVe clock command allows you to specify a slave clock for a given machine The slave clock is only used in the Slave and Demultiplexed clocking modes Each command deals with only one clock J K L M therefore a complete clock specification requires four commands one for each clock Edge specifications RISing FALLing or BOTH are ORed When slave clock is being used at least one edge must be specified JIKILIM OFF RISing FALLing BOTH OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT SLAVE J RISING MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SLAVe lt clock_id gt The SLAVe query returns the clock specification for the specified clock MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SLAVe lt clock_id
138. 1 2 SFORmat CLOCk lt N gt The CLOCK query returns the current clocking mode for a given pod MACHine 1 2 SFORmat CLOCK lt N gt lt clock_mode gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SFORMAT CLOCK2 LABel MACHine 1 2 SFORmat LABel lt name gt lt polarity gt lt clock_bits gt lt clock_bits gt lt upper_bits gt lt lower_bits gt lt upper_bits gt lt lower_bits gt The LABel command allows you to specify polarity and assign channels to new or existing labels If the specified label name does not match an existing label name a new label will be created The order of the pod specification parameters is significant The first one listed will match the highest numbered pod assigned to the machine you re using Each pod specification after that is assigned to the next highest numbered pod This way they match the left to right descending order of the pods you see on the Format display Not including enough pod specifications results in the lowest numbered pod s being assigned a value of zero all channels excluded If you include more pod specifications than there are pods for that machine the extra ones will be ignored However an error is reported anytime when more than 22 pod specifications are listed The polarity can be specified at any point after the label name Because pods contain 16 channels the format value for a pod must be between 0 and 65535 216 1 When giving the pod assignment in
139. 1032192 22 5 lt qualifier gt lt expression gt lt expressionla gt lt expressionla_ term gt lt expressionlb gt lt expressionlb_ term gt lt expression2a gt lt expression2b gt TTRigger TTRace Subsystem Qualifier Qualifier The qualifier for the timing trigger subsystem can be terms A through G and I Timer 1 and 2 and Range 1 and 2 In addition qualifiers can be the NOT boolean function of terms timers and ranges The qualifier can also be an expression or combination of expressions as shown below and figure 22 2 Complex Qualifier on page 22 11 The following parameters show how qualifiers are specified in all commands of the TTRigger subsystem that use lt qualifier gt ANYSTATE NOSTATE lt expression gt lt expressionla gt lt expressionlb gt lt expressionla gt OR lt expressionlb gt lt expressionla gt AND lt expressionlb gt lt expressionla_term gt lt expressionla_term gt OR lt expressionla_term gt lt expressionla_term gt AND lt expressionla_term gt lt expression2a gt lt expression2b gt lt expression2c gt lt expressionlb_term gt lt expressionlb_term gt OR lt expressionlb_term gt lt expressionlb_term gt AND lt expressionlb_term gt lt expressio lt expressio lt expressio lt expressio lt expressio n2c gt n2d gt n2e gt n2f gt n2g gt lt
140. 11 SYSTem Subsystem SETup Query SYStem SETup The SYStem SETup query returns a block of data that contains the current configuration to the controller Returned Format SYStem SETup lt block_data gt lt NL gt Example See Transferring the logic analyzer configuration in chapter 28 Programming Examples for an example 11 12 12 MMEMory Subsystem Introduction The MMEMory mass memory subsystem commands provide access to the disk drives The Agilent 1670G series logic analyzers support both LIF Logical Information Format and DOS Disk Operating System formats The Agilent 1670G series logic analyzers have two disk drives a hard disk drive and a flexible disk drive Refer to figure 12 1 and table 12 1 for the MMEMory Subsystem commands syntax diagram and parameter values The MMEMory subsystem commands are e AUToload e CATalog e CD Change Directory e COPY e DOWNload e INITialize e LOAD e MKDir Make Directory e MSI e PACK e PURGe e PWD Present Working Directory e REName e STORe e UPLoad e VOLume MMEMory Subsystem Figure 12 1 e MMEMory oe auTaload gt space gt MSUS AUToload gt CATalog gt ALL 4 Be msus space ei msus COPY gt space m name u msus E q A path name Le gt msus
141. 16 gt A 24 3 TLISt Subsystem Figure 24 1 continued Y e asearch Ja space pe occurrence wm TRiGger STARt XMARker gt OSEarch OSTate vl OTAG om space j time value OTAG iR REMove RUNTI Je space H r run until spec RUNTIL TAVerage TMAXimum TMINimum IT TLISt Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued 16555517 gt 24 4 TLISt Subsystem Figure 24 1 continued Y VRUNs gt XCONaition space ENTering EXITing XCONdition gt XP Ttern Da space label_name gt gt label_pattern gt XPATtern je space Hr label name gt Le xSEarch m space H r occurrence nae TRisger gt pe XSEarch gt xT AG space gt time value gt 16555518 TLISt Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued 24 5 Table 24 1 TLISt Subsystem TLISt Parameter Values Parameter mod_num col_num line_number label_name base line_num_mid_screen label_pattern occurrence time_value run_until_spec value Value 1 2through 10 not used integer from 1 to 61 integer from 1032192 to 1032192 a string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters BINary
142. 16 11 8 gram LABel 25 17 gram OTHer 25 18 gram QUALifier 25 19 gram RANGe 25 20 gram TTYPe 25 21 ITialize 12 13 Sert 14 6 18 8 23 11 15 7 21 6 LEVelarm 13 7 LINE LOAD LOAD 14 7 17 9 20 8 24 9 CONFig 12 14 IASSembler 12 15 LOCKout 3 11 9 12 LONGform 1 16 11 9 MAST MESE MLE 25 12 Modu MSI 1 MACHine 10 6 13 4 er 15 9 MENU 9 12 20 9 9 14 gt MKDir 12 16 gth 16 14 18 8 22 15 23 12 MMODe 17 10 23 13 24 10 MODE 25 7 e Level 10 2 2 17 AME 13 8 OCO OPATtern 17 11 23 14 24 12 OSEarch 17 12 23 15 24 13 OTAG dition 23 13 24 11 17 14 24 14 OTIMe 14 8 23 16 Index 1 Index OVERView HIGH 25 9 OVERView LABel 25 10 OVERView LOW 25 11 OVERView OMARker 25 13 OVERView XMARker 25 15 PACK 12 18 PATTern 26 6 PRINt 11 10 PURGe 12 18 RANGe 14 8 16 15 18 9 20 9 22 16 23 17 26 7 REMove 14 9 15 12 17 15 18 10 23 17 24 15 26 8 ame 12 19 13 8 Source 13 9 ODe 9 18 UNTIl 17 16 20 10 23 18 24 15 Hart 19 4 Lect 9 19 Quence 16 16 22 17 Pr 20 12 TColor 9 21 ETup 11 11 27 12 FORmat 15 6 LAVe 15 14 LISt 17 7 PERiod 22 18 23 19 STARt 9 22 STOP 9 22 STORe 16 17 STORe CONFig 12 20 SWAVeform 18 4 SYMBol 26 5 SYStem DATA 11 5 27 2 27 SYStem SETup 11 11 27 2 27 12 TAG 16 18 TAKenbranch 16 19 18 10 TCONtrol 16 20 22 19
143. 171X H 0 1 213 14 5 1617 8 9 A B C D E F X Ol1 2 3 4 5 6 7 819 ET OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST XPATTERN DATA 255 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST XPATTERN ABC BXXXX1101 MACHine 1 2 SLISt XPATtern lt label_name gt The XPATtern query returns the pattern specification for a given label name MACHine 1 2 SLISt XPATtern lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST XPATTERN A 17 20 Command lt occurrence gt lt origin gt Example Query Returned Format Example Query Returned Format lt state_num gt SLISt Subsystem XSEarch XSEarch MACHine 1 2 SLISt XSEarch lt occurrence gt lt origin gt The XSEarch command defines the search criteria for the X marker which is then used with the associated XPATtern recognizer specification when moving the markers on patterns The origin parameter tells the marker to begin a search with the trigger or with the start of data The occurrence parameter determines which occurrence of the XPATtern recognizer specification relative to the origin the marker actually searches for An occurrence of 0 places a marker on the selected origin integer from 1032192 to 1032192 TRIGger STARt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST XSEARCH 10 TRIGGER MACHine 1 2 SLISt XSEarch The
144. 18 1 18 3 18 4 18 5 18 6 18 7 18 8 18 9 18 10 18 11 SYMBol selector 26 5 SYMBol Subsystem 26 1 26 3 26 4 26 5 26 6 26 7 26 8 Syntax diagram Common commands 8 4 COMPare Subsystem 20 3 MACHine Subsystem 13 3 Mainframe commands 9 3 9 4 MMEMory subsystem 12 3 12 4 12 6 SCHart Subsystem 19 3 Index 5 Index SFORmat Subsystem 15 3 SLISt Subsystem 17 3 STRigger Subsystem 16 3 16 4 16 5 SWAVeform Subsystem 18 3 SYMBol Subsystem 26 3 TFORmat Subsystem 21 3 TLISt Subsystem 24 3 TTRigger Subsystem 22 3 TWAVeform Subsystem 23 3 23 4 WLISt Subsystem 14 3 Syntax diagrams IEEE 488 2 5 5 System commands 4 6 SYSTem subsystem 11 2 SYSTem DATA 27 4 27 5 SYStem SETup 27 12 27 13 SYSTem SETup command program example 28 14 SYSTem SETup query program example 28 14 T TAG command query 16 18 TAKenbranch command query 16 19 18 10 TAVerage query 17 17 23 19 24 16 TCONtrol command query 16 20 22 19 TERM command query 16 21 22 20 Terminator 1 7 TFORmat selector 21 4 TFORmat Subsystem 21 1 21 3 21 4 21 5 21 6 21 7 21 8 Three wire Interface 3 4 THReshold command query 15 16 15 17 21 8 time tag data description 27 12 TIMER command query 16 22 22 21 timing analyzer program example 28 3 TINTerval AUTorange command 25 22 TINTerval QUALifier command query 25 22 TINTerval TINTerval command query 25 24 TINTerval TSTatistic query 25 25 TLISt selec
145. 2 SWAVeform CENTer lt marker_type gt The CENTer command allows you to center the waveform display about the specified markers The markers are placed on the waveform in the SLISt subsystem X O XO TRIGger OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SWAVEFORM CENTER X CLRPattern MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform CLRPattern X O ALL The CLRPattern command allows you to clear the patterns in the selected Specify Patterns menu OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SWAVEFORM CLRPATTERN 18 6 Command Example Command lt number_of_ samples gt Example Query Returned Format Example SWAVeform Subsystem CLRStat CLRStat MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform CLRStat The CLRStat command allows you to clear the waveform statistics without having to stop and restart the acquisition OUTPUT XXX MACHIN El SWAV EFORM CLRSTAT DELay MACHine 1 2 SwWAVeform D ELay lt number_of_samples gt The DELay command allows you to specify the number of samples between the State trigger and the horizontal center of the screen for the waveform display The allowed number of samples is from 1032192 to 1032192 integer from 1032192 to 1032192 OUTPUT XXX MACHIN MACHine 1 2 SWAVeform D E2 SWAV EFORM D ELAY 127 ELay The DELay query returns the current sample offset value MACHine 1 2 SWAVe OUTPUT XXX MACHIN form DELay
146. 2 0V EN ER XXX String PRI END T String ERView OVSTatistic OHITs 25 14 SPA Subsystem OVERView XMARker OVERView XMARker Command SPA 1 2 OVERView XMARker lt x_pattern gt The OVERView XMARker command sends the X marker to the lower boundary of the bucket where the specified pattern is located A request to place the marker outside the defined boundary forces the marker to the appropriate end bucket A query returns the pattern associated with the lower end of the bucket where the marker is placed lt x_pattern gt B 0 1 0 0 1112131415 617 H O LIZ 3 4 516171819 AIBICIDIE F 10 11 2 314 15 1617 819 3 Example OUTPUT XXX SPA2 OVERView XMARker H3C31 Query SPA 1 2 OVERView XMARke r Returned Format SPA 1 2 OVERView XMARker lt x_pattern gt lt NL gt Example 10 DIM String 100 20 OUTPUT XXX SELECT 1 30 OUTPUT XXX SPA2 OVERView XMARker 40 ENTER XXX Strings 50 PRINT String 60 END 25 15 Query Returned Format lt range_number gt lt number_hits gt Example SPA Subsystem HISTogram HSTatistic HISTogram HSTatistic SPA 1 2 HISTogram HSTatistic TOTal OTHer lt range_number gt The HISTogram HSTatistic query returns the total number of samples or returns the number of samples in the specified range Specify TOTal for the tot
147. 20 ENTER XXX Tst_value Bits Returned by TST Query Power Up Test Results Bit Position Bit Weight Test 8 256 Flexible Disk Test 7 128 Hard Disk Test 6 64 not used 5 32 not used 4 16 PS2 Controller Test 3 8 Display Test 2 4 Interrupt Test 1 2 RAM Test 0 1 ROM Test Command Example Common Commands WAI Wait WAI Wait WAI The WAI command causes the device to wait until completing all of the overlapped commands before executing any further commands or queries An overlapped command is a command that allows execution of subsequent commands while the device operations initiated by the overlapped command are still in progress Some examples of overlapped commands for the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer are STARt and STOP OUTPUT XXX WAI Instrument Commands Introduction Instrument commands control the basic operation of the instrument for the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzers The Agilent 1670G series logic analyzers are similar to an 16500 logic analysis system with a single logic analyzer module Agilent 1670G This chapter contains instrument commands with a syntax example for each command Each syntax example contains parameters for the Agilent 1670 series only Refer to figure 9 1 and table 9 1 for the syntax diagram and parameter values of the commands The instrument commands are e BEEPer e MESE e CAPability e MESR e CARDcage e RMO
148. 4 MODE 34 5 RANGe 34 6 Contents 13 35 36 Part 5 37 Contents TRIGger Subsystem CONDition 35 5 DELay 35 7 LEVel 35 8 LOGic 35 10 MODE 35 11 PATH 35 12 SLOPe 35 12 SOURce 35 13 WAVeform Subsystem Format for Data Transfer 36 3 Data Conversion 36 5 COUNt 36 8 DATA 36 8 FORMat 36 9 POINts 36 9 PREamble 36 10 RECord 36 11 SOURce 36 11 SPERiod 36 12 TYPE 36 12 VALid 36 13 XINCrement 36 13 XORigin 36 14 XREFerence 36 14 YINCrement 36 15 YORigin 36 15 YREFerence 36 16 Pattern Generator Commands Programming the Pattern Generator Programming Overview 37 3 Contents 14 38 39 40 Contents Example Pattern Generator Program 37 3 Selecting the Pattern Generator 37 4 Command Set Organization 37 5 Pattern Generator Level Commands 37 7 STEP 37 8 RESume 37 10 FORMat Subsystem FORMat Subsystem 38 2 CLOCk 38 3 DELay 38 4 LABel 38 5 MODe 38 7 REMove 38 8 SEQuence Subsystem SEQuence Subsystem 39 2 COLumn 39 4 EPATtern 39 5 INSert 39 7 PROGram 39 10 REMove 39 14 MACRo Subsystem MACRo Subsystem 40 2 INSert 40 5 NAME 40 8 PARameter 40 9 PROGram 40 10 REMove 40 13 Contents 15 41 42 Part 6 43 Contents SYMBol Subsystem SYMBol Subsystem 41 2 BASE 41 4 PATTern 41 5 RANGe 41 6 REMove 41 7 WIDTh 41 8 DATA and SETup Commands Data and Setup Commands 42 2 SYSTem DATA 42 4 SYSTem SETup 42 5 Programming Examples Programmin
149. 4 mV 100 mV div 16 mV 400 mV 2 V gt 100 mV 400 mV div gt 400 mV 1 6V 10V gt 400 mV 2 5 V div gt 1 6V 10V 50 V gt 2 5 V 10 V div gt 10V 40V 250 V probe_arg an integer from 1 through 1000 range_arg a real number from 16 mV to 40 V specifying vertical sensitivity COUPling Command CHANnel lt N gt COUPling DC AC DCFifty The COUPling command sets the input impedance for the selected channel The choices are 1MQ DC DC 1MQ AC AC or 50 Q DC DCFifty lt N gt 112 Example OUTPUT XXX CHANNEL1 COUPLING DC 30 4 Query Returned Format Example Command lt N gt Example CHANnel Subsystem ECL CHANnel lt N gt COUPling The COUPling query returns the current input impedance for the specified channel CHANnel lt N gt COUPling DC AC DCFifty lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX CHANNEL1 COUPLING ECL CHANnel lt N gt ECL The ECL command sets the vertical range offset and trigger levels for the selected input channel for optimum viewing of ECL signals ECL values are Range 2 0 V 500 mV per division Offset 1 3 V Trigger level 1 3 V 112 OUTPUT XXX CHANNELI1 ECL To return to Preset User change the CHANnel RANGe CHANnel OFFSet or TRIGger LEVel value 30 5 Command lt N gt lt value gt Example Query Returned Format Example CHANnel Subsystem OFFSet OFFSet CHANnel lt
150. 8124 Serial Poll The Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer supports the IEEE 488 1 serial poll feature When a serial poll of the instrument is requested the RQS bit is returned on bit 6 of the status byte Status Reporting Serial Poll Using Serial Poll GPIB This example will show how to use the service request by conducting a serial poll of all instruments on the GPIB bus In this example assume that there are two instruments on the bus a logic analyzer at address 7 and a printer at address 1 The HP BASIC 6 2 program command for serial poll is Stat SPOLL 707 The address 707 is the address of the logic analyzer in the this example The command for checking the printer is Stat SPOLL 701 because the address of that instrument is 01 on bus address 7 This command reads the contents of the GPIB Status Register into the variable called Stat At that time bit 6 of the variable Stat can be tested to see if it is set bit 6 1 The serial poll operation can be conducted in the following manner 1 Enable interrupts on the bus This allows the controller to see the SRQ line 2 Disable interrupts on the bus 3 Ifthe SRQ line is high some instrument is requesting service then check the instrument at address 1 to see if bit 6 of its status register is high 4 To check whether bit 6 of an instruments status register is high use the following BASIC statement IF BIT Stat 6 THEN 5 If bit 6 of the instrument at address
151. ACHINE1 SLIST OSTATE 17 13 Command lt time_value gt lt state_value gt Example Query Returned Format Example SLISt Subsystem OTAG OTAG MACHine 1 2 SLISt OTAG lt time_value gt lt state_value gt The OTAG command specifies the tag value on which the O Marker should be placed The tag value is time when time tagging is on or states when state tagging is on Ifthe data is not valid tagged data no action is performed real number real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST OTAG 40 0E 6 MACHine 1 2 SLISt OTAG The OTAG query returns the O Marker position in time when time tagging is on or in states when state tagging is on regardless of whether the marker was positioned in time or through a pattern search If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 for time tagging or returns 2147483647 for state tagging MACHine 1 2 SLISt OTAG lt time_value gt lt state_value gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST OTAG 17 14 Command lt col_num gt lt module_num gt lt label_name gt Example Command Example SLISt Subsystem OVERlay OVERlay MACHine 1 2 SLISt OVERlay lt col_num gt lt module_num gt MACHine 1 2 lt label_name gt The OVERlay command allows you to add time correlated labels from the other analyzer to the state listing integer from 1 to 61 1 2 through 1
152. AJ 07 MACHIN kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxx xx k E Mr RIGGER FIND1 A 1 CONFIGURE SEQUE CE LEVEL 2 KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK Store RANGE1 in level 2 and Then find resource term E once PU sal 07 MACHINI RIGGER STORE2 IN_RANGE1 PU AJ 07 MACHIN kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkkkxx xx k RIGGER FIND2 E 1 CONFIGURE SEQUE CE LEVEL 3 KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK Store NOSTATE in level 3 and Then find term B once PU AJ 07 MACHIN El pb RIGGER STORE3 NOSTATE PU AJ 07 MACHINI KKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KK E H RIGGER FIND3 B 1 CONFIGURE SEQUE CE LEVEL 4 KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK Store a combination of resource terms C or D or RANGE1 in level 4 and Then Trigger on r source term E TPUT 707 MACHIN El STRIGGER STORE4 C OR D OR IN_RANGE1 43 6 78 79 80 8l 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 O UU Y S SEP 2 2 E II EEE O O EA E O OY oO 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 1180 1190 1200 1210 1220 1230 I I OU OU I OU OU OU I KEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK NOTE KKKKK The FIND
153. CHine 1 2 TLISt TMAXimum lt time_value gt lt NL gt real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST TMAXIMUM 24 16 Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example Query Returned Format lt valid_runs gt lt total_runs gt Example TLISt Subsystem TMINimum TMINimum MACHine 1 2 TLISt TMINimum The TMINimum query returns the value of the minimum time between the X and O markers If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 MACHine 1 2 TLISt TMINimum lt time_value gt lt NL gt real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST TMINIMUM VRUNs MACHine 1 2 TLISt VRUNs The VRUNs query returns the number of valid runs and total number of runs made Valid runs are those where the pattern search for both the X and O markers was successful resulting in valid delta time measurements MACHine 1 2 TLISt VRUNs lt valid_runs gt lt total_runs gt lt NL gt zero or positive integer zero or positive integer OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST VRUNS 24 17 Command Example Query Returned Format Example Query Returned Format lt XO_time gt Example TLISt Subsystem XCONdition XCONdition MACHine 1 2 TLISt XCONdition ENTering EXITing The XCONdition command specifies where the X marker is placed The X marker can be placed on the entry or exit point of the XPATtern when in the
154. Commands 13 MACHine Subsystem Introduction The MACHine subsystem contains the commands that control the machine level of operation of the logic analyzer The functions of five of these commands reside in the State Timing Configuration menu These commands are e ARM e ASSign e LEVelarm e NAME e TYPE Even though the functions of the following commands reside in the Trigger menu they are at the machine level of the command tree and are therefore located in the MACHine subsystem These commands are e REName e RESource MACHine Subsystem Figure 13 1 a Y MACHine ARM space ms arm source gt space pod list gt m ASSIGN gt gt LEvelarm m space m arm level gt m LEVelarm gt space gt machine name gt u gt RENane J space gt e nen_text REName Ja space m res id gt e RESource gt gt space m res terms gt RESource TYPE space TYPE COMPare E MACHine Subsystem Syntax Diagram 16555502 13 3 Table 13 1 Selector lt N gt Example MACHine Subsystem MACHine MACHine Subsystem Parameter Values Parameter arm_source pod_list pod_num arm_level machine_name res_id new_text state_terms res_terms
155. D OR F OR G 1 XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER BRANCH1 F OR C AND D OR G 1 Example OUTPU OUTPU OUTPU lt N gt lt to_level_ number gt lt number_of_ qu levels gt lt branch_ alifier gt Example integer from 1 to lt number_of_levels gt integer from 1 to lt number_of_levels gt integer from 1 to the number of existing sequence levels maximum 10 lt qualifier gt see Qualifier on page 22 6 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER BRANCH1 ANYSTATE 3 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TTRIGGER BRANCH2 A 7 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER BRANCH3 A OR B OR NOTG da 22 10 Query Returned Format Example Figure 22 2 TTRigger TTRace Subsystem BRANch MACHine 1 2 TTRigger BRANch lt N gt The BRANch query returns the current branch qualifier specification for a given sequence level MACHine 1 2 TTRigger BRANch lt N gt lt branch_qualifier gt lt to_level_num gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINI E1 TTRIGG ER BRANCH3 q a c in_rangel a b f g Current Qualifier Example Complex Qualifier Figure 22 2 is a front panel representation of the complex qualifier a Or b Or f Or g This example would be used to specify this complex qualifier OUTPUT XXX MACHINI G y 2 E1 TTRIGG ER BRANCH1 A O
156. De e CESE e RTC e CESR e SELect e EOI e SETColor e LER e STARt e LOCKout e STOP e MENU e XWINdow Instrument Commands Figure 9 1 r O gt gt OA W spoce OFF ia BEEPer Ha CAPabil ity gt Mes CARDeoge gt CESE gt space wm value E RED E01 space wm OFF 8 gt e EOI gt LER gt LOCKout gt space gt oFF 10 gt gt LOCKout gt Y 4 Mainframe Commands Syntax Diagram 9 3 Instrument Commands Figure 9 1 continued A ENU space gt module 3 MENU e ESE index gt space m enable value u ESE wm index gt MESR gt index gt RMODe space SINGle REPetitive RTC gt space gt day month gt year gt hour N on minute ee second RTC SELect space module H r SELect SETColor sat lum NAA Y space color D gt hue SETColor space color display name Mainframe Commands Syntax Diagram continued 16500523
157. EQUENCE START and END and some instructions can have parameters modified but the instruction type cannot be changed REPeat can have the repeat count changed but it cannot be changed to a NOOP The second parameter is an optional label name The label name allows any data values specified in the command to be assigned starting with the label name rather than defaulting to the first label This is useful when modifying only a portion of the data for a sequence line You cannot specify more than 16 labels per PROGram command Use the optional label parameter if the line you want to modify has more than 16 labels The third parameter is the instruction The options for this parameter are described below The fourth parameter is an optional instruction argument This parameter will only appear when required by a specific instruction as described below The last parameter s are the data assignments for this line These assignments are normally made one per label starting with the left most column in the display Note that some instructions cannot be modified To change the instruction type in these cases it is necessary to first REMove the line s and INSert new lines s The query returns the current contents instruction and data for the specified line number 39 10 SEQuence Subsystem PROGram Instructions NOOP The NOOP instruction means there is no instruction for this line BREak The BREak instruction causes the ex
158. Example Query Returned Format Example TTRigger TTRace Subsystem TCONtrol Timer Control TCONtrol Timer Control MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TCONtrol lt N gt lt timer_num gt OFF STARt PAUSe CONTinue The TCONtrol command turns off starts pauses or continues the timer for the specified level The time value of the timer is defined by the TIMER command integer from 1 to the number of existing sequence levels maximum 10 112 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TTRIGGER TCONTROL6 1 PAUSE MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TCONTROL lt N gt lt timer_num gt The TCONtrol query returns the current TCONtrol setting of the specified level MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TCONTROL lt N gt lt timer_num gt OFF STARt PAUSe CONTinue lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TTRIGGER TCONTROL6 1 22 19 Command lt term_id gt lt label_name gt lt pattern gt Example TTRigger TTRace Subsystem TERM TERM MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TERM lt term_id gt lt label_name gt lt pattern gt The TERM command specifies a pattern recognizer term in the specified machine Each command deals with only one label in the given term therefore a complete specification could require several commands Since a label can contain 32 or less bits the range of the pattern value will be between 2 1 and 0 When the value of a pattern is expressed in binary it represents the bit
159. Ge The RANGe query returns the current full screen time Returned Format WLISt RANGe lt time_value gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX WLIST RANGE REMove Command WLISt REMove The REMove command deletes all waveforms from the display Example OUTPUT XXX WLIST REMOVE XOTime Query WLISt XOTime The XOTime query returns the time from the X marker to the O marker If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 Returned Format WLISt XOTime lt time_value gt lt NL gt lt time_value gt real number Example OUTPUT XXX WLIST XOTIME 14 9 Query Returned Format lt state_num gt Example Command lt time_value gt Example Query Returned Format Example WLISt Subsystem XSTate XSTate WLISt XSTate The XSTate query returns the state where the X Marker is positioned If data is not valid the query returns 2147483647 WLISt XSTate lt state_num gt lt NL gt integer OUTPUT XXX WLIST XxSTATE XTIMe WLISt XTIMe lt time_value gt The XTIMe command positions the X Marker on the timing waveforms in the mixed mode display If the data is not valid the command performs no action real number OUTPUT XXX WLIST XTIME 40 0E 6 WLISt XTIMe The XTIMe query returns the X Marker position in time If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37
160. HINE1 TTRIGGER RANGE1 SEQuence MACHine 1 2 TTRigger SEQuence lt number_of_levels gt The SEQuence command defines the timing analyzer trace sequence First it deletes the current trace sequence Then it inserts the number of levels specified with default settings The number of levels can be between 1 and 10 when the analyzer is armed by the RUN key integer from 1 to 10 always equal to the last level number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER SEQUENCE 4 22 17 TTRigger TTRace Subsystem SPERiod Query MACHine 1 2 TTRigger SEQuence The SEQuence query returns the current sequence specification Returned Format MACHine 1 2 TTRigger SEQuence lt number_of_levels gt lt level_of_trigger gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER SEQUENCE SPERiod Command MACHine 1 2 TTRigger SPERiod lt sample_period gt The SPERiod command sets the sample period of the timing analyzer lt sample_period gt realnumber from Ans to 100us Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER SPERIOD 50E 9 Query MACHine 1 2 TTRigger SPERiod The SPERiod query returns the current sample period Returned Format MACHine 1 2 TTRigger SPERiod lt sample_period gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER SPERIOD 22 18 Command lt N gt lt timer_num gt
161. IMebase MODE AUTO TRIGgered lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX TIMebase MODE 34 5 Command lt range gt Example Query Returned Format Example TIMebase Subsystem RANGe RANGe TIMebase RANGe lt range gt The RANGe command sets the full scale horizontal time in seconds The RANGE value is ten times the value in the s Div field time in seconds OUTPUT XXX TIME BAS EB RANGE 2US TIMebase RANGe The RANGe query returns the current setting TIMebase RANGe SE ange gt lt OUTPUT XXX TIME BAS EB RANGE L gt on 34 6 35 TRIGger Subsystem Introduction The commands of the Trigger Subsystem set all the trigger conditions necessary for generating a trigger for the oscilloscope Many of the commands in the Trigger subsystem may be used in either the EDGE or the PATTern trigger mode Ifa command is a valid command for the chosen trigger mode then that setting will be accepted by the oscilloscope If the command is not valid for the trigger mode an error will be generated None of the commands of this subsystem except Mode are used in conjunction with Immediate trigger mode See Figure 35 1 for the TRIGger Subsystem Syntax Diagram The commands of the TRIGger subsystem are e CONDition e DELay e LEVel e LOGic e MODE e PATH e SLOPe e SOURce This chapter applies only to the os
162. IMer2 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 RESOURCE A C RANGE1 13 9 Query Returned Format Example Command lt analyzer type gt Example Query Returned Format Example MACHine Subsystem TYPE MACHine 1 2 RESOURCE The RESource query returns the current resource terms assigned to the specified analyzer MACHine 1 2 RE OUTPUT XXX MAC SOURCE lt res_id gt lt res_id gt lt NL gt HINE1 RESOURCE ou TYPE MACHine 1 2 TYPE lt analyzer type gt The TYPE command specifies what type a specified analyzer machine will be The analyzer types are state or timing The TYPE command also allows you to turn off a particular machine Only one timing analyzer can be specified at a time OFF STATe TIMing COMPare SPA OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TYPE MACHine 1 2 STATE TYPE The TYPE query returns the current analyzer type for the specified analyzer MACHine 1 2 TYPE OUTPUT XXX MACHI lt ana lyzer type gt lt NL gt El TYPE ou 13 10 14 WLISt Subsystem Introduction The commands in the WLISt Waveforms LISting subsystem control the X and O marker placement on the waveforms portion of the mixed mode display The XSTate and OSTate queries return what states the X and O markers are on Because the markers can only be placed
163. Ie _PoSTstore i gt gt post_value DELay time_val gt TPOSition TTRigger Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued 16555512 22 4 Table 22 1 TTRigger TTRace Subsystem TTRigger Parameter Values Parameter branch_qualifier to_level_num proceed_qualifier occurrence label_name start_pattern stop_pattern num_of_levels timer_num timer_value term_id pattern qualifier post_value time_val duration_time sample_period edge_spec memory_length Value lt qualifier gt integer from 1 to last level lt qualifier gt number from 1 to 1048575 string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters B O 1 2314181617 2 3 7 8 9 A B C D E F 4 Sl a SM ws a D al dd Y ee ES AR 7 8 9 A B C D E F ITESO lt lt EY oouU Poo PRRONRA PO al N Es 2 integer fro 11 23 400 ns to 500 seconds BIC D IE F G I A B O 1 xX 0f0 11 2 13141516 71X HA 0 1 12 3 4 1516 7 8 9 A B C D E F X 0111213451617 1819 3 see Qualifier on page 22 6 2 3 an 2 13 14 SA RET 31415 m 1to 10 integer from 0 to 100 representing percentage real number from 2 x sample_period to 1032192 real number from 8 ns to 5s based on the sample period real number from Ans to Hus string consisting of E F R 4096 8192 16384 32768 65536 131072 262144 524288
164. Ifa pod has fewer rows of valid data than the data array unused rows will contain invalid data that should be ignored Pod positions 7 and 8 will contain invalid data for Agilent 1671G 27 10 Byte Position 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 Byte n DATA and SETup Commands Acquisition Data Description The clock pods contain data mapped according to the clock designator and the board see below Unused clock lines should be ignored pod8 5 pod4 1 Clock Pod 1 lt XXXX MLKJ gt Where x not used 1 byte Not used MSB of clock pod 2 1 byte LSB of clock pod 2 Not Used 1 byte MSB of clock pod 1 1 byte LSB of clock pod 1 1 byte MSB of data pod 4 1 byte LSB of data pod 4 1 byte MSB of data pod 3 1 byte LSB of data pod 3 1 byte MSB of data pod 2 1 byte LSB of data pod 2 1 byte MSB of data pod 1 1 byte LSB of data pod 1 where n 591 bytes per row x maximum number of valid rows 1 27 11 Command DATA and SETup Commands Tag Data Description Tag Data Description If tags are enabled for one or both analyzers the tag data follows the acquisition data The first byte of the tag data is determined as follows 591 bytes per row X maximum number of valid rows Each row of the tag data array consists of one single tags enabled or two both analyzer s tags enabled eight byte tag values per row When both analyzers have tags enabled the first tag v
165. K KK KK KK FADER KKEKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKKKKK KKK KKK SEND THE SE TUP QUERY OUTPUT Comm SYSTEM HEADER ON OUTPUT Comm SYSTEM LONGFORM ON OUTPUT Comm SELECT 1 OUTPUT Comm SYSTEM SETUP 1 kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkkkxxk ENTER THE BLOCK SE TUP H Enter the block setup header in the proper format 1 ENTER Comm USING 15A Header PRINT Header ENTER Comm USING A Always_8 PRINT Always_8 ENTER Comm USING 8A Numbytes PRINT Numbytes umbytes VAL Numbytes 43 14 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 DR DB DB DB ds ds Ba COO WMAATA UO SUN e oo ul DH aaa a a 01 al 0 0 3004 Ww NN Ro DJ HM MI OD OD N YA OB WD NN wo pene JS ses JR a SEE SED ARK ss E SEP HAK o S o E e DS a SEE OS D A SK Es DE SEP E SEP ERE gt BA ss DU cs A e JER EEE E BER Es O e JA ds LU CE ET A EAU I Y N NNNNNN ZO UT ES OD NER Oo 1 kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkkxkx k RANSER HE Transfer the setup from the KKKKKKKKKK R Programming Examples Transferring the Logic Analyzer Configuration SE TUP kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkkxkkkxkkxkxkkkxxkx k logic analyzer to the buffer F E i INITIALIZE TRANSFER BUFFER POINTERS xxxxxxk kk kk kk kk Rk ASSIGN Buff TO BUFFER Numbytes CONTROL Buff 3 1 CONTROL Buff 4 0 TRANSFER Comm TO Buff COUNT Numbytes WAIT Get termination charac
166. KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KH KH KH FH TH AH KH IK TH KH FH TH AH FH TH AH KH IK TH TH FH KH FH KH AH AK IK I A AH A U 500 The logic analyzer is now running in the repetitive mod 510 and will remain in repetitive until the STOP command is sent 520 530 PRINT The logic analyzer is now running in the repetitive mode 540 PRINT and will remain in repetitive until the STOP command is sent 550 PRINT 560 PRINT Press CONTINUE to send the STOP command 570 PAUSE 580 590 LAK KK KK KKK KK KKK KK KK KK KK KKK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK HH KK KK KK KK KKK HH KK KK KK KK KKK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Y JJ ALU S N N Ss ps Y N HP CO OO 00 Y 01 Cy 43 10 76 77 78 79 80 8l 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 26 CA an SAR O Zu DD AES an RS Ze as Zi a SER 6 S R tiv Ze ZI a in ie A ED oO 1010 1020 1030 1040 1041 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1151 1160 1170 1180 Programming Examples Making a State Compare Measurement OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 COMPARE LINE 61439 OUTPUT 707 START The last line of the listing is now displayed at center screen in order to show the last four states acquired In this example the last four states are stable However in some cases the end points of the listing may vary thus causing a false failure in compare To eliminate this problem
167. L gt OUTPUT XXX TRIG MODE PATT PATH CHAN1 LOG 35 10 Command Example Query Returned Format Example TRIGger Subsystem MODE MODE TRIGger MODE EDGE PATTern IMMediate The MODE command allows you to select the trigger mode for the oscilloscope In the IMMediate trigger mode the oscilloscope goes to a freerun mode and does not wait for a trigger Generally the IMMediate mode is used when correlating measurements with the analyzer In EDGE trigger mode the oscilloscope triggers on an edge of a waveform specified by the SOURce DELay LEVel and SLOPe commands Ifa source is not specified then the current source is assumed In PATTern trigger mode the oscilloscope triggers when entering or exiting a specified pattern of the two internal channels and external trigger The pattern is generated using the CONDition DELay LEVel LOGic and PATH commands The CONDition command allows the oscilloscope to trigger when entering the specified pattern or exiting the pattern The DELay value corresponds to the Count field displayed on the TRIGger menu The LOGic command defines the pattern The PATH command is used to change the trigger pattern and level The path consists of two channels OUTPUT XXX TRIGGER MODE PATTERN TRIGger MODE The MODE query returns the current trigger mode selection TRIGger MODE EDGE PATTern IMMediate
168. MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform MMODe lt marker_mode gt lt NL gt OFF PATTern TIME MSTats OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM MMODE OCONdition MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OCONdition ENTering EXITing me The OCONdition command specifies where the O marker is placed The O marker can be placed on the entry or exit point ofthe OPATtern when in the PATTern marker mode OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM OCONDITION ENTERING 23 12 Query Returned Format Example Command lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt Example TWAVeform Subsystem OPATtern MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OCONdition The OCONdition query returns the current setting MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OCONdition ENTering EXITing lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM OCONDITION OPATtern MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OPATtern lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt The OPATtern command constructs a pattern recognizer term for the O marker which is then used with the OSEarch criteria and OCONdition when moving the marker on patterns Since this command deals with only one label at a time a complete specification could require several invocations When the value of a pattern is expressed in binary it represents the bit values for the label inside the pattern recognizer term In whatever base is used the value must be between 0 and 23 1 since
169. MLENgth 22 15 RANGe 22 16 SEQuence 22 17 SPERiod 22 18 TCONtrol Timer Control 22 19 TERM 22 20 TIMER 22 21 TPOSition Trigger Position 22 22 TWAVeform Subsystem TWAVeform 23 7 ACCumulate 23 7 ACQuisition 23 8 CENTer 23 8 CLRPattern 23 9 CLRStat 23 9 DELay 23 9 INSert 23 10 MLENgth 23 11 MMODe Marker Mode 23 12 OCONdition 23 12 OPATtern 23 13 OSEarch 23 14 OTIMe 23 15 RANGe 23 16 REMove 23 16 RUNTIil Run Until 23 17 SPERiod 23 18 TAVerage 23 18 TMAXimum 23 19 TMINimum 23 19 TPOSition 23 19 VRUNs 23 20 XCONdition 23 21 XOTime 23 21 XPATtern 23 22 Contents 9 24 25 Contents XSEarch 23 23 XTIMe 23 24 TLISt Subsystem TLISt 24 7 COLumn 24 7 CLRPattern 24 8 DATA 24 9 LINE 24 9 MMODe Marker Mode 24 10 OCONdition 24 11 OPATtern 24 12 OSEarch 24 13 OSTate 24 14 OTAG 24 14 REMove 24 15 RUNTIil Run Until 24 15 TAVerage 24 16 TMAXimum 24 16 TMINimum 24 17 VRUNs 24 17 XCONdition 24 18 XOTag 24 18 XOTime 24 19 XPATtern 24 19 XSEarch 24 20 XSTate 24 21 XTAG 24 21 SPA Subsystem MODE 25 7 OVERView BUCKet 25 8 OVERView HIGH 25 9 OVERView LABel 25 10 OVERView LOW 25 11 OVERView MLENgth 25 12 Contents 10 Contents OVERView OMARker 25 13 OVERView OVSTatistic 25 14 OVERView XMARker 25 15 HISTogram HSTatistic 25 16 HISTogram LABel 25 17 HISTogram OTHer 25 18 HISTogram QUALifier 25 19 HISTogram RANGe 25 20 HISTogram TTYPe 25 21 TINTerval AUTorange 25 22 TINTerval QUALi
170. MLENgth command specifies the analyzer memory depth Valid memory depths range from 4096 states or samples through the maximum system memory depth minus 8192 states Memory depth is affected by acquisition mode If the lt memory_depth gt value sent with the command is not a legal value the closest legal setting will be used 4096 8192 16384 32768 65536 131072 262144 524288 1032192 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM MLENGTH 262144 MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform MLENgth The MLENgth query returns the current analyzer memory depth selection MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform MLENgth lt memory_length gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM MLENGTH 23 11 Command Example Query Returned Format lt marker_mode gt Example Command Example TWAVeform Subsystem MMODe Marker Mode MMODe Marker Mode MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform MMODe OFF PATTern TIME MSTats The MMODe command selects the mode controlling marker movement and the display of the marker readouts When PATTern is selected the markers will be placed on patterns When TIME is selected the markers move based on time In MSTats the markers are placed on patterns but the readouts will be time statistics OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM MMODE TIME MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform MMODe The MMODe query returns the current marker mode
171. MODe Marker Mode MACHine 1 2 SLISt LINE The LINE query returns the line number for the state currently in the box at the center of the screen MACHine 1 2 SLISt LINE lt line_num_mid_screen gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST LINE MMODe Marker Mode MACHine 1 2 SLISt MMODe lt marker_mode gt The MMODe command selects the mode controlling the marker movement and the display of marker readouts When PATTern is selected the markers will be placed on patterns When STATe is selected and state tagging is on the markers move on qualified states counted between normally stored states When TIME is selected and time tagging is enabled the markers move on time between stored states When MSTats is selected and time tagging is on the markers are placed on patterns but the readouts will be time statistics OFF PATTern STATe TIME MSTats OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST MMODE TIME 17 10 Query Returned Format Example Command lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt Example SLISt Subsystem OPATtern MACHine 1 2 SLISt MMODe The MMODe query returns the current marker mode selected MACHine 1 2 SLISt MMODe lt marker_mode gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST MMODE OPATtern MACHine 1 2 SLISt OPATtern lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt The OPATtern command allows you t
172. NEL2 LEVEL 1 0 35 8 TRIGger Subsystem LEVel Query For EDGE trigger mode TRIGger MODE EDGE SOURce CHANnel lt N gt LEVel For PATTern trigger mode TRIGger MODE PATTern PATH CHANnel lt N gt LEVel The LEVel query returns the trigger level for the current path or source Returned Format TRIGger LEVel lt value gt lt NL gt Example For EDGE trigger mode OUTPUT XXX TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL1 LEVEL For PATTern trigger mode OUTPUT XXX TRIGGER PATH CHANNEL1 LEVEL 35 9 Command lt N gt Example Query Returned Format Example TRIGger Subsystem LOGic LOGic TRIGger MODE PATTern PATH CHANnel lt N gt LOGic HIGH LOW DONTcare The LOGic command sets the logic for each trigger path in the PATTern trigger mode The choices are HIGH LOW and DONTcare The trigger level set by the LEVel command determines logic high and low threshold levels Any voltage higher than the edge trigger level is considered a logic high for that trigger path any voltage lower than the trigger level is considered a logic low for that trigger path 112 OUTPUT XXX TRIG PATH CHAN1 LOG HIGH TRIGger LOGic The LOGic query returns the current logic of the previously selected trigger or path TRIGger LOGic HIGH LOW DONTcare lt N
173. NTer MARKer CENTer TRIGger X O The CENTer command allows you to position the indicated marker TRIGger X or O at the center of the waveform area on the scope display The CENTer command adjusts the timebase delay to cause the trace to be centered around the indicated marker s Div remains unchanged OUTPUT XXX MARKER CENTER X MSTats MARKer MSTats ON 1 OFF O The MSTats command allows you to turn statistics ON or OFF in the auto marker mode When statistics is turned on Min X O Max X O and Mean X O times are displayed on screen When off X O Trig X and Trig O times will be displayed on screen OUTPUT XXX MARKER MSTATS ON MARKer MSTats The MSTats query returns the current setting MARKer MSTats 1 O lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MARKER MSTATS 32 8 Command lt N gt lt type gt lt level gt lt slope gt lt occurrence gt Example Query Returned Format Example MARKer Subsystem OAUTo OAUTo MARKer OAUTo MANual CHANnel lt N gt lt type gt lt level gt lt slope gt lt occurrence gt The OAUTo command specifies the automatic placement specification for the O marker The first parameter specifies if automarker placement is to be in the manual mode or on a specified channel If a channel is specified four other parameters must be included in the command syntax The four parameters are marker type level t
174. ODe command specifies the run mode for the logic analyzer After specifying the run mode use the STARt command to startthe acquisition Example OUTPUT XXX RMODE SINGLE Query RMODe The query returns the current setting Returned Format RMODe SINGle REPetitive lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX RMODE RTC Real time Clock Command RIC lt day gt lt month gt lt year gt lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt DEFault The real time clock command allows you to set the real time clock to the current date and time The DEFault option sets the real time clock to 01 January 1992 12 00 00 24 hour format lt day gt integer from 1 to 31 lt month gt integer from 1 to 12 lt year gt integer from 1990 to 2089 lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt Example Query Returned Format Example Command lt module gt Instrument Commands SELect integer from 0 to 23 integer from 0 to 59 integer from 0 to 59 This example sets the real time clock for 1 January 1992 20 00 00 8 PM OUTPUT XXX RTC 1 1 1992 20 0 0 RTC The RTC query returns the real time clock setting RTC lt day gt lt month gt lt year gt lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt OUTPUT XXX RTC SELect SELect lt module gt The SELect command selects which module or system will have parser control SELect defaults to Sy
175. ONT nue TCONt ro lt N gt TERM gt space H term id Ser label name Lm pattern gt gt labe I_name TERMO pm space H r term id Y STRigger Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued 16550518 16 4 Figure 16 1 continued STRigger STRace Subsystem I Y ar TIMER lt t imer_num gt a space timer_value H TPOSi tion space STARt CENTer END POSTstore post_value TPOS ition STRigger Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued 16550804 16 5 Table 16 1 STRigger STRace Subsystem STRigger Subsystem Parameter Values Parameter branch_qualifier to_lev_num proceed_qualifier occurrence label_name start_pattern stop_pattern num_of_levels lev_of_trig store_qualifier state_tag_qualifier timer_num timer_value term_id pattern qualifier post_value memory_length Value lt qualifier gt integer from 1 to last level lt qualifier gt number from 1 to 1048575 string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters B O 1 0f0 112 13 14 15 16 17 H 0 1 2 3 4 516 8 9 AIBIC D E F Y 0 41516171819 8 9 A B C D E F oou F PRON NNE w w ei al md Q H w Hs ol N AJ 0 ASS TASTEN ss Gee integer from 2 to 12 integer fro
176. OPATtern recognizer specification when moving the markers on patterns The origin parameter tells the marker to begin a search with the trigger the start of data or with the X marker The actual occurrence the marker searches for is determined by the occurrence parameter of the OSEarch recognizer specification relative to the origin An occurrence of 0 places the marker on the selected origin With a negative occurrence the marker searches before the origin With a positive occurrence the marker searches after the origin integer from 1032192 to 1032192 TRIGger STARt XMARke E OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST OS FARCH 10 TRIGG MACHine 1 2 TLISt OSEarch ER The OSEarch query returns the search criteria for the O marker MACHine 1 2 TLISt 0S Farch lt occurrence gt lt origin gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST OS EARCH 24 13 Query Returned Format lt state_num gt Example Command lt time_value gt Example Query Returned Format Example TLISt Subsystem OSTate OSTate MACHine 1 2 TLISt OSTate The OSTate query returns the line number in the listing where the O marker resides If data is not valid the query returns 2147483647 MACHine 1 2 TLISt OSTate lt state_num gt lt NL gt integer from 1032192 to 1032192 or 2147483647 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST OSTATE
177. PATTern marker mode OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XCONDITION ENTERING MACHine 1 2 TLISt XCONdition The XCONdition query returns the current setting MACHine 1 2 TLISt XCONdition ENTering EXITing lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XCONDITION XOTag MACHine 1 2 TLISt XO0Tag The XOTag query returns the time from the X to O markers If there is no data in the time mode the query returns 9 9E37 MACHine 1 2 TLISt XOTag lt XO_time gt lt NL gt real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XOTAG 24 18 Query Returned Format lt XO_time gt Example Command lt name gt lt pattern gt Example TLISt Subsystem XOTime XOTime MACHine 1 2 TLISt XOTime The XOTime query returns the time from the X to O markers If there is no data in the time mode the query returns 9 9E37 MACHine 1 2 TLISt XOTime lt XO_time gt lt NL gt real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XOTIME XPATtern MACHine 1 2 TLISt XPATtern lt name gt lt pattern gt The XPATtern command constructs a pattern recognizer term for the X marker which is then used with the XSEarch criteria when moving the marker on patterns Since this command deals with only one label at a time a complete specification could require several iterations When the value of a pattern is expressed in binary it represents the bit values for th
178. PE The TYPE query returns the last specified type ACQuire TYPE NORMal AVERage lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX ACQUIRE TYPE 29 5 29 6 30 CHANnel Subsystem Introduction The Channel Subsystem commands control the channel display and the vertical axis of the oscilloscope Each channel must be programmed independently for all offset range and probe functions When ECL or TTL commands are executed the vertical range offset and trigger levels are automatically set for optimum viewing Refer to figure 30 1 for the CHANnel Subsystem Syntax Diagram The CHANnel Subsystem commands are e COUPling e ECL e OFFSet e PROBe e RANGe e TTL This chapter applies only to the oscilloscope option 30 2 CHANnel Subsystem Figure 30 1 gt aa COUP na space DC gt J GcHannel J channel_number a xy OFF Set space Ham offset_arg gt PROBE gt space H r probe_arg gt RANGE gt space H r range_arg gt 16532806 CHANnel Subsystem Syntax Diagram 30 3 CHANnel Subsystem COUPling Table 30 1 CHANnel Parameter Values Parameter Value channel_number 11 12 offset_arg a real number defining the voltage atthe center ofthe display The offset range is as follows for a 1 1 probe setting Vertical Sensitivity Vertical Range Offset Voltage
179. R 33 6 MEASure Subsystem PERiod PERiod Query MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt PERiod The PERiod query makes a period measurement of the first complete cycle displayed on the selected channel at the 50 level The measurement is equivalent to the inverse of the frequency If a parameter cannot be measured the instrument responds with 9 9E37 Returned Format MEASure PERiod lt value gt lt NL gt lt N gt 112 lt value gt waveform period in seconds Example OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHANNEL1 PERIOD PREShoot Query MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt PREShoot The PREShoot query makes the preshoot measurement on the selected channel The measurement is made by finding a distortion which precedes the first major transition on screen The result is the ratio of PREshoot to VAMPlitude If a parameter cannot be measured the instrument responds with 9 9537 Returned Format MEASure PREShoot lt value gt lt NL gt lt N gt 112 lt value gt ratio of PREShoot to VAMPlitude Example OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHANNEL2 PRES 33 7 Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example MEASure Subsystem PWIDth PWIDth MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt PWIDth The PWIDth query makes a po
180. R B AND F OR 22 11 Command Example TTRigger TTRace Subsystem CLEar Terms A through E RANGE 1 and EDGE1 must be grouped together and terms F G RANGE 2 and EDGE2 and must be grouped together In the first level terms from one group may not be mixed with terms from the other For example the expression A OR IN_RANGE2 AND C OR G is not allowed because the term C cannot be specified in the F G group In the first level the operators you can use are AND NAND OR NOR XOR NXOR Either AND or OR may be used at the second level to join the two groups together Itis acceptable for a group to consist of a single term Thus an expression like B AND G is legal since the two operands are both simple terms from separate groups CLEar MACHine 1 2 TTRigger CLEar All SEQuence RESource The CLEar command allows you to clear all settings in the Timing Trigger menu and replace them with the default clear only the sequence levels or clear only the resource term patterns OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER CLEAR RESOURCE 22 12 Command lt N gt lt label_name gt lt edge_spec gt Example Query Returned Format Example TTRigger TTRace Subsystem EDGE EDGE MACHine 1 2 TTRigger EDGE lt N gt lt label_name gt lt edge_spec gt The EDGE command defines edge specifications for a given label Edge specifica
181. REPeat instruction allows a group of sequence states to be executed repetitively some number of times The repeat count is specified in the optional instruction argument parameter The REPeat and END LOOP sequence lines cannot be modified other than by changing the loop count MACRo The MACRo instruction is used to invoke a previously defined user macro The macro number is part of the instruction string not the optional instruction argument parameter Ifthe macro has been defined to use passed in parameters those parameter values are passed in via the data value fields If there are on parameters associated with the macro a single dummy parameter must be used 0 There is otherwise no data associated with a macro instruction SEQuence PROGram lt line_number gt lt optional_label gt NOOP IF lt event gt WAIT lt event gt SIGNal REPeat lt count gt BREAK MACRo lt gt lt data_value gt lt data_value gt 39 12 SEQuence Subsystem PROGram lt line_number gt integer where instruction data will be modified lt optional_ a string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters specifying the label where label gt modification begins lt event gt A B C D IF IMB lt count gt integer repeat count lt gt macro number lt data_value gt a string in one of the following forms BOl for binary 001234567 for octal H0123456789ABCDEF for hexadecimal 10123456789 for decimal
182. ROGram command is used to modify an existing pattern generator macro line The first parameter is the line number of the instruction to be modified Note that some lines cannot be modified MACRO and MACRO END and some instructions can have parameters modified The instruction type cannot be changed REPeat can have the repeat count changed but it cannot be changed to a NOOP The second parameter is an optional label name The label name allows any data values specified in the command to be assigned starting with the label name rather than defaulting to the first label This is useful when modifying only a portion of the data for a macro line You can only modify 16 labels per PROGram command To modify more than 16 labels use the optional label name parameter The third parameter is the instruction The options for this parameter are described below The fourth parameter is an optional instruction argument This parameter will only appear when required by a specific instruction as described below The last parameter s are the data assignments for this line These assignments are normally made one per label starting with the left most column in the display In addition to the normal data values parameters passed in with a macro call can be inserted within the body of the macro Specifying more than 16 data assignments will cause a command error Note that some instructions cannot be modified To change the instruction type in th
183. RUNTIl Run Until End points for the INRange and OUTRange should be at least 8 ns apart since this is the minimum time resolution of the time tag counter There are two conditions which are based on a comparison of the acquired state data and the compare dataimage You can run until one ofthe following conditions is true e Every channel of every label has the same value EQUal e Any channel of any label has a different value NEQual The RUNTIl instruction for state analysis is available in both the SLISt and COMPare subsystems real number from 9E9 to 9E9 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE RUNTIL EQUAL MACHine 1 2 COMPare RUNTil The RUNTIl query returns the current stop criteria for the comparison when running in repetitive trace mode MACHine 1 2 COMPare RUNTil OFF LT lt value gt GT lt value gt l INRange lt value gt lt value gt OUTRange lt value gt lt value gt EQUal NEQual lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE RUNTIL 20 11 Command Example COMPare Subsystem SET SET MACHine 1 2 COMPare SET The SET command sets every state in the reference listing to don t cares If you send the SET command by mistake you can immediately send the CLEar command to restore the previous data This is the only time the CLEar command will not replace don t cares with zeros OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE SET
184. RView LABel SPA 1 2 OVI ERView LABel lt label_name gt The OVERView LABel command selects a new label for collecting the SPA measurements A query returns the name of the currently selected label Selecting a new label defaults the State Overview data accumulators statistic counters and the number of buckets and their size string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters OUTPUT XXX SPA2 OVERV SPA 1 2 OVI iew LABel A ERView LABel SPA 1 2 OVERView LABel lt label_name gt lt NL gt 10 20 30 40 50 60 DIM String 10 OU OU PUT XXX S EN ER XXX Stri PRI END NT String PUT XXX SE 0 LECT 1 PA2 OVI ng ERView LABel 25 10 SPA Subsystem OVERView LOW OVERView LOW Command SPA 1 2 OVERView LOW lt low_pattern gt The OVERView LOW command sets the lower boundary of the State Overview measurement A query returns the current setting of the lower boundary Setting the lower boundary defaults the data accumulators statistic counters and the number of buckets and their size lt low_pattern gt B 0 1 0 0 1112131415 617 H 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9JA IB ICIDIEIF 0111213 4 51617 819 Example OUTPUT XXX SPA2 OVERView LOW 723394 OUTPUT XXX SPA1 OVERView LOW 04371 Query SPA 1 2 OVERView LOW Returned Format
185. Sition trigger position command allows you to set the trigger at the start center end or at any position in the trace poststore Poststore is defined as 0 to 100 percent with a poststore of 100 percent being the same as start position and a poststore 0 percent being the same as an end trace integer from 0 to 100 representing percentage of poststore OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TPOSITION END OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TPOSITION POSTstore 75 MACHine 1 2 STRigger TPOSition The TPOSition query returns the current trigger position setting MACHine 1 2 STRigger TPOSition STARt CENTer END POSTstore lt poststore gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TPOSITION 16 23 16 24 17 SLISt Subsystem Introduction The SLISt subsystem contains the commands available for the State Listing menu in the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer These commands are e COLumn e CLRPattern e DATA e LINE e MMODe e OPATtern e OSEarch e OSTate e OTAG e OVERlay e REMove RUNTi TAVerage TMAXimum TMINimum VRUNs XOTag XOTime XPATtern XSEarch XSTate XTAG 17 2 SLISt Subsystem Figure 17 1 SLISt cS COLumn gt space e co l_num i label name gt base H AD mod_num ef MacHine ci E COL um space o col_num gt e CLRPottern x space x DATA gt space o i
186. Subsystem TMINimum TMINimum MACHine 1 2 SLISt TMINimum The TMINimum query returns the value of the minimum time between the X and O markers If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 MACHine 1 2 SLISt TMINimum lt time_value gt lt NL gt real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST TMINIMUM VRUNs MACHine 1 2 SLISt VRUNs The VRUNSs query returns the number of valid runs and total number of runs made Valid runs are those where the pattern search for both the X and O markers was successful resulting in valid delta time measurements MACHine 1 2 SLISt VRUNs lt valid_runs gt lt total_runs gt lt NL gt zero or positive integer zero or positive integer OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST VRUNS 17 18 Query Returned Format lt XO_time gt lt XO_states gt Example Query Returned Format lt XO_time gt lt XO_states gt Example SLISt Subsystem XOTag XOTag MACHine 1 2 SLISt XOTag The XOTag query returns the time from the X to the O marker when marker mode is time or the number of states from the X to the O marker when marker mode is state If there is no data in the time mode the query returns 9 9E37 If there is no data in the state mode the query returns 2147483647 MACHine 1 2 SLISt X0Tag lt XO_time gt lt XO_states gt lt NL gt real number integer OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST XOTAG XOTime
187. T XXX SYSTEM DATA lt block_data gt lt block_length_specifier gt lt section gt 8 lt length gt The total length of all sections in byte format must be represented with 8 digits lt section_header gt lt section_data gt 16 bytes described in the Section Header Description section in chapter 27 DATA and SETup Commands The format depends on the type of data Query Returned Format Example Command lt string gt Example SYSTem Subsystem DSP Display SYSTem DATA The SYSTem DATA query returns the block data The data sent by the SYSTem DATA query reflects the configuration of the machines when the last run was performed Any changes made since then through either front panel operations or programming commands do not affect the stored configuration SYSTem DATA lt block_data gt lt NL gt See chapter 28 Programming Examples for an example of transferring data DSP Display SYSTem DSP lt string gt The DSP command writes the specified quoted string to a device dependent portion of the instrument display This command is useful for labeling screenshots within the picture A string of up to 68 alphanumeric characters OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM DSP The message goes here Query Returned Formats lt error_number gt lt error_string gt Example SYSTem Subsystem ERRor ERRor SYSTem ERRor NUMeric STRing The ERRor
188. TMAXimum TMINimum VRUNs XOTag XOTime XPATtern XSEarch XSTate 01670b01 XTAG Agilent 1670G Series Command Tree 4 8 Figure 4 1 continued Programming and Documentation Conventions Tree Traversal Rules gt X 1 MACHine 112 WLIS SPA 12 DELay ARM INSer MODE OVERView HiSTogram TiNTerval ASSign DET LEVelarm or men OVERView BUCKet HSTatistic AUTorange NAME RANGE HISTogram HIGH LABel QUALifier LES REMove TINTerval LABel OTHer TINTerval REName XOTime LOW QUALifire TSTatistic RESource YSTate QMARker RANGe TYPE XTIMe OVSTalistic TTYPe XMARker TFORmat T TRigger TWAVeform TLISt SYMBol ACQMode ACQuisition ACCumulate COLumn BASE LABel BRANch ACQuisition CLRPattern PATTern REMove CLEar CENTer DATA RANGe THReshold EDGE CLRPattern LINE REMove FIND CLRSta MMODe WIDTH GLEDge DELay OCONdition MLENght INSert OPATtern RANGe MLENgth OSEarch SEQuence MMODe OSTate SPERiod OCONdition OTAG TCONtrol OPATtern REMove TER OSEarch RUNTIL TIMER OTIMe TAVerage TPOSition RANGe TMAXimum REMove TMINimum RUNTI VRUNs SPERiod XCONdition TAVerage xOTag TMAXimum XOTime TMINimum XPATtern TPOSition XSEarch VRUNs XSTate XCONdition XTAG XOTime XPATtern XSEarch 01670b02 XTIMe Agilent 1670G Series Command Tree continued 4 9 Table 4 2 Programming and Documentation Conventions Tree Traversal Rules Alphabetic Command Cross Reference
189. TO MANual CHANnel lt N gt lt type gt lt level gt lt slope gt lt occurrence gt The XAUTo command specifies the automatic placement specification for the X marker The first parameter specifies if automarker placement is to be in the Manual mode or on a specified channel Ifa channel is specified four other parameters must be included in the command syntax The four parameters are marker type level slope and the occurrence count 112 ABSolute PERCent percentage of waveform voltage level ranging from 10 to 90 of the Vtop to Vbase voltage or a voltage level POSitive NEGative integer from 1 to 100 OUTPUT XXX MARKER XAUTO CHANNEL1 ABS 4 75 POSITIVE 5 MARKer XAUTO The XAUTo query returns the current settings MARKer XAUTo MANual CHANnel lt N gt lt type gt lt level gt lt slope gt lt occurrence gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MARKER XAUTO 32 18 Query Returned Format lt time gt Example Command lt X_marker _time gt Example Query Returned Format Example MARKer Subsystem XOTime XOTime MARKer X0Time The XOTime query returns the time in seconds from the X marker to the O marker If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 MARKer XOTime lt time gt lt NL gt real number OUTPUT XXX MARKER XOTIME XTIMe MARKer XTIMe lt X_marker_time gt The XTIMe command moves t
190. Tatistic 25 14 OVERView XMARker 25 15 PRINt 11 10 RANGe 14 9 16 16 18 9 20 10 22 17 23 17 REName 13 9 RESource 13 10 RMODe 9 18 RUNTIl 17 16 20 11 23 18 24 16 SELect 9 20 SEQuence 16 17 22 18 SETColor 9 21 SETup 11 12 27 13 SLAVe 15 14 SPERiod 22 18 23 19 STORe 16 18 SYSTem DATA 11 6 27 5 SYStem SETup 11 12 27 13 TAG 16 19 TAKenbranch 16 19 18 10 TAVerage 17 17 23 19 24 16 TCONtrol 16 20 22 19 TERM 16 22 22 21 THReshold 15 17 21 8 TIMER 16 22 22 21 TINTerval QUALifier 25 22 TINTerval TINTerval 25 24 TINTerval TSTatistic 25 25 TMAXimum 17 17 23 20 24 16 TMINimum 17 18 23 20 24 17 TPOSition 16 23 18 11 22 22 23 21 TYPE 13 10 UPLoad 12 21 VAXis 19 7 VRUNs 17 18 23 21 24 17 XCONdition 23 22 24 18 XOTag 17 19 24 18 XOTime 14 9 17 19 23 22 24 19 XPATtern 17 20 23 23 24 20 XSEarch 17 21 23 24 24 20 XSTate 14 10 17 21 24 21 Index 4 Index XTAG 17 22 24 21 XTIMe 14 10 23 25 Query errors 7 5 query program example 28 18 Query responses 1 15 4 4 Question mark 1 10 QYE 6 5 R RANGe command 26 7 RANGe command query 14 8 16 15 18 9 20 9 22 16 23 17 Receive Data RD 3 4 3 5 Remote 2 5 Remote enable 2 5 REMove command 14 9 15 12 17 15 18 10 21 7 23 17 24 15 26 8 REN 2 5 EName command 12 19 EName command query 13 8 equest To Send RTS 3 5 ESource command query
191. When you read Standard Event Status Register the value returned is the total bit weight of all the bits that are high at the time you read the byte Table 8 3 The Standard Event Status Register Bit Position Bit Weight Bit Name Condition 1 128 PON 0 register read notin power up mode 1 power up 6 64 URQ 0 user request not used always zero 5 32 CME 0 no command errors 1 a command error has been detected 4 16 EXE 0 no execution errors 1 an execution error has been detected 3 8 DDE 0 no device dependent error has been detected 1 a device dependent error has been detected 2 4 QYE 0 no query errors 1 a query error has been detected 1 2 ROC 0 request control not used always zero 0 1 OPC 0 operation is not complete 1 operation is complete Query Returned Format lt revision code gt Example Query Returned Format lt id gt 1 0 Example Common Commands IDN Identification Number IDN Identification Number IDN The IDN query allows the instrument to identify itself It returns the string Agilent 1670G 0 REV lt revision_code gt An IDN query must be the last query in a message Any queries after the IDN in the program message are ignored Agilent 1670G 0 REV lt revision code gt Four digit code in the format XX XX representing the current ROM revision OUTPUT XXX IDN IST Individual Status FEST The
192. XSEarch query returns the search criteria for the X marker MACHine 1 2 SLISt XSEarch lt occurrence gt lt origin gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST XSEARCH XSTate MACHine 1 2 SLISt XSTate The XSTate query returns the line number in the listing where the X marker resides If data is not valid the query returns 2147483647 MACHine 1 2 SLISt XSTate lt state_num gt lt NL gt integer from 1032192 to 1032192 or 2147483647 17 21 Example Command lt time_value gt lt state_value gt Example Query Returned Format Example SLISt Subsystem XTAG OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST XSTATE XTAG MACHine 1 2 SLISt XTAG lt time_value gt lt state_value gt The XTAG command specifies the tag value on which the X marker should be placed The tag value is time when time tagging is on or states when state tagging is on Ifthe data is not valid tagged data no action is performed real number integer OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST XTAG 40 0E 6 MACHine 1 2 SLISt XTAG The XTAG query returns the X marker position in time when time tagging is on or in states when state tagging is on regardless of whether the marker was positioned in time or through a pattern search If data is not valid tagged data the query returns 9 9E37 for time tagging or returns 2147483647 for state tagging MACHine 1 2 SLISt
193. XX MACHINEI1 LEVELARM 2 MACHine 1 2 LEVelarm The LEVelarm query returns the current sequence level receiving the arming for a specified machine MACHine 1 2 LEVelarm lt arm_level gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINEIl LEVELARM Command lt machine_name gt Example Query Returned Format Example Command lt res_id gt MACHine Subsystem NAME NAME MACHine 1 2 NAME lt machine_name gt The NAME command allows you to assign a name of up to 10 characters to a particular analyzer machine for easier identification string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 NAME DRAMTEST 2 J MACHine 1 2 NAME The NAME query returns the current analyzer name as an ASCII string MACHine 1 2 NAME lt machine name gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 NAME REName MACHine 1 2 REName lt res_id gt lt new_text gt DEFault The REName command allows you to assign a specific name of up to eight characters to terms A through J Range 1 and 2 and Timer 1 and 2 in the state analyzer In the timing analyzer EDGE 1 and 2 can be renamed in addition to the terms available in the state analyzer minus H and J The DEFault option sets all resource term names to the default names assigned when turning on the instrument lt state_terms gt H J for state analyzer
194. a partial compare can be specified to provide predictable end points of the data 1 PRINT Press CONTINUE to send the STOP command PAUSE OUTPUT 707 STOP 1 Ixkx xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkkxkkkxkkkxkxkkxkkxkxkkkxkkxkxkkkxkxkxkxkkxkkkxkxkkxkkkxkkxkxkxkx k The end points of the compare can be fixed to prevent false failures In addition you can use partial compare to compare only sections of the state listing you are interested in comparing 1 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 COMPARE RANGE PARTIAL 0 508 The compare range is now from line 0 to 508 Ikxkx xkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkkkxkkkxkkxxk xxk Change the Glitch jumper settings on the training board so that the data changes reacquire the data amp compare which states are different PRINT Change the glitch jumper settings on the training board so that PRINT the data changes reacquire the data and compare which states are PRINT different PRINT Press CONTINUE when you have finished changing the jumper 1 PAUSI 1 E LAKKAKKAKKAKAKKKKKKAKX KK KK KKK KKK KH KH FH FR AA ARA KK A A KK FH FH TA KH A AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA A Start the logic analyzer to acquire new data then stop it to compare the data When the acquisition is stopped the Compare Listing Menu is displayed i
195. age real number 6 00 to 6 00 15 5 Selector Example Command lt N gt lt clock_mode gt Example SFORmat Subsystem SFORmat SFORmat MACHine 1 2 SFORmat The SFORmat State Format selector is used as a part of a compound header to access the settings in the State Format menu It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch directly below the MACHine level in the command tree OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT MASTER J RISING CLOCK MACHine 1 2 SFORmat CLOCK lt N gt lt clock_mode gt The CLOCk command selects the clocking mode for a given pod when the pod is assigned to the state analyzer When the MASTer option is specified the pod will sample all 16 channels on the master clock When the SLAVe option is specified the pod will sample all 16 channels on the slave clock When the DEMultiplex option is specified only one pod ofa pod pair can acquire data The 16 bits of the selected pod will be clocked by the demultiplex master for labels with bits assigned under the Master pod The same 16 bits will be clocked by the demultiplex slave for labels with bits assigned under the Slave pod The master clock always follows the slave clock when both are used an integer from 1to 8 MASTer SLAVe DEMultiplex OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SFORMAT CLOCK2 MASTER Query Returned Format Example Command SFORmat Subsystem LABel MACHine
196. al number of samples OTHer for the number of hits in other range or lt range_number gt for the number of hits in that range Depending on whether the other range is on or off the statistic TOTal includes or excludes the number of hits in the other range SPA 1 2 HISTogram HSTatistic TOTal OTHer lt range_number gt lt number_hits gt lt NL gt 0 to 10 integer number 10 DIM String 100 20 OUTPUT XXX SELECT 1 30 OUTPUT XXX SPA1l HISTogram HSTatistic 7 40 ENTER XXX String 50 PRINT String 60 END 25 16 Command lt label_name gt Example Query Returned Format Example SPA Subsystem HISTogram LABel HISTogram LABel SPA 1 2 HISTogram LABel lt label_name gt The HISTogram LABel command selects a new label for collecting SPA measurements A query returns the name of the currently selected label Selecting a new label defaults the State Histogram range names bucket sizes and hit accumulators string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters OUTPUT XXX SPA2 HISTogram LABel A SPA 1 2 HISTogram LABel SPA 1 2 HISTogram LABel lt label_name gt lt NL gt 10 DIM String 100 20 OUTPUT XXX SELECT 1 30 OUTPUT XXX SPA2 HISTogram LABel 40 ENTER XXX String 50 PRINT String 60 END 25 17 Command Example Query Returned Format Example SPA
197. alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN Mass Storage Unit specifier INTernal0 for the hard disk drive and INTernall for the flexible disk drive An integer always 1 OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY LOAD IASSEMBLER I68020 IP 1 OUTPUT XXX MMEM LOAD IASS 168020 IP INTERNALO 1 2 12 15 Command lt directory _hame gt lt msus gt Example MMEMory Subsystem MKDir Make Directory MKDir Make Directory MMEMory MKDir lt directory_name gt lt msus gt The MKDir command allows you to make a directory on the hard drive ora DOS disk in the flexible drive Directories cannot be made on LIF disks MKDir will make a directory under the present working directory on the current drive if the optional path is not specified Separators can be either the slash or backslash character Both the slash and backslash characters are equivalent and are used as directory separators The string containing two periods represents the parent of the present working directory String of up to 64 characters for DOS disks ending in the new directory name Mass Storage Unit specifier INTernal0 for the hard disk drive and INTernal1 for the flexible disk drive OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY MKDIR NEW DIR OUTPUT XXX MMEM MKD SYSTEM NEW DIR INTO The slash character in DOS path names will be automati
198. also reset certain GPIB states It also resets the logic analyzer to the power on defaults and purges any acquired data in the acquisition memory The instrument is placed in remote mode by setting the REN Remote Enable bus control line true and then addressing the instrument to listen The instrument can be placed in local lockout mode by sending the local lockout LLO command see LOCKout in chapter 9 Instrument Commands The instrument can be returned to local mode by either setting the REN line false or sending the instrument the go to local GTL command 2 5 Programming Over GPIB Bus Commands Bus Commands The following commands are IEEE 488 1 bus commands ATN true IEEE 488 2 defines many of the actions which are taken when these commands are received by the logic analyzer Device Clear The device clear DCL or selected device clear SDC commands clear the input and output buffers reset the parser clear any pending commands and clear the Request OPC flag Group Execute Trigger GET The group execute trigger command will cause the same action as the START command for Group Run the instrument will acquire data for the active waveform and listing displays Interface Clear IFC This command halts all bus activity This includes unaddressing all listeners and the talker disabling serial poll on all devices and returning control to the system controller 2 6 Programming Over RS 232 C
199. alue in a row belongs to analyzer number one and the second tag value belongs to analyzer number two If the tag value is a time tag the number is an integer representing time in picoseconds If the tag value is a state tag the number is an integer state count The total size of the tag array is eight or 16 bytes per row as described in Acquisition Data Description on page 27 10 times the greatest number of valid rows SYSTem SETup SYStem SETup lt block data gt The SYStem SETup command configures the logic analyzer module as defined by the block data sent by the controller Three data sections are always included These are the strings which would be included in the section header CONFIG m DISPLAY1 BIG_ATTRIB Additionally the following sections may also be included depending on what s available SYMBOLS A SYMBOLS B INVASM A INVASM B 27 12 lt block data gt lt block length specifier lt length gt lt section gt lt section header gt lt section data gt Example Query Returned Format DATA and SETup Commands SYSTem SETup lt block length specifier gt lt section gt 8 lt length gt the total length of all sections in byte format must be represented with 8 digits lt section header gt lt section data gt 16 bytes in the following format 10 bytes for the section name 1 byte reserved 1 byte for the module ID code 34 for the Agilen
200. alue in preamble Example OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM YREFERENCE 36 16 Part 5 Pattern Generator Commands 37 Programming the Pattern Generator Programming the Pattern Generator This chapter provides you with the information needed to program the pattern generator of the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer e Programming overview and instructions to help you get started e Pattern Generator command tree e Alphabetic command to subsystem directory The next section contains the pattern generator commands and the following four sections contain the subsystem commands for the pattern generator The final section contains information on the SYSTem DATA and SYSTem SETup commands 37 2 Programming Overview This section introduces you to the basic command structure used to program the pattern generator Example Pattern Generator Program A typical pattern generator program includes the following tasks select the pattern generator e set program parameters e define a pattern generator program e run the pattern generator program The following example program generates a pattern using two of output pods 10 OUTPUT XXX SELECT 2 20 OUTPUT XXX FORMAT REMOVE ALL 30 OUTPUT XXX FORMAT LABEL A POSITIVE 127 0 40 OUTPUT XXX
201. amming rules and example Angular brackets enclose words or characters that are used to symbolize a program code parameter or a bus command is defined as For example A B indicates that A can be replaced by B in any statement containing A or Indicates a choice of one element from a list For example A B indicates A or B but not both An ellipsis trailing dots is used to indicate that the preceding element may be repeated one or more times Square brackets indicate that the enclosed items are optional When several items are enclosed by braces and separated by vertical bars 1 one and only one of these elements must be selected Three Xs after an ENTER or OUTPUT statement represent the device address required by your controller Linefeed ASCII decimal 10 The Command Tree The command tree figure 4 1 shows all commands in the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzers and the relationship of the commands to each other Parameters are not shown in this figure The command tree allows you to see what the Agilent 1670G series parser expects to receive All legal headers can be created by traversing down the tree adding keywords until the end of a branch has been reached Programming and Documentation Conventions Tree Traversal Rules Command Types As shown in chapter 1 in the topic Header Types there are three types of headers Each header has a corresponding command type This section shows how they
202. anel which loads the appropriate file for the system logic analyzer and any software options A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN Mass Storage Unit specifier INTernal0 for the hard disk drive and INTernall for the flexible disk drive An integer 0 or 1 OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY LOAD CONFIG FILE OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY LOAD FILE 0 OUTPUT XXX MMEM LOAD CONFIG FILE A INTERNALO 1 12 14 Command lt IA_name gt lt msus gt lt module gt Example MMEMory Subsystem LOAD IASSembler LOAD IASSembler MMEMory LOAD IASSembler lt IA_name gt lt msus gt 1 2 lt module gt This variation of the LOAD command allows inverse assembler files to be loaded into a module that performs state analysis The lt IA_name gt parameter specifies the inverse assembler filename from the desired lt msus gt The parameter after the optional lt msus gt specifies which machine to load the inverse assembler into The optional lt module gt parameter is used to specify which slot the state analyzer in 1 refers to the logic analyzer If this parameter is not specified the state analyzer will be selected A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12
203. apter 6 Status Reporting for a complete discussion of status An integer from 0 to 255 This example enables a service request to be generated when a message is available in the output queue When a message is available the MAV Message Available bit will be high OUTPUT XXX SRE 16 SRE The SRE query returns the current value lt mask gt lt NL gt An integer from 0 to 255 representing the sum of all bits that are set OUTPUT XXX SRE Table 8 5 Query Returned Format lt value gt Example Common Commands STB Status Byte Agilent 1670G Series Service Request Enable Register Bit Position Bit Weight Enables 15 8 not used 7 128 not used 6 64 MSS Master Summary Status always 0 5 32 ESB Event Status 4 16 MAV Message Available 3 8 LCL Local 2 4 not used 1 2 not used 0 1 MSB Module Summary STB Status Byte STB The STB query returns the current value of the instrument s status byte The MSS Master Summary Status bit not the RQS Request Service bit is reported on bit 6 The MSS indicates whether or not the device has at least one reason for requesting service Refer to table 8 6 for the meaning ofthe bits in the status byte Refer to Chapter 6 Status Reporting for a complete discussion of status lt value gt lt NL gt An integer from 0 through 255 OUTPUT XXX STB Table 8 6 Command Example Commo
204. arameters and the menus If you choose a menu that is not available the logic analyzer returns error 211 Selects module or system 0 integer selects the system 1 selects the logic analyzer 2 1 and 2 to 10 unused Selects menu integer OUTPUT XXX MENU 0 1 Instrument Commands MENU Table 9 5 Menu Parameter Values Parameters Menu 0 0 System External 1 0 0 1 System Hard Disk 0 2 System Flexible Disk 0 3 System Utilities 0 4 System Test 1 0 Analyzer Configuration 1 1 Format 1 1 2 Format 2 1 3 Trigger 1 1 4 Trigger 2 1 5 Waveform 1 1 6 Waveform 2 1 7 Listing 1 1 8 Listing 2 1 9 Mixed 1 10 Compare 1 1 11 Compare 2 1 12 Chart 1 1 13 Chart2 Query MENU The MENU query returns the current menu selection Returned Format MENU lt module gt lt menu gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MENU Command lt N gt lt enable_value gt Example Query Returned Format Example Instrument Commands MESE lt N gt Module Event Status Enable MESE lt N gt Module Event Status Enable MESE lt N gt lt enable_value gt The Agilent 1670G series logic analyzers support the MESE command for compatibility with other logic analyzer programs but do not take any action when the command is sent In 16500 programs the MESE command sets the Module Event Status Enable register The lt N gt index specifies the module and the parameter specifies t
205. at The TFORmat selector is used as part of acompound header to access those settings normally found in the Timing Format menu It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch directly below the MACHine level in the language tree OUTPUT XXX MACHIN El TFORMAT ACQMODE Command Example Query Returned Format Example TFORmat Subsystem ACOMode ACQMode MACHine 1 2 TFORmat ACOMode FULL HALF The ACQMode acquisition mode command selects the acquisition mode for the timing analyzer The options are e conventional mode at full channel 125 MHz e conventional mode at half channel 250 MHz OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TFORMAT ACOMODE HALF MACHine 1 2 TFORmat ACOMode The ACQMode query returns the current acquisition mode MACHine 1 2 TFORmat ACQMode FULL HALF lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TFORMAT ACQMODE Command lt name gt lt polarity gt lt clock_bits gt lt upper_bits gt TFORmat Subsystem LABel LABel MACHine 1 2 TFORmat LABel lt name gt lt polarity gt lt clock_bits gt lt clock_bits gt lt upper_bits gt lt lower_bits gt lt upper_bits gt lt lower_bits gt The LABel command specifies polarity and assigns channels to new or existing labels If the specified label name does not match an existing label name a new label will be created The order of the pod spe
206. ataCommunications Equipment 3 3 DataSet Ready DSR 3 5 DBLock selector 10 5 DCE 3 3 DCL 2 6 DDE 6 5 Definite length block response data 1 20 DELay command query 14 5 18 7 23 10 Device address 1 6 HP IB 2 4 RS 232C 3 10 Device clear 2 6 Device dependent errors 7 3 Documentation conventions 4 5 DOWNload command 12 11 DSP command 11 6 DTE 3 3 Duplicate keywords 1 9 E EDGE command query 22 13 Ellipsis 4 5 Embedded strings 1 3 1 6 Enter statement 1 3 EOI command 9 11 ERRor command 11 7 Error messages 7 2 ESB 6 4 Event Status Register 6 4 Examples program 28 2 EXE 6 5 Execution errors 7 4 Exponents 1 12 Extended interface 3 4 F File types 12 12 FIND command query 16 13 22 14 FIND query 20 8 Fractional values 1 13 Index 2 Index G GET 2 6 Group execute trigger 2 6 H TAXis command query 19 5 TEADer command 1 16 11 8 Headers 1 6 1 8 1 11 HISTogram HSTatistic query 25 16 HISTogram LABel command query 25 17 ISTogram OTHer command query 5 18 TISTogram QUALifier command query 5 19 ISTogram RANGe command query 5 20 TISTogram TTYPe command query 5 21 ost language 1 6 IP IB 2 2 6 8 IP IB address 2 3 HP IB device address 2 4 HP IB interface code 2 4 HP IB interface functions 2 2 4 I 4 ib NH TNT a 4 4 I dentification number 9 8 dentifying modules 9 8 EEE 488 1 2 2 5 2 EEE 488 1
207. ates included in the IF lines between IF and IF END are executed If the condition is not true the sequence states within the IF are skipped Valid IF events are IF IMB Note that there are clock speed channel count and location restrictions on the use of the IF instruction REPeat The REPeat instruction allows a group of sequence states to be executed repetitively some number of times The repeat count is specified in the optional instruction argument parameter Inserting a REPeat instruction causes three sequence lines to be generated The REPeat instruction line a data line within the body of the repeat and an END LOOP instruction line No data appears in the REPEAT and END LOOP lines The data specified as part of the remote control command string appears in the body of the repeat loop Additional data lines can be added to the body of the repeat loop by 39 8 Command Syntax lt line_number gt lt event gt lt count gt lt gt lt data_value gt Example SEQuence Subsystem INSert inserting lines as needed The repeat loop is assigned a loop number by the system and is used to connect the limits of the repeat loop Note that there are location restrictions on the use of the REPeat instruction MACRo The MACRo instruction is used to invoke a previously defined user macro The macro number is part of the instruction string not the optional instruction argument parameter Ifthe macro has been
208. ay TRIGger DELay EVENt lt count gt The DELay command is used to specify the number of events at which trigger occurs The time delay see TIMe DELay is counted after the events delay The DELay command cannot be used in the IMMediate trigger mode In pattern mode the DELay value corresponds to the Count field displayed on the TRIGger menu integer from 1 to 32000 OUTPUT XXX TRIGGER DELAY 5 TRIGger DELay The DELay query returns the current trigger events count TRIGger DELay lt count gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX TRIG DEL 35 7 TRIGger Subsystem LEVel LEVel Command For EDGE trigger mode TRIGger MODE EDGE SOURce CHANnel lt N gt LEVel lt value gt For PATTern trigger mode TRIGger MODE PATTern PATH CHANnel lt N gt EVel lt value gt E The LEVel command sets the trigger level voltage for the selected source or path This command cannot be used in the IMMediate trigger mode In EDGE trigger mode the SOURce command is used in PATTern mode the trigger PATH is used for the trigger level source The LEVel command in PATTern trigger mode sets the high low threshold for the pattern lt N gt 112 lt value gt Trigger level in volts Example For EDGE trigger mode OUTPUT XXX TRIG MODE EDGE SOUR CHAN1 LEV 1 0 For PATTern trigger mode OUTPUT XXX TRIG MODE PATTERN PATH CHAN
209. be used for 16550A 1660E ES series or 1670G series configuration files A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the form NNNNNNNN NNN Mass Storage Unit specifier INTernal0 for the hard disk drive and INTernal1 for the flexible disk drive MMEMory UPLoad lt block_data gt lt NL gt 12 21 Example Query lt msus gt Returned Format Example MMEMory Subsystem VOLume 10 DIM Block 32000 lallocate enough memory for block data 20 DIM Specifier 2 30 OUTPUT XXX EOI ON 40 OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM HEAD OFF 50 OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY UPLOAD FILEI send upload query 60 ENTER XXX USING 2A Specifier lread in 8 70 ENTER XXX USING 8D Length lread in block length 80 ENTER XXX USING K Block read in file 90 END VOLume MMEMory VOLume lt msus gt TheVOLume query returns the volume type of the disk The volume types are DOS or LIF Question marks are returned if there is no disk if the disk is not formatted or if a disk has a format other than DOS or LIF Mass Storage Unit specifier INTernal0 for the hard disk drive and INTernall for the flexible disk drive MMEMo ry VOLume DOS LIF lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY VOLUME 12 22 Part 3 Logic Analyzer
210. bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Pod7 Pod6 Pod5 Pod 4 Pod 3 Pod 2 Pod 1 unused Example XXXX XXXX XOlx XXXX XXXX xxx0 0001 111x indicates that data pods 1 through 4 and clock pod 1 are assigned to this analyzer x unused bit Byte Position 41 45 49 53 Example 00000000 00000000 61 65 73 DATA and SETup Commands Data Preamble Description 4 bytes Master chip for this analyzer 4 bytes Maximum hardware memory depth available for this analyzer 4 bytes Unused 8 bytes Sample period in picoseconds timing only The following 64 bits represent a sample period of 8 000 picoseconds 8 nanoseconds 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00011111 01000000 4 bytes Tag type for state mode in one of the following decimal values 0 off 1 time tags 2 State tags 8 bytes Trigger offset The time offset Gn picoseconds from when this analyzer is triggered and when this analyzer provides an output trigger to the IMB or port out The value for one analyzer is always zero and the value for the other analyzer is the time between the triggers of the two analyzers 30 bytes Unused 70 bytes The next 70 bytes are for Analyzer 2 Data Information They are organized in the same manner as Analyzer 1 above but they occupy bytes 103 through 172 27 8 Byte Position 173 Byte Position 261 589 590 DATA and SETup Commands Data Preamble Description 88 bytes Number of valid rows
211. boolean_op gt lt expression2e gt lt expression2f gt lt expression2g gt lt expression2h gt lt term3a gt lt term3b gt lt term3a gt lt boolean_op gt lt term3b gt lt term3c gt lt range3a gt lt term3c gt lt boolean_op gt lt range3a gt lt term3d gt lt edge3a lt term3d gt lt boolean_op gt lt edge3a gt lt term3e gt lt timer3a gt lt term3e gt lt boolean_op gt lt timer3a gt lt term3f gt lt term3g gt lt term3f gt lt boolean_op gt lt term3g gt lt term3g gt lt range3b gt lt term3g gt lt boolean_op gt lt range3b gt lt term3i gt lt edge3b gt lt term3i gt lt boolean_op gt lt edge3b gt AND NAND OR NOR XOR NXOR 22 6 lt term3a gt lt term3b gt lt term3c gt lt term3d gt lt term3e gt lt term3f gt lt term3g gt lt term3i gt lt range3a gt lt range3b gt lt edge3a gt lt edge3b gt lt timer3a gt lt timer3b gt A OTA B OTB G OTC D OTD 3 OTE F OTF G OTG I OTI IN_RANGE1 OUT_RANGE1 IN_RANGE2 OUT_RANGE2 EDGE1 NOT EDGE1 EDGE2 NOT EDGE2 IMER1 lt TIMER1 gt IMER2 lt TIMER2 gt TTRigger TTRace Subsystem Qualifier is optional such that it can be used zero or more times must be used at least once and can be repeated
212. boundary forces the marker to the appropriate end bucket A query returns the pattern associated with the lower end of the bucket where the marker is placed lt o_pattern gt B 0 1 0 01112131415 617 H O LIZ 3 4 516171819 AIBICIDIE F 10 11 2 314 15 1617 819 3 Example OUTPUT XXX SPA2 OVERView OMARker H3C31 Query SPA 1 2 OVERView OMARKer Returned Format SPA 1 2 OVERView OMARker lt o_pattern gt lt NL gt Example 10 DIM String 100 20 OUTPUT XXX SELECT 1 30 OUTPUT XXX SPA1 OVERView OMARker 40 ENTER XXX String 50 PRINT String 60 END 25 13 Query Returned Format lt number_hits gt Example SPA Subsystem OVERView OVSTatistic OVERView OVSTatistic SPA 1 2 OVERView XHIT s OHITs TOTal OVSTatistic The OVERView OVSTatistic query returns the number of hits associated with the requested statistic or returns the number of hits in the specified bucket XHITs requests the number of hits in the bucket where the X marker is located OHITs requests the number of hits in the bucket where the O marker is located TOTal requests the total number of hits SPA 1 2 0V lt number_hits gt lt NL gt integer number 10 20 30 40 50 60 DIM String 100 OU OU ERView OVSTatistic XHITs OHITs TOTal PUT XXX SELECT 1 PUT XXX SPA
213. by acomma The data values transmitted are the same as would be sent in the WORD format except that they are converted to an integer ASCII format six or less characters before being transmitted The header before the data is not included in this format 36 4 WAVeform Subsystem Data Conversion Data Conversion Data sent from the oscilloscope is raw data and must be scaled for useful interpretation The values used to interpret the data are the X and Y references X and Y origins and X and Y increments These values are read from the waveform preamble see the PREamble command or by the queries of these values Conversion from Data Value to Voltage The formula to convert a data value returned by the instrument to a voltage is voltage data value yreference yincrement yorigin Conversion from Data Value to Time The time value of a data point can be determined by the position of the data point As an example the third data point sent with XORIGIN 16ns XREFERENCE 0 and XINCREMENT 2ns Using the formula time data point number xreference xincrement xorigin would result in the following calculation time 3 0 Ans 16ns 22ns Conversion from Data Value to Trigger Point The trigger data point can be determined by calculating the closest data point to time 0 36 5 WAVeform Subsystem Data Conversion Figure 36 3 ey Nest S H Cone DATA I F
214. cally translated to the backslash character on the disk therefore any flexible DOS disk used in the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer will be compatible in DOS computers 12 16 MMEMory Subsystem MSI Mass Storage Is MSI Mass Storage Is Command MMEMory MSI lt msus gt The MSI command selects a default mass storage device lt msus gt Mass Storage Unit specifier INTernal0 for the hard disk drive and INTernal1 for the flexible disk drive Example OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY MSI OUTPUT XXX MMEM MSI INTERNALO Query MMEMory MSI The MSI query returns the current MSI setting Returned Format MMEMory MSI lt msus gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY MSI 12 17 Command lt msus gt Example Command lt name gt lt msus gt Example CAUTION MMEMory Subsystem PACK PACK MMEMory PACK lt msus gt The PACK command packs the files on a LIF disk If a DOS disk is in the drive when the PACK command is sent no action is taken Mass Storage Unit specifier INTernal0 for the hard disk drive and INTernal1 for the flexible disk drive OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY PACK OUTPUT XXX MMEM PACK INTERNALO PURGe MMEMory PURGe lt name gt lt msus gt The PURGe command deletes a file from the disk in the drive The lt name gt parameter specifies the filename to
215. can be used to control incoming data flow A true on the RTS line allows the controller to send data and a false signals a request for the controller to disable data transmission The CTS Clear To Send DSR Data Set Ready and DCD Data Carrier Detect lines are inputs to the logic analyzer which control data flow from the logic analyzer Internal pull up resistors in the logic analyzer assure the DCD and DSR lines remain high when they are not connected If DCD or DSR are connected to the controller the controller must keep these lines along with the CTS line high to enable the logic analyzer to send data to the controller A low on any one of these lines will disable the logic analyzer data transmission Pulling the CTS line low during data transmission will stop logic analyzer data transmission immediately Pulling either the DSR or DCD line low during data transmission will stop logic analyzer data transmission but as many as two additional bytes may be transmitted from the logic analyzer 3 5 Figure 3 1 Programming Over RS 232 C Cable Examples Cable Examples HP 9000 Series 300 Figure 3 1 is an example of how to connect the Agilent 1670G series to the HP 98628A interface card of an HP 9000 series 300 controller For more information on cabling refer to the reference manual for your specific controller Because this example does not have the correct connections for hardware handshake you must use the XON XOFF prot
216. cification parameters is significant The first one listed will match the highest numbered pod assigned to the machine you re using Each pod specification after that is assigned to the next highest numbered pod This way they match the left to right descending order of the pods you see on the Format display Not including enough pod specifications results in the lowest numbered pods being assigned a value of zero all channels excluded If you include more pod specifications than there are pods for that machine the extra ones will be ignored However an error is reported anytime more than 22 pod specifications are listed You can specify the polarity at any point after the label name Because pods contain 16 channels the format value for a pod must be between 0 and 65535 21 1 When giving the pod assignment in binary base 2 each bit will correspond to a single channel A 1 in a bit position means the associated channel in that pod is assigned to that pod and bit A 0 in a bit position means the associated channel in that pod is excluded from the label For example assigning B1111001100 is equivalent to entering 4 through the touchscreen A label cannot have a total of more than 32 channels assigned to it string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters POSitive NEGative format integer from 0 to 63 for a clock clocks are assigned in decreasing order format integer from 0 to 65535 for a pod pods are assi
217. cilloscope option 35 2 TRIGger Subsystem Figure 35 1 N Y gt GTRIGger mC Ya CONDi tion gt space gt ENTer gt EXIT gt RANGe 9 time I time Fo a time gt o er time gt CONDition gt DELay gt space EVENt lt lt count_ HH DELay gt Level gt space c level_value gt LEVel gt mL Ow 1 A i a a LOGI c gt space DONTcare LOGI c gt MODE space EDGE gt PATTern IMMediate MODE gt 16532514 i TRIGger Subsystem Syntax Diagram 35 3 TRIGger Subsystem Figure 35 1 continued PATH space CHANne _ SLOPe space POSitive NEGative sLore SOURce space CHANne _ w SOURCE 16532508 TRIGger Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued Table 35 1 TRIGger Parameter Values Parameter Value channel_ An integer from 1 to 2 count_ an integer from 1 through 32000 level_value a real number from 6 0 V to 6 0 V time a real number from 20 ns through 160 ms 35 4 Command TRIGger Subsystem CONDition CONDition TRIGger MODE PATTern CONDition ENTer EXIT GT lt time gt LT lt time gt RANGe lt time gt lt time gt The CONDition command specifies if a t
218. column_num INSert gt space H r prog_line_number ae D Noop gt gt H tabel_vatue ee ee wat eC gt wait event gt en REP eat DEN repeat cnt Ho ER MACRO Ja gt macros r 16522b08 A 39 2 SEQuence Subsystem He EPATIem gt space gt gt gt pattern_spec gt 8886 H EPATtern gt L PROGram gt space Hr prog line number label_name gt E gt NOOP gt gt label_value iF Ds if_event re war Ds wait event H r SIGNal gt REPeat nae Das repeat_cnt Ht Be BREAK gt Se MACRo Dae macro m H PROGram gt m REMove gt space prog_line_num gt prog_line_num ER ALL 16522b09 SEQuence Subsystem Syntax Diagram cont column_num an integer specifying the column thatis to receive the new label label_name the label name that is to be removed prog_line_num an integer specifying the program line number label value a string in one of the following forms B01 for binary 001234567 for octal H0123456789ABCDEF for hexadecimal 0123456789 for decimal repeat_cnt an integer from 1 through 20 000 macro an integer from 0 to 99 if event IF IMB wait_event A B IC ID IMB patter_spec an integer from
219. command downloads a file to the mass storage device The lt name gt parameter specifies the filename the lt description gt parameter specifies the file descriptor and the lt block_data gt contains the contents of the file to be downloaded Table 12 2 lists the file types for the lt type gt parameter A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN Mass Storage Unit specifier INTernal0 for the hard disk drive and INTernal1 for the flexible disk drive A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters An integer see table 12 2 Contents of file in block data format OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY DOWNLOAD SETUP INTERNALO FILE CREATED FROM SETUP QUERY 16127 800000643 12 11 Table 12 2 MMEMory Subsystem DOWNIoad File Types File File Type 1660E ES and 1670G ROM Software 15599 1660E ES and 1670G System Software 15598 1660E ES and 1670G System External 1 0 15605 1660E ES Logic Analyzer Software 15597 1660E ES Logic Analyzer Configuration 16096 1670G Logic Analyzer Software 15595 1670G Logic Analyzer Configuration 16094 1660E ES and 1670G Option Software 15594 Autoload File 15615 Inverse Assembler 15614 Enhanced Inverse Assembler 15604 DOS File from Print to Disk 5813 12 12 Command lt msus gt Example
220. could manually enter through the State Trigger menu Regarding parentheses the syntax definitions below show only the required ones Additional parentheses are allowed as long as the meaning of the expression is not changed A detailed example is provided in figure 16 2 on page 16 11 an integer from 1 to the number of existing sequence levels maximum 12 lt qualifier gt see Qualifier on page 16 7 ORE1 ANYSTATE ORE2 OUT_RANGE1 ORE3 NOTC AND NOTD AND OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGE OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGE OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGE NOTI AnD nn Yn 16 17 Query Returned Format Example Command lt state_tag_ qualifier gt Example STRigger STRace Subsystem TAG MACHine 1 2 STRigger STORe lt N gt The STORe query returns the current store qualifier specification for a given sequence level lt N gt MACHine 1 2 STRigger STORe lt N gt lt store_qualifier gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER STORE4 TAG MACHine 1 2 STRigger TAG OFF TIME lt state_tag_qualifier gt The TAG command selects the type of count tagging state or time to be performed during data acquisition State tagging is indicated when the parameter is the state tag qualifier which will be counted in the qualified state mode The qualifier may be a single term or a complex
221. ction parameters are used to clarify the meaning of the command or query They provide necessary data such as whether a function should be on or off which waveform is to be displayed or which pattern is to be looked for Each instruction s syntax definition shows the parameters as well as the range of acceptable values they accept This chapter s Parameter Data Types section has all of the general rules about acceptable values When there is more than one parameter they are separated by commas White space surrounding the commas is optional Instruction Terminator An instruction is executed after the instruction terminator is received The terminator is the NL New Line character The NL character is an ASCH linefeed character decimal 10 The NL New Line terminator has the same function as an EOS End Of String and EOT End Of Text terminator 1 7 Example Example Example Introduction to Programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Header Types Header Types There are three types of headers Simple Command Compound Command and Common Command Simple Command Header Simple command headers contain a single keyword START and STOP are examples of simple command headers typically used in this logic analyzer The syntax is lt function gt lt terminator gt When parameters indicated by lt data gt must be included with the simple command header the syntax
222. d source If a parameter cannot be measured the instrument responds with 9 9837 MEASure VMAX lt value gt lt NL gt 112 maximum voltage of selected waveform OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHAN2 VMAX VMIN MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt VMIN The VMIN query returns the absolute minimum voltage present on the selected source If a parameter cannot be measured the instrument responds with 9 9E37 MEASure VMIN lt value gt lt NL gt 112 minimum voltage of selected waveform OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHAN1 VMIN 33 11 Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example MEASure Subsystem VPP VPP MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt VPP The VPP query makes a peak to peak voltage measurement on the selected source The measurement is made by finding the absolute maximum VMAX and minimum VMIN points on the displayed waveform Ifa parameter cannot be measured the instrument responds with 9 9537 MEASure VPP lt value gt lt NL gt 112 peak to peak voltage of selected waveform OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHAN1 VPP VTOP MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt VTOP The VTOP query returns the voltage at the top relative maximum of the waveform on the selected source MEASur
223. d Format Example Command COMPare Subsystem RUNTIl Run Until MACHine 1 2 COMPare RANGe The RANGe query returns the current boundaries for the comparison MACHine 1 2 COMPare RANGe FULL PARTial lt start_line gt lt stop_line gt lt NL gt 10 DIM String 100 20 OUTPUT 707 SELECT 2 30 OUTPUT 707 MACHINE1 COMPARE RANGE 40 ENTER 707 String 50 PRINT RANGE IS String 60 END RUNTIl Run Until MACHine 1 2 COMPare RUNTil OFF LT lt value gt GT lt value gt INRange lt value gt lt value gt OUTRange lt value gt lt value gt EQUal NEQual The RUNTil command allows you to define a stop condition when the trace mode is repetitive Specifying OFF causes the analyzer to make runs until either the display s STOP field is touched or the STOP command is issued There are four conditions based on the time between the X and O markers Using this difference in the condition is effective only when time tags have been turned on see the TAG command in the STRace subsystem These four conditions are as follows e The difference is less than LT some value e The difference is greater than GT some value e The difference is inside some range INRange e The difference is outside some range OUTRange 20 10 lt value gt Example Query Returned Format Example COMPare Subsystem
224. d command allows you to set the voltage threshold for a given pod to ECL TTL or a specific voltage from 6 00 V to 6 00 V in 0 05 volt increments lt N gt pod number integer from 1 to 8 lt value gt voltage real number 6 00 to 6 00 TTL default value of 1 6 V ECL default value of 1 3 V Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TFORMAT THRESHOLD1 4 0 Query MACHine 1 2 TFORmat THReshold lt N gt The THReshold query returns the current threshold for a given pod Returned Format MACHine 1 2 TFORmat THReshold lt N gt lt value gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TFORMAT THRESHOLD2 22 TTRigger TTRace Subsystem Introduction The TTRigger subsystem contains the commands available for the Timing Trigger menu in the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer The Timing Trigger subsystem will also accept the TTRace selector as used in previous 16500 series logic analyzer modules to eliminate the need to rewrite programs containing TTRace as the selector keyword The TTRigger subsystem commands are e ACQuisition e BRANch e CLEar e EDGE e FIND e MLENgth e RANGe e SEQuence e SPERiod e TCONtrol e TERM e TIMER e TPOSition TTRigger TTRace Subsystem Figure 22 1 Ga gt Y Trigger De gt a ACQuIsition space AUTOmatic gt ACQuisition gt He BRANch lt N gt space re branch_qualifier el i Dial
225. d gt lt qual_operation gt The MOPQual master operation qualifier command allows you to specify either the AND or the OR operation between master clock qualifier pair 1 and 2 or between master clock qualifier pair 3 and 4 For example you can specify a master clock operation qualifier 1 AND 2 1 2 where 1 indicates pair 1 and 2 and 2 indicates pair 3 and 4 AND OR OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SFORMAT MOPQUAL 1 AND MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MOPQUal lt clock_pair_id gt The MOPQual query returns the operation qualifier specified for the master clock MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MOPQUal lt clock_pair_id gt lt qual_operation gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHinel SFORMAT MOPQUAL 1 15 10 Command lt qual_num gt lt clock_id gt lt qual_level gt Example Query Returned Format Example SFORmat Subsystem MQUal MQUal MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MQUal lt qual num gt lt clock id gt lt qual level gt The MQUal master qualifier command allows you to specify the level qualifier for the master clock 1121314 JIKILIM OFF LOW HIGH OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT MOUAL 1 J LOW MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MQUal lt qual_num gt The MQUal query returns the qualifier specified for the master clock MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MQUal lt qual_level gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT MOUAL 1 15 11 Command lt name gt Example Com
226. data Refer to Figure 32 1 for the Marker Subsystem Syntax Diagram The MARKer Subsystem commands are e AVOLt e TMAXimum e ABVolt e TMINimum e BVOLt e TMODe e CENTer e VMODe e MSTats e VOTime e OAUTo e VXTime e OTIMe e VRUNs e RUNTIl e XAUTO e SHOW e XTIMe e TAVerage e XOTime This chapter only applies to the oscilloscope option 32 2 MARKer Subsystem Figure 32 1 MARKer Ce Tavo space CHANNEL ne Ds level m Bv0L he space Ha CHANNEL_ level gt I CENTer space wm TRiGger i TMope o space OFF 1 gt TMODe gt MSTats gt space OFF gt 0 MSTats gt AUTO gt space MANual gt Gama al Ds type a level m eG Ds slope gt occurrence Hm OAUTO gt OTIMe gt space H r marker time gt OTIMe gt 01670809 i MARKer Subsystem Syntax Diagram 32 3 MARKer Subsystem Figure 32 1 continued gt RUNTI gt space LT eC J itoro ST Sm gt org He INRonge inronge_gt inrang elt outran ge_gt outran ge_it ek SHOW space S H TAVerage ETT MARKer a TMAX i
227. de specified MACHine 1 2 TTRigger ACQuisition AUTOmatic MANual lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER ACQUISITION BRANch MACHine 1 2 TTRigger BRANch lt N gt lt branch_qualifier gt lt to_level_number gt The BRANch command defines the branch qualifier for a given sequence level When this branch qualifier is matched it will cause the sequencer to jump to the specified sequence level The terms used by the branch qualifier A through G and I are defined by the TERM command The meaning of IN_RANGE and OUT_RANGE is determined by the RANGE command 22 9 TTRigger TTRace Subsystem BRANch Within the limitations shown by the syntax definitions complex expressions may be formed using the AND and OR operators Expressions are limited to what you could manually enter through the Timing Trigger menu As far as required and optional parentheses the syntax definitions on the next page show only the required ones Additional parentheses are allowed as long as the meaning of the expression is not changed Figure 22 2 on page 22 11 shows a complex expression as seen in the Timing Trigger menu The following statements are all correct and have the same meaning Notice that the conventional rules for precedence are not followed The expressions are evaluated from left to right XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER BRANCH1 C AND DORF ORG 1 XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER BRANCH1 C AND
228. de using the first complete displayed cycle at the 50 voltage level If a parameter cannot be measured the instrument responds with 9 9E37 MEASure FREQuency lt value gt lt NL gt 112 frequency in Hertz OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOUR CHAN1 FREQ 33 5 Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example MEASure Subsystem NWIDth NWIDth MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt NWIDth The NWIDth query makes a negative width time measurement on the selected channel The measurement is made between the 50 points of the first falling and the next rising edge displayed on screen Ifa parameter cannot be measured the instrument responds with 9 9E37 MEASure NWIDth lt value gt lt NL gt 112 negative pulse width in seconds OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHAN2 NWID OVERshoot MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt OVERshoot The OVERshoot query makes an overshoot measurement on the selected channel The measurement is made by finding a distortion following the first major transition The result is the ratio of OVERshoot to VAMPlitude If either cannot be measured the instrument responds with 9 9537 MEASure OVERshoot lt value gt lt NL gt 112 ratio of OVERshoot to VAMPlitude OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHAN1 OVE
229. defined to use passed in parameters those parameter values are passed in via the data value fields If no parameters are defined a single dummy parameter must be used 0 There is otherwise no data associated with a macro instruction SEQuence INSert lt line_number gt NOOP IF lt event gt WAIT lt event gt SIGNal REPeat lt count gt BREAK MACRo lt gt lt data_value gt lt data_value gt integer where instruction data will be inserted after AIBIGIDIIFIIMB integer repeat count macro number a string in one of the following forms BOl for binary 14001234567 for octal H0123456789ABCDEF for hexadecimal 10123456789 for decimal 10 OUTPUT XXX SEQ INS 248 NOOP 17 34 121 20 OUTPUT XXX SEQ INS 1786 WAIT A 17 34 121 30 OUTPUT XXX SEQ INS 2652 REPEAT 26 17 34 121 40 OUTPUT XXX SEQ INS 3166 MACR4 HABCD 41 Passes a single parameter to this instance of MACRO 4 50 OUTPUT XXX SEQ INS 3186 MACR6 0 51 Assume no parameter defined for MACRO 6 39 9 Command Query SEQuence Subsystem PROGram PROGram The PROGram command is used to modify an existing pattern generator sequence line The first parameter is the line number The instruction to be modified is at the specified line number Note that some lines cannot be modified S
230. defines the proceed qualifier for a given sequence level The qualifier tells the state analyzer when to proceed to the next sequence level When this proceed qualifier is matched the specified number of times the trigger sequence will proceed to the next sequence level In the sequence level where the trigger is specified the FIND command specifies the trigger qualifier see SEQuence command The terms A through J are defined by the TERM command The meaning of IN_RANGE and OUT_RANGE is determined by the RANGe command Expressions are limited to what you could manually enter through the State Trigger menu Regarding parentheses the syntax definitions below show only the required ones Additional parentheses are allowed as long as the meaning of the expression is not changed See figure 16 2 for a detailed example integer from 1 to number of existing sequence levels 1 integer from 1 to 1048575 lt qualifier gt see Qualifier on page 16 7 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER FIND1 ANYSTATE 1 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER FIND3 NOTA AND NOTB OR 16 13 Query Returned Format Example Command lt memory_length gt Example Query Returned Format Example STRigger STRace Subsystem MLENgth MACHine 1 2 STRigger FIND lt N gt The FIND query returns the current proceed qualifier specification for a given sequence level MACHi
231. duction to Programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Initialization Initialization To make sure the bus and all appropriate interfaces are in a known state begin every program with an initialization statement BASIC provides a CLEAR command that clears the interface buffer If you are using GPIB CLEAR will also reset the parser in the logic analyzer The parser is the program resident in the logic analyzer that reads the instructions you send to it from the controller After clearing the interface you could preset the logic analyzer to aknown state by loading a predefined configuration file from the disk Refer to your controller manual and programming language reference manual for information on initializing the interface This BASIC statement would load the configuration file DEFAULT if it exists into the logic analyzer OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY LOAD CONFIG DEFAULT Refer to chapter 12 MMEMory Subsystem for more information on the LOAD command This program demonstrates the basic command structure used to program the Agilent Technologies 1670G series logic analyzers XXX Initialize instrument interface Example Example 10 CLEAR 20 OUTPUT XXX 30 OUTPUT XXX 40 OUTPUT XXX 50 OUTPUT xxx 60 OUTPUT XXX 70 OUTPUT XXX ERS XS M M SRI Hs YSTEM HEADER ON Turn headers on YSTEM LONGFORM ON Turn longform on EM LOAD CONFIG TEST E Load
232. e INRange e The difference is outside some range OUTRange End points for the INRange and OUTRange should be at least 2 ns apart since this is the minimum time between samples OFF LT lt value gt GT lt value gt INRange lt value gt lt value gt OUTRange lt value gt lt value gt real number from 9E9 to 9E9 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST RUNTIL GT 800 0E 6 MACHine 1 2 TLISt RUNTil 24 15 Returned Format Example Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example TLISt Subsystem TAVerage The RUNTIl query returns the current stop criteria MACHine 1 2 TLISt RUNTil lt run_until_spec gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST RUNTIL TAVerage MACHine 1 2 TLISt TAVerage The TAVerage query returns the value of the average time between the X and O markers If the number of valid runs is zero the query returns 9 9537 Valid runs are those where the pattern search for both the X and O markers was successful resulting in valid delta time measurements MACHine 1 2 TLISt TAVerage lt time_value gt lt NL gt real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST TAVERAGE TMAXimum MACHine 1 2 TLISt TMAXimum The TMAXimum query returns the value of the maximum time between the X and O markers If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 MA
233. e VTOP lt value gt lt NL gt 112 voltage at the top relative maximum of the selected waveform OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHAN2 VTOP 2 33 12 34 TIMebase Subsystem Introduction The commands of the TIMebase Subsystem control the Timebase Trigger Delay Time and the Timebase Mode If TRIGgered mode is to be used ensure that the trigger specifications of the Trigger Subsystem have been set The commands of the TIMebase subsystem are e DELay e MODe e RANGe This chapter applies only to the oscilloscope option 34 2 TIMebase Subsystem Figure 34 1 i a 2 TIMebase J DEL ay space gt delay_arg gt pa DELay gt wm MODe gt AUTO gt RANGe Je space gt range_arg gt e RANGE 1 16530504 TiIMebase Subsystem Syntax Diagram Table 34 1 TlMebase Parameter Values Parameter Value delay_arg delay time in seconds from 2500 seconds through 2500 seconds range_arg a real number from 1 ns through 5 s 34 3 TIMebase Subsystem DELay DELay Command TIMebase DELay lt delay_time gt The DELay command sets the time between the trigger and the center ofthe screen The full range is available for panning the waveform when acquisition is stopped lt delay_time gt delay time in seconds from 2500 seconds through 2500 seconds Example OUTPUT XXX TIM DEL 2US
234. e X Y parameters Refer to Figure 36 3 for the Waveform Subsystem Syntax Diagram The two acquisition modes are Normal or Average The commands of the WAVeform subsytem are e COUNt e TYPE e DATA e VALid e FORMat e XINCrement e POINts e XORigin e PREamble e XREFerence e RECord e YINCrement e SOURce e YORigin e SPERiod e YREFerence This chapter only applies to the oscilloscope option 36 2 Figure 36 1 WAVeform Subsystem Format for Data Transfer Format for Data Transfer There are three formats for transferring waveform data over the remote interface These formats are WORD BYTE or ASCII WORD and BYTE formatted waveform records are transmitted using the arbitrary block program data format specified in IEEE 488 2 When you use this format the ASCII character string 8 lt DD D gt is sent before the actual data The lt D gt s are eight ASCH numbers which indicate how many data bytes will follow For example if 8192 points of data are to be transmitted the ASCII string 800008192 would be sent BYTE Format In BYTE format the seven least significant bits represent the waveform data This means that the possible range of data is divided into 128 vertical increments The most significant bit is not used If all 1 s are returned in the seven least significant bits the waveform is clipped at the top of the screen If all 0 s are returned the waveform is clipped at the bottom of the screen see fi
235. e format of the data within the block data keep these important things in mind e Data is sent to the controller in binary form e Each byte as described in this chapter contains 8 bits e The first bit of each byte is the MSB most significant bit e Byte descriptions are printed in binary decimal or ASCII depending on how the data is described Example The first ten bytes that describe the section name contain a total of 80 bits as follows Byte 1 Byte 10 Binary 0100 0100 0100 0001 0101 0100 0100 0001 0010 0000 0010 0000 MSB LSB Decimal 68 65 84 65 32 32 32 32 32 32 ASCII DATA space space space space space spac 27 3 Command Example DATA and SETup Commands SYSTem DATA SYSTem DATA SYSTem DATA lt block data gt The SYSTem DATA command transmits the acquisition memory data from the controller to the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer The block data consists of a variable number of bytes containing information captured by the acquisition chips Because no parameter checking is performed out of range values could cause instrument lockup therefore take care when transferring the data string to the logic analyzer The lt block data gt parameter can be broken down into a lt block length specifier gt anda variable number of lt section gt s The lt block length specifier gt always takes the form 8 DDDDDDDD Each D represents a digit ASCII characters 0 through 9 The value
236. e label inside the pattern recognizer term In whatever base is used the value must be between 0 and De 1 since a label may not have more than 32 bits Because the lt label_pattern gt parameter may contain don t cares it is handled as a string of characters rather than a number string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters B O 1 X 0 01112 3 4 5 6 17 IX H 0 1 213 14 5 1617 8 9 A B C D E F X 011121314151617 819 FT OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XPATTERN DATA 255 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XPATTERN ABC BXXXX1101 24 19 Query Returned Format Example Command lt occurrence gt lt origin gt Example Query Returned Format Example TLISt Subsystem XSEarch MACHine 1 2 TLISt XPATtern lt label_name gt The XPATtern query returns the pattern specification for a given label name MACHine 1 2 TLISt XPATtern lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XPATTERN A XSEarch MACHine 1 2 TLISt XSEarch lt occurrence gt lt origin gt The XSEarch command defines the search criteria for the X marker which is then with associated XPATtern recognizer specification when moving the markers on patterns The origin parameter tells the marker to begin a search with the trigger or with the start of data The occurrence parameter d
237. e options and module software is the same name that appears in the field in the upper left corner of the menu for each option or module SYSTEM lt option gt 0 lt option gt 0 INTERMODULE 0 lt module gt 0 0 0 0 0 lt NL gt Name of software option Name of module software OUTPUT XXX OPT Command lt pre_mask gt Example Query Returned format lt mask gt Example Common Commands PRE Parallel Poll Enable Register Enable PRE Parallel Poll Enable Register Enable PRE lt mask gt The PRE command sets the Parallel Poll Register enable bits The Parallel Poll Enable Register contains a mask value that is ANDed with the bits in the Status Bit Register to enable an ist during a parallel poll Refer to table 8 4 for the bits in the Parallel Poll Enable Register and for what they mask An integer from 0 to 65535 This example will allow the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer to generate an ist when a message is available in the output queue When a message is available the MAV Message Available bit in the Status Byte Register will be high Output XXX PRE 16 PRE The PRE query returns the current value of the register lt mask gt lt NL gt An integer from 0 through 65535 representing the sum of all bits that are set OUTPUT XXX PRE Common Commands RST Reset Table 8 4 Parallel Poll Enable Register
238. e pod_num c gt set_hold_value HA clock_spec On e SETHoIG gt gt space pod_num SLAVe space clock id eN gt H SLave space clock_id e SoPauc Ds space clock_pair_id mal gt qual_operation Inu LO e SOPOuO yr space clock pair id Saua y space p qual_num A gt clock_id mal gt qual_level saudi y space Ha qual_num ef THReshold lt gt Da space TIL THReshold lt N gt SFORmat Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued 16555505 15 4 Table 15 1 SFORmat Subsystem SFORmat Subsystem Parameter Values Parameter lt N gt label_name polarity clock_bits upper_bits lower_bits clock_id clock_spec clock_pair_id qual_operation qual_num qual_level pod_num set_hold_value value Value an integer from 1 to 8 string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters POSitive NEGative format integer from 0 to 65535 for a clock clocks are assigned in decreasing order format integer from 0 to 65535 for a pod pods are assigned in decreasing order format integer from 0 to 65535 for a pod pods are assigned in decreasing order J K L M OFF RISing FALLing BOTH 1 12 AND OR Deel St 23 OFF LOW HIGH an integer from 1 to 8 O ae Se se SE Pu Pe SP 83 S volt
239. e source that the current analyzer machine will be armed by MACHine 1 2 ARM lt arm_source gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE ARM 13 5 Command lt pod_list gt lt pod gt Example Query Returned Format Example MACHine Subsystem ASSign ASSign MACHine 1 2 ASSign lt pod_list gt The ASSign command assigns pods to a particular analyzer machine The ASSign command will assign two pods for each pod number you specify because pods must be assigned to analyzers in pairs NONE clears all pods from the specified analyzer machine and places them in the unassigned category NONE lt pod gt lt pod gt an integer from 1 to 8 OUTPUT XXX MACHINEL ASSIGN 5 2 1 MACHine 1 2 ASSign The ASSign query returns which pods are assigned to the current analyzer machine MACHine 1 2 ASSign lt pod_list gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 ASSIGN 2 Command lt arm_level gt Example Query Returned Format Example MACHine Subsystem LEVelarm LEVelarm MACHine 1 2 LEVelarm lt arm_level gt The LEVelarm command allows you to specify the sequence level for a specified machine that will be armed by the Intermodule Bus or the other machine This command is only valid if the specified machine is on and the arming source is not set to RUN with the ARM command integer from 1 to 11 representing sequence level OUTPUT X
240. ecution of the sequence to stop at this ine Use the RESume command to advance to the next line sequence When operating at 200 MHz you can not have two Break events in succession SIGNal The SIGNal instruction outputs a signal to the internal Intermodule Bus IMB This signal is used to trigger the logic analyzer WAIT The WAIT instruction causes the pattern generator to stop and wait for the occurrence of the specified event pattern s The event patterns are set by the SEQuence EPATtern command The event to be waited for by this particular command is specified by the optional instruction argument parameter Once the specified event occurs the pattern generator program proceeds to the next state When operating at 200 MHz you can not have two Wait events in succession IF The IF instruction allows a sequence of program states to occur if a specified condition is true The IF event pattern is specified by the SEQuence EPATtern command The IF and END IF sequence lines cannot be modified other than changing the if condition The condition to be tested by the IF instruction is specified by the optional instruction argument parameter If the specified condition is true the sequence states include the IF lines between IF and IF END are executed If the condition is not true the sequence states within the IF are skipped Valid IF events are IF IMB 39 11 Command Syntax SEQuence Subsystem PROGram REPeat The
241. ed 350 Too many errors error queue overflow Query Errors 400 Query error generic 410 Query INTERRUPTED 420 Query UNTERMINATED 421 Query received Indefinite block response in progress 422 Addressed to talk nothing to say 430 Query DEADLOCKED 7 6 Part 2 Instrument Commands Common Commands Example Introduction The common commands are defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard These commands must be supported by all instruments that comply with this standard Refer to figure 8 1 and table 8 1 for the common commands syntax diagram and parameter values The common commands control some of the basic instrument functions such as instrument identification and reset how status is read and cleared and how commands and queries are received and processed by the instrument The common commands are e CLS e PRE e ESE e RST e ESR e SRE e IDN e STB e IST e TRG e OPC e TST e OPT e WAI Common commands can be received and processed by the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzers whether they are sent over the bus as separate program messages or within other program messages If an instrument subsystem has been selected and a common command is received by the instrument the logic analyzer will remain in the selected subsystem If the program message in this example is received by the logic analyzer it will initialize the disk and store the file and clear the status information
242. ed BASE SYMBol CLOCk FORMat COLumn SEQuence DELay FORMat EPATtern SEQuence INSert MACRo SEQuence LABel FORMat MODe FORMat NAME MACRo PARameter MACRo PATTern SYMBol PROGram SEQuence MACRo RANGe SYMBol REMove FORMat SEQuence MACRo SYMBol RESume Pattern Generator Level STEP Pattern Generator Level WIDTh SYMBol 37 6 Pattern Generator Level Commands The Pattern Generator Level Commands control the operation of pattern generator programs The two commands are STEP and RESume Gr e CH str gt STEP gt count gt pax STEP gt pax STEP FSTate gt RESune 16520507 Pattern Generator Level Syntax Diagram count integer from 1 to 100 000 specifying the number of vectors stepped Command Query STEP command Syntax Example STEP Count command Syntax lt count gt Example Programming the Pattern Generator STEP STEP The STEP command consists of four types the STEP Count command the STEP command the the STEP query and the STEP FSTate command The STEP Count command specifies the vector range for the STEP command The valid vector range for the STEP Count command is from 1 to 100 000 The default is 1 If lt count gt is greater than the number of lines in the program STEP will loop back to the beginning until it has stepped through lt count gt number of vectors The STEP command causes the pattern generator to step throug
243. eed to rewrite programs containing STRace as the selector keyword The STRigger subsystem commands are e ACQuisition e BRANch e CLEar e FIND e MLENgth e RANGe e SEQuence e STORe e TAG e TAKenbranch e TCONtrol e TERM e TIMER e TPOSition 16 2 Figure 16 1 N STRigger STRace Subsystem y Y STRigger za gs ACQuisition et space e BRANch lt N gt space pe branch_qualifier UD to_level_num m pe BRANch lt N gt Lal ar FIND lt N gt Jn space gt proceed_qualifier occurrence a FIND lt N gt gt He MLENatn 3 space 2 memory_length gt gt Hal MLENgth e RANGe lt N gt gt space gt label_name O a start_pat ern rn no gt RANGe lt N gt e SEQuence Jo space gt SEQuence stop pattern m gt gt a num_of_levels ad lev_of_trig pl ES gt store_qualifier z H STORe lt N gt space Y STRigger Subsystem Syntax Diagram 16555506 16 3 Figure 16 1 continued STRigger STRace Subsystem Y STORe lt N gt Ie TAKenbranch gt space NOSTore TAKenbranch TCONt ro I lt N gt J space o timer_num OFF PAUSe C
244. el_name ee width_value 16510 SX10 SYMBol Subsystem Syntax Diagram 26 3 Table 26 1 SYMBol Subsystem SYMBol Parameter Values Parameter label_name symbol_name pattern_value start_value stop_value width_value Value string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters string of up to 16 alphanumeric characters B O 1 X Q O 1 314 H 0 1 314 N N T O PPO N 0 1 12131415 integer from 1 to 16 A Y J Y N Al 8 9 JA B C D E F X o ta ad 8 9 JA B C D E F Users FE BUER f 8 9 A B C D E F OY ade ares tt 26 4 Selector Example Command lt label_name gt lt base_value gt Example SYMBol Subsystem SYMBol SYMBol MACHine 1 2 SYMBol The SYMBol selector is used as a part of a compound header to access the commands used to create symbols It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch directly below the MACHine level in the command tree OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SYMBOL BASE DATA BINARY BASE MACHine 1 2 SYMBol BASE lt label_name gt lt base_value gt The BASE command sets the base in which symbols for the specified label will be displayed in the symbol menu It also specifies the base in which the symbol off
245. ence Subsystem EPATtern EPATtern The EPATtern command is used to specify the event patterns used by the WAIT and IF commands The pattern generator has three external input qualifiers WAIT2 WAIT1 and WAITO There are eight combinations of the three input qualifiers that may be OR ed together to create an event pattern specification Mapping of these input qualifier patterns to an event pattern specification is shown below WAITO Command Query WAIT2 WAIT1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 Command syntax lt pattern_spec gt Query syntax Return format 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 MSB x x x x LSB lt pattern_spec gt The query returns the current pattern specification for the given event SEQuence EPATtern A B C D IF lt pattern_spec gt an integer between 0 and 255 mapping input qualifier combinations as shown above SEQuence EPATtern A B C D IF A EQuence EPATtern B C D IF lt pattern_spec gt See next page for an example SEQuence Subsystem EPATtern Example To specify an event pattern of 0 1 0 Wait2 0 Waitl 1 Wait0 0 use a lt pattern_spec gt of 4 0000 0100 To specify an event pattern of 0 0 0 use a lt pattern_spec gt of 1 0000 0001 To specify an event pattern of 0 1 1 OR 1 1 0 OR 1 1 1 use a lt pattern_spec gt of 200 1100 1000 39 6 Command SEQuence
246. enerator 3 FORMat Subsystem SEQuence Subsystem MACRo Subsystem SYMBol Subsystem DATA and SETup Commands Programming Examples Index OBE ele vi viii Part 1 2 Table of Contents General Information Introduction to Programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Talking to the Instrument 1 3 Initialization 1 4 Instruction Syntax 1 5 Output Command 1 5 Device Address 1 6 Instructions 1 6 Instruction Terminator 1 7 Header Types 1 8 Duplicate Keywords 1 9 Query Usage 1 10 Program Header Options 1 11 Parameter Data Types 1 12 Selecting Multiple Subsystems 1 14 Receiving Information from the Instrument 1 15 Response Header Options 1 16 Response Data Formats 1 17 String Variables 1 18 Numeric Base 1 19 Numeric Variables 1 19 Definite Length Block Response Data 1 20 Multiple Queries 1 21 Instrument Status 1 22 Programming Over GPIB Interface Capabilities 2 3 Command and Data Concepts 2 3 Addressing 2 3 Communicating Over the GPIB Bus HP 9000 Series 200 300 Controller 2 4 Local Remote and Local Lockout 2 5 Contents 1 Contents Bus Commands 2 6 3 Programming Over RS 232 C Interface Operation 3 3 RS 232 C Cables 3 3 Minimum Three Wire Interface with Software Protocol 3 4 Extended Interface with Hardware Handshake 3 4 Cable Examples 3 6 Configuring the Logic Analyzer Interface 3 8 Interface Capabilities 3 9 RS 232 C Bus Add
247. enting The short form syntax conserves the amount of controller memory needed for program storage and reduces the amount of VO activity The rules for short form syntax are discussed in chapter 4 Programming and Documentation Conventions Either of the following examples turns on the headers and long form Long form OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM HEADER ON LONGFORM ON Short form OUTPUT XXX SYST HEAD ON LONG ON Example Example Introduction to Programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Parameter Data Types Parameter Data Types There are three main types of data which are used in parameters They are numeric string and keyword A fourth type block data is used only for a few instructions the DATA and SETup instructions in the SYSTem subsystem see chapter 11 the CATalog UPLoad and DOWNload instructions in the MMEMory subsystem see chapter 12 These syntax rules also show how data may be formatted when sent back from the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer as a response The parameter list always follows the instruction header and is separated from it by white space When more than one parameter is used they are separated by commas You are allowed to include one or more white spaces around the commas but it is not mandatory Numeric data For numeric data you have the option of using exponential notation or using suffixes to indicate
248. er The actual occurrence the marker searches for is determined by the occurrence parameter of the OPATtern recognizer specification relative to the origin An occurrence of 0 places a marker on the selected origin With a negative occurrence the marker searches before the origin With a positive occurrence the marker searches after the origin STARt TRIGger XMARkKer integer from 1032192 to 1032192 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM OSEARCH 10 TRIGGER 23 14 TWAVeform Subsystem OTIMe Query MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OSEFarch The OSEarch query returns the search criteria for the O marker Returned Format MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OSEarch lt occurrence gt lt origin gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM OSEARCH OTIMe Command MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OTIMe lt time_value gt The OTIMe command positions the O marker in time when the marker mode is TIME If data is not valid the command performs no action lt time_value gt real number 2 5 ks to 2 5 ks Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM OTIME 30 0E 6 Query MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OTIMe The OTIMe query returns the O marker position in time If data is not valid the query returns 9 9537 Returned Format MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform OTIMe lt time_value gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM OTIME 23 15
249. erased between each individual run or whether subsequent waveforms are allowed to be displayed over the previous waveforms OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SCHART ACCUMULATE OFF MACHine 1 2 SCHart ACCumulate The ACCumulate query returns the current setting The query always shows the setting as the character 0 off or 1 on MACHine 1 2 SCHart ACCumulate O 1 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SCHART ACCUMULATE Command lt marker_type gt Example Command lt state_low value gt lt state_high_ value gt lt label_name gt lt label_low value gt lt label_high_ value gt SCHart Subsystem CENTer CENTer MACHine 1 2 SCHart CENTer lt marker_type gt The CENTer command centers the waveform display about the specified markers The markers are placed on the waveform in the SLISt subsystem X O XO TRIGger OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SCHART CENTER XO HAXis MACHine 1 2 SCHart HAXis STAtes lt state_low_value gt lt state_high_value gt lt label_name gt lt label_low_value gt lt label_high_value gt lt state_low_value gt lt state_high_value gt The HAXis command selects whether states or a label s values will be plotted on the horizontal axis of the chart The axis is scaled by specifying the high and low values The shortform for STATES is STA This is an intentional deviation from the normal truncation rule
250. es 17 through 590 consists of the following 574 bytes 4 bytes Instrument ID always 1670 decimal 4 bytes Revision Code 4 bytes number of pod pairs used in last acquisition 4 bytes Analyzer ID 0 for Agilent 1670G 27 6 DATA and SETup Commands Data Preamble Description The values stored in the preamble represent the captured data currently stored in this structure and not the current analyzer configuration For example the mode of the data bytes 33 and 103 may be STATE with tagging while the current setup of the analyzer is TIMING The next 70 bytes are for Analyzer 1 Data Information Byte Position 33 4 bytes Machine data mode in one of the following decimal values 1 off 0 100 MHz State data no tags 1 100 MHz State data tag data in unassigned pod 2 100 MHz State data tag data interleaved with acquired data 10 conventional timing data on all channels 13 conventional timing data on half channels 37 4 bytes List of pods in this analyzer where a binary 1 indicates that the corresponding pod is assigned to this analyzer bit 31 bit 30 bit 29 bit 28 bit 27 bit 26 bit 25 bit 24 unused unused unused unused unused unused unused unused bit 23 bit 22 bit 21 bit 20 bit 19 bit 18 bit 17 bit 16 unused clock clock unused unused unused unused unused pod 2 pod 1 bit 15 bit 14 bit 13 bit 12 bit 11 bit 10 bit 9 bit 8 unused unused unused unused unused unused unused Pod 8 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5
251. es for precedence are not followed The expressions are evaluated from left to right OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER BRANCH1 C AND DORF ORG 1 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER BRANCH1 C AND D OR F OR G LA F ur OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER BRANCH1 C AND D OR F OR Es e 1 integer from 1 to lt number_of_levels gt integer from 1 to lt number_of_levels gt integer from 2 to the number of existing sequence levels maximum 12 lt qualifier gt see Qualifier on page 16 7 16 10 Example Query Returned Format Example Figure 16 2 STRigger STRace Subsystem OUTPUT XXX MACHIN RIGGER BRANCH1 ANYSTATE OUTPUT XXX MACHIN RIGGER BRANCH2 A 7 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE 1 STRIGGER BRANCH3 A OR B MACHine 1 2 STRigger BRANch lt N gt BRANch A 3 OR NOTG 1 The BRANch query returns the current branch qualifier specification for a given sequence level MACHine 1 2 STRigger BRANch lt N gt lt branch_qualifier gt lt to_level_num gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHIN El STRIGGER BRANCH3 Current Qualifier a b f g Complex qualifier Figure 16 2 is a front panel representation of the complex qualifier a Or b Or f Or g 16 11 Example Command Example STRigger STRace
252. es the current full screen time for machine 1 in the output buffer MACHINE TWAVEFORM RANGE In order to prevent the loss of data in the output buffer the output buffer must be read before the next program message is sent Sending another command before reading the result of the query will cause the output buffer to be cleared and the current response to be lost This will also generate a QUERY UNTERMINATED error in the error queue For example when you send the query TWAVEFORM RANGE you must follow that with an input statement In BASIC this is usually done with an ENTER statement In BASIC the input statement ENTER XXX Range passes the value across the bus to the controller and places it in the variable Range Additional details on how to use queries is in the next section of this chapter Receiving Information for the Instrument Example Introduction to Programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Program Header Options Program Header Options Program headers can be sent using any combination of uppercase or lowercase ASCI characters Logic analyzer responses however are always returned in uppercase Both program command and query headers may be sent in either long form complete spelling short form abbreviated spelling or any combination of long form and short form Programs written in long form are easily read and are almost self docum
253. ese cases it is necessary to first REMove the line s and INSert new lines s The query returns the current contents instruction and data for the specified line number 40 10 MACRo Subsystem PROGram Instructions NOOP The NOOP instruction means there is no operation for this line BREak The BREak instruction causes the execution of the macro to stop at this line Use the RESume command to advance to the next line macro SIGNal The SIGNal instruction outputs a signal to the internal Intermodule Bus IMB This signal is used to trigger the logic analyzer WAIT The WAIT instruction causes the pattern generator to stop and wait for the occurrence of the specified event pattern s The event to be waited for by this particular command is specified by the optional instruction argument parameter Once the specified event occurs the pattern generator program proceeds to the next state Valid WAIT events are AIBICIDIIMB Their patterns are set using the SEQuence EPATtern command REPeat The REPeat instruction allows a group of macro states to be executed repetitively some number of times The repeat count is specified in the optional instruction argument parameter The REPeat and END LOOP sequence lines cannot be modified other than to change the loop count 40 11 Command Syntax lt line_number gt lt optional_ label gt lt event gt lt count gt lt m gt lt p gt lt data_value gt Query S
254. esponse is lost LAKKAKKKKKKKKKKKKKX KK KKKkk KK QUERY EXAMP LE KAXKKXKKXKKKKKKKXAKKKKkkkXk for the Agilent 1670G series Logic Analyzers 1 kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxxkxx OPTIONAL kkkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkkkxkxkx The following two lines turn the headers and longform on so that the query name in its long form is included in the query response I KKKKKKKKKKKKKK NOTE KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKK E If your query response includes real or integer numbers that you may want to do statistics or math on later you l should turn both header and longform off so only the number is returned 1 KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KK KK KEK OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM HEADER ON OUTPUT 707 SYSTEM LONGFORM ON kkkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkkxkkkxkkxkxkkkxkkxkxkkxkkkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkkxkkkxxkx k Select the slot in which the logic analyzer is located Always a 1 for the Agilent 1670 series logic analyzers OUTPUT 707 SELECT 1 I i kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkkxkxkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkkkkxkkkkxk Dimension a string in which the query response will be entered i DIM Query 100 i kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkkkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkkxkkkxkxkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkkkkkxkxkkxkxk 43 18 31 32 33 34 39 36 37 38 39 40
255. etermines which occurrence of the XPATtern recognizer specification relative to the origin the marker actually searches for An occurrence of 0 zero places a marker on the selected origin integer from 1032192 to 1032192 TRIGger STARt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XSEARCH 10 TRIGGER MACHine 1 2 TLISt XSEarch The XSEarch query returns the search criteria for the X marker MACHine 1 2 TLISt XSEarch lt occurrence gt lt origin gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XSEARCH 24 20 Query Returned Format lt state_num gt Example Command lt time_value gt Example Query Returned Format Example TLISt Subsystem XSTate XSTate MACHine 1 2 TLISt XSTate The XSTate query returns the line number in the listing where the X marker resides If data is not valid the query returns 2147483647 MACHine 1 2 TLISt XSTate lt state_num gt lt NL gt integer from 1032192 to 1032192 or 2147483647 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XSTATE XTAG MACHine 1 2 TLISt XTAG lt time_value gt The XTAG command specifies the tag value in time on which the X marker should be placed Ifthe data is not valid tagged data no action is performed real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST XTAG 40 0E 6 MACHine 1 2 TLISt XTAG The XTAG query returns the X Marker position in time regardless
256. f the RS 232 C link For both three wire and extended hardwire operation the DCD and DSR inputs to the logic analyzer must remain high for proper operation With extended hardwire operation a high on the CTS input allows the logic analyzer to send data and a low disables the logic analyzer data transmission Likewise a high on the RTS line allows the controller to send data and a low signals a request for the controller to disable data transmission Because three wire operation has no control over the CTS input internal pull up resistors in the logic analyzer assure that this line remains high for proper three wire operation RS 232 C Cables Selecting a cable for the RS 232 C interface depends on your specific application and whether you wish to use software or hardware handshake protocol The following paragraphs describe which lines of the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer are used to control the handshake operation of the RS 232 C bus relative to the system To locate the proper cable for your application refer to the reference manual for your computer or controller Your computer or controller manual should describe the exact handshake protocol your controller can use to operate over the RS 232 C bus Also in this chapter you will find cable recommendations for hardware handshake 3 3 Programming Over RS 232 C Minimum Three Wire Interface with Software Protocol Minimum Three Wire Interface with Software Protocol
257. fier 25 22 TINTerval TINTerval 25 24 TINTerval TSTatistic 25 25 26 SYMBol Subsystem SYMBol 26 5 BASE 26 5 PATTern 26 6 RANGe 26 7 REMove 26 8 WIDTh 26 8 27 DATA and SETup Commands Introduction 27 2 Data Format 27 3 SYSTem DATA 27 4 Section Header Description 27 6 Section Data 27 6 Data Preamble Description 27 6 Acquisition Data Description 27 10 Tag Data Description 27 12 SYSTem SETup 27 12 Part 4 Oscilloscope Commands Contents 11 28 29 30 31 32 Contents Oscilloscope Root Level Commands AUToscale 28 3 DIGitize 28 5 ACQuire Subsystem COUNt 29 4 TYPE 29 5 CHANnel Subsystem COUPling 30 4 ECL 30 5 OFFSet 30 6 PROBe 30 7 RANGe 30 8 TTL 30 9 DISPlay Subsystem ACCumulate 31 4 CONNect 31 5 INSert 31 6 LABel 31 7 MINus 31 8 OVERlay 31 8 PLUS 31 9 REMove 31 9 MARKer Subsystem AVOLt 32 6 ABVolt 32 7 BVOLt 32 7 CENTer 32 8 MSTats 32 8 OAUTo 32 9 OTIMe 32 10 Contents 12 33 34 Contents RUNTi Run Until 32 11 SHOW 32 12 TAVerage 32 12 TMAXimum 32 13 TMINimum 32 13 TMODe 32 14 VMODe 32 15 VOTime 32 16 VRUNs 32 16 VXTime 32 17 XAUTo 32 18 XOTime 32 19 XTIMe 32 19 MEASure Subsystem ALL 33 4 FALLtime 33 5 FREQuency 33 5 NWIDth 33 6 OVERshoot 33 6 PERiod 33 7 PREShoot 33 7 PWIDth 33 8 RISetime 33 8 SOURce 33 9 VAMPlitude 33 10 VBASe 33 10 VMAX 33 11 VMIN 33 11 VPP 33 12 VTOP 33 12 TIMebase Subsystem DELay 34
258. form NNNNNNNN NNN An integer 0 through 1 12 6 Command lt auto_file gt lt msus gt Example Query Returned Format MMEMory Subsystem AUToload AUToload MMEMory AUToload OFF O lt auto_file gt lt msus gt The AUToload command controls the autoload feature which designates a set of configuration files to be loaded automatically the next time the instrument is turned on The OFF parameter or 0 disables the autoload feature A string parameter may be specified instead to represent the desired autoload file If the file is on the current disk the autoload feature is enabled to the specified file A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN Mass Storage Unit specifier INTernal0 for the hard disk drive and INTernall for the flexible disk drive OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY AUTOLOAD OFF OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY AUTOLOAD FILE1_A OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY AUTOLOAD FILE2 INTERNALO MMEMory AUToload The AUToload query returns 0 if the autoload feature is disabled If the autoload feature is enabled the query returns a string parameter that specifies the current autoload file The appropriate slot designator is included in the filename and refers to the slot designator A for the logic analyzer Ifthe slot designator is
259. formation has been included for RS 232 C Message Communication and System Functions Protocols Protocols The protocols of IEEE 488 2 define the overall scheme used by the controller and the instrument to communicate This includes defining when it is appropriate for devices to talk or listen and what happens when the protocol is not followed Functional Elements Before proceeding with the description of the protocol a few system components should be understood Input Buffer The input buffer of the instrument is the memory area where commands and queries are stored prior to being parsed and executed It allows a controller to send a string of commands to the instrument which could take some time to execute and then proceed to talk to another instrument while the first instrument is parsing and executing commands Output Queue The output queue of the instrument is the memory area where all output data lt response messages gt are stored until read by the controller Parser The instrument s parser is the component that interprets the commands sent to the instrument and decides what actions should be taken Parsing refers to the action taken by the parser to achieve this goal Parsing and executing of commands begins when either the instrument recognizes a lt program message terminator gt defined later in this chapter or the input buffer becomes full Ifyou wish to send a long sequence of commands to be executed and t
260. g Examples Making a Timing Analyzer Measurement 43 3 Making a State Analyzer Measurement 43 5 Making a State Compare Measurement 43 9 Transferring the Logic Analyzer Configuration 43 14 Checking for Measurement Completion 43 17 Sending Queries to the Logic Analyzer 43 18 Contents 16 Part 1 General Information Introduction to Programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Introduction This chapter introduces you to the basics of remote programming and is organized in two sections The first section Talking to the Instrument concentrates on initializing the bus program syntax and the elements of a syntax instruction The second section Receiving Information from the Instrument discusses how queries are sent and how to retrieve query results from the mainframe instruments The programming instructions explained in this book conform to IEEE Std 488 2 1987 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands These programming instructions provide a means of remotely controlling the Agilent Technologies 1670G series logic analyzer There are three general categories of use You can e Set up the instrument and start measurements e Retrieve setup information and measurement results e Send measurement data to the instrument The instructions listed in this manual give you access to the measurements and front panel features of the Agilent Technologies 1670G series logic analyzer
261. ge syntax 1 5 Program message terminator 1 7 Program syntax 1 5 programming 25 2 Programming conventions 4 5 Protocol 3 9 5 4 None 3 9 XON XOFF 3 9 Protocol exceptions 5 5 Protocols 5 3 PURGe command 12 18 Q Query 1 6 1 10 1 16 ESE 8 6 ESR 8 7 IDN 8 9 IST 8 9 OPC 8 11 OPT 8 12 PRE 8 13 SRE 8 15 STB 8 16 TST 8 18 2 ACCumulate 18 5 19 4 23 8 ACQMode 21 5 ACQuisition 16 9 22 9 ARM 13 5 ASSign 13 6 AUToload 12 7 BEEPer 9 6 BRANch 16 11 22 11 CAPability 9 7 CATalog 12 8 CESE 9 9 CESR 9 10 CLOCK 15 7 CMASk 20 5 COLumn 17 8 24 8 DATA 11 6 17 9 20 7 24 9 27 5 DELay 14 5 18 7 23 11 EDGE 22 13 EOI 9 11 ERRor 11 7 FIND 16 14 20 8 22 15 HAXis 19 6 HEADer 11 8 HISTogram HSTatistic 25 16 HISTogram LABel 25 17 HISTogram QUALifier 25 19 HISTogram RANGe 25 20 HISTogram TTYPe 25 21 LABel 15 8 21 7 LER 9 11 LEVelarm 13 7 LINE 14 7 17 10 20 9 24 10 LOCKout 9 12 LONGform 11 9 MASTer 15 9 M ii MESR 9 16 MLENgth 16 14 18 9 22 16 23 12 5 12 MMODe 17 11 23 13 24 10 ODE 25 7 SI 12 17 AME 13 8 OCONdition 23 14 24 11 OPATtern 17 12 23 15 24 12 OSEarch 17 13 23 16 24 13 OSTate 14 7 17 13 24 14 EE OTAG 17 14 24 14 OTIMe 14 8 23 16 OVERView BUCKet 25 8 OVERView HIGH 25 9 OVERView LABel 25 10 OVERView LOW 25 11 OVERView OMARker 25 13 OVERView OVS
262. gic analyzers Table 9 3 lists the bit values for the CESE register An integer from 0 to 65535 OUTPUT XXX CESE 32 ESE The CESE query returns the current setting CESE lt value gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX CESE Agilent 1670G Series Combined Event Status Enable Register Bit 3 to 15 Weight Enables not used not used 2 logic analyzer 1 Intermodule Query Returned Format lt value gt Example Table 9 4 Instrument Commands CESR Combined Event Status Register CESR Combined Event Status Register CESR The CESR query returns the contents of the Combined Event Status register This register contains the combined status of all of the MESRs Module Event Status Registers of the Agilent 1670G series Table 9 4 lists the bit values for the CESR register CESR lt value gt lt NL gt An integer from 0 to 65535 OUTPUT XXX CESR Agilent 1670G Series Combined Event Status Register Bit Bit Weight Bit Name Condition 2to 15 0 not used 1 2 Logic analyzer 0 No new status 1 Status to report Intermodule 0 No new status 1 Status to report Command Example Query Returned Format Example Query Returned Format Example Instrument Commands EOI End Or Identify EOI End Or Identify EOI ONI1 OFF O The EOI command specifies whether o
263. gned in decreasing order lt lower_bits gt lt assignment gt Example Query Returned Format Example Command lt name gt Example TFORmat Subsystem REMove format integer from 0 to 65535 for a pod pods are assigned in decreasing order format integer from 0 to 65535 for a pod pods are assigned in decreasing order OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TFORMAT LABEL STAT POSITIVE 0 127 40312 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TFORMAT LABEL SIG 1 B11 B0000000011111111 B0000000000000000 MACHine 1 2 TFORmat LABel lt name gt The LABel query returns the current specification for the selected by name label If the label does not exist nothing is returned Numbers are always returned in decimal format MACHine 1 2 TFORmat LABel lt name gt lt polarity gt lt assignment gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TFORMAT LABEL DATA REMove MACHine 1 2 TFORmat REMove lt name gt ALL The REMove command deletes all labels or any one label specified by name for a given machine string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TFORMAT REMOVE A OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TFORMAT REMOVE ALL 21 7 TFORmat Subsystem THReshold THReshold Command MACHine 1 2 TFORmat THReshold lt N gt TTL ECL lt value gt The THReshol
264. gram QUALifier lt label_name gt lt pattern gt lt NL gt 10 DIM String 100 20 OUTPUT XXX SELECT 1 30 OUTPUT XXX SPA1l HISTogram QUALifier A 40 ENTER XXX String 50 PRINT String 60 END 25 19 Command lt range_num gt lt range_name gt lt low_patt gt lt high_patt gt Example Query Returned Format lt range_onoff gt Example SPA Subsystem HISTogram RANGe HISTogram RANGe SPA 1 2 HISTogram RANGe OFF lt range_num gt lt range_name gt lt low_patt gt lt high_patt gt The HISTogram RANGe command turns off all ranges or defines the range name low boundary and high boundary of the specified range Defining a specified range turns on that range For the specified range a query returns the name low boundary high boundary and whether the range is on or off 0 to 10 string of up to 16 alphanumeric characters B O 1 0 011121314151617 H 011 21314 151617 8 9 JAIBICIDIEIF 0 1 2 3 4 15 1617 8 19 OUTPUT XXX SPA1 HISTogram RANGe OFF OUTPUT XXX SPA2 HISTogram RANGe 5 A 255 512 OUTPUT XXX SPA1 HISTogram RANGe 8 DATA BO100110 H9F SPA 1 2 HISTogram RANGe lt range_num gt SPA 1 2 HISTogram RANGe lt range_number gt lt range_name gt lt low_pattern gt lt high_pattern gt lt range_onoff gt lt NL gt ON
265. gt The OSEarch command defines the search criteria for the O marker which is then used with associated OPATtern recognizer specification when moving the markers on patterns The origin parameter tells the marker to begin a search with the trigger the start of data or with the X marker The actual occurrence the marker searches for is determined by the occurrence parameter of the OSEarch recognizer specification relative to the origin An occurrence of 0 places the marker on the selected origin With a negative occurrence the marker searches before the origin With a positive occurrence the marker searches after the origin integer from 1032192 to 1032192 TRIGger STARt XMARker OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST OSEARCH 10 TRIGGER 17 12 Query Returned Format Example Query Returned Format lt state_num gt Example SLISt Subsystem OSTate MACHine 1 2 SLISt OSEarch The OSEarch query returns the search criteria for the O marker MACHine 1 2 SLISt OSEarch lt occurrence gt lt origin gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST OSEARCH OSTate MACHine 1 2 SLISt OoSTate The OSTate query returns the line number in the listing where the O marker resides If data is not valid the query returns 2147483647 MACHine 1 2 SLISt OSTate lt state_num gt lt NL gt integer from 1032192 to 1032192 or 2147483647 OUTPUT XXX M
266. gt The REName command renames a file on the disk in the drive The lt name gt parameter specifies the filename to be changed and the lt new_name gt parameter specifies the new filename You cannot rename a file to an already existing filename A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN 12 19 lt msus gt lt new name gt Example Command lt name gt lt msus gt lt description gt lt module gt MMEMory Subsystem STORe CONFig Mass Storage Unit specifier INTernal0 for the hard disk drive and INTernall for the flexible disk drive A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN OUTPU XXX MMEMORY RENAME OLDFILE NEWFILE OUTPU XXX MMEM REN OLDFILE INTERNAL1 NEWFILE STORe CONFig MMEMory STORe CONfig lt name gt lt msus gt lt description gt lt module gt The STORe command stores configurations onto a disk The CONFig specifier is optional and has no effect on the command The lt name gt parameter specifies the file on the disk The lt description gt parameter describes the contents of
267. gt lt clock_spec gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT SLAVE K 15 14 Command lt clock_pair_ id gt lt qual_ operation gt Example Query Returned Format Example SFORmat Subsystem SOPQual SOPQual MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SOPQual lt clock_pair_id gt lt qual_operation gt The SOPQual slave operation qualifier command allows you to specify either the AND or the OR operation between slave clock qualifier pair 1 and 2 or between slave clock qualifier pair 3 and 4 For example you can specify a slave clock operation qualifier 1 AND 2 112 1 specifies qualifier pair 1 2 2 specifies qualifier pair 3 4 AND OR OUTPUT XXX MACHine2 SFORMAT SOPQUAL 1 AND MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SOPQual lt clock_pair_id gt The SOPQual query returns the operation qualifier specified for the slave clock MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SOPQual lt clock_pair_id gt lt qual_operation gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHiNE2 SFORMAT SOPQUAL 1 15 15 Command lt qual_num gt lt clock_id gt lt qual_level gt Example Query Returned Format Example Command SFORmat Subsystem SQUal SQUal MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SQUal lt qual_num gt lt clock_id gt lt qual_level gt The SQUal slave qualifier command allows you to specify the level qualifier for the slave clock 1121314 JIKILIM OFF LOW HIGH OUTPUT XXX
268. gure 36 1 The data returned in BYTE format is the same for either Normal or Average acquisition types The data transfer rate in this format is faster than the other two formats NORMAL AND AVERAGE ACQUISITION TYPE 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 MSB NOT USED NAE A 16532815 Byte Data Structure 36 3 Figure 36 2 WAVeform Subsystem Format for Data Transfer WORD Format Word data is two bytes wide with the most significant byte of each word being transmitted first In WORD format the 15 least significant bits represent the waveform data The possible range of data is divided into 32768 vertical increments The WORD data structure for normal and average acquisition types are shown in figure 36 2 If all 1 s are returned in the 15 least significant bits the waveform is clipped at the top of the screen If all 0 s are returned in the 15 least significant bits the waveform is clipped at the bottom of the screen WORD and ASCII format data are more accurate than BYTE format data BYTE format simply truncates the 8 least significant bits of WORD format data NORMAL AND AVERAGE ACQUISITION TYPE MSB LSB 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 NOT USED X DATA NA DATA FRACTION _Y 16532816 Word Data Structure ASCII Format ASCII formatted waveform records are transmitted one value at a time separated
269. h the number of vectors specified by the STEP Count command If one of the instructions is BREAK STEP will not stop for it The STEP query returns the current count The STEP FSTate step first state command outputs the first vector of the sequence If the vectors have been changed since last run they must be loaded into the hardware with either the START command or STEP FSTate STEP OUTPUT XXX STEP STEP lt count gt an integer from 1 to 100 000 specifying the number of vectors stepped 10 OUTPUT XXX STEP 20 20 OUTPUT XXX STEP This example sets the step count to 20 in line 10 then in line 20 begins the step command through the number of lines specified in line 10 37 8 Query Returned Format Example STEP FSTate command Syntax Example Programming the Pattern Generator STEP STEP STEP lt count gt 10 DIM Sc 100 20 OUTPUT XXX STEP 30 ENTER XXX Sc 40 PRINT Sc 50 END This example queries and prints the step count STEP FSTate OUTPUT XXX STEP FSTATE 37 9 Programming the Pattern Generator RESume RESume Command When the pattern generator encounters a BREAK instruction program execution is halted The RESume command allows the program to continue until another BREAK instruction is encountered or until the end ofthe program is reached Command Syntax RESume Example OUTPUT
270. he Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Response Data Formats Response Data Formats Both numbers and strings are returned as a series of ASCII characters as described in the following sections Keywords in the data are returned in the same format as the header as specified by the LONGform command Like the headers the keywords will always be in uppercase The following are possible responses to the MACHINE1 TFORMAT LAB ADDR query Header on Longform on MACHINE1 TFORMAT LABEL ADDR 19 POSITIVE lt terminator gt Header on Longform off MACH1 TFOR LAB ADDR 19 POS lt terminator gt Header off Longform on ADDR 19 POSITIVE lt terminator gt Header off Longform off ADDR 19 POS lt terminator gt Refer to the individual commands in Parts 2 and 3 of this guide for information on the format alpha or numeric of the data returned from each query Introduction to Programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzer String Variables String Variables Because there are so many ways to code numbers the Agilent Technologies 1670G series logic analyzer handles almost all data as ASCII strings Depending on your host language you may be able to use other types when reading in responses Sometimes it is helpful to use string variables in place of constants to send instructions to the Agilent Technologies 1670G ser
271. he X marker to the specified time with respect to the trigger marker time in seconds from trigger marker to X marker OUTPUT XXX MARKER XTIME 1E 6 MARKer XTIMe The XTIMe query returns the time in seconds between the X marker and the trigger marker MARKer XTIMe lt X_marker_time gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MARKER XTIME 32 19 32 20 33 MEASure Subsystem Introduction The commands in the Measure Subsystem are used to make automatic parametric measurements on oscilloscope waveforms Except for SOURce no commands in the MEASure subsystem set values The MEASure subsystem commands are e ALL e SOURce e FALLtime e VAMPlitude e FREQuency e VBASe e NWIDth e VMAX e OVERshoot e VMIN e PERiod e VPP e PREShoot e VTOP e PWIDth e RISetime This chapter applies only to the oscilloscope option 33 2 MEASure Subsystem Figure 33 1 gt sn OH Mei OVERshoot gt Mm RISet ime gt SOURCE space Na channe _ gt ver gt MEASure Subsystem Syntax Diagram Table 33 1 MEASure Parameter Values Parameter Value channel_ 112 33 3 Query lt N gt Returned Format Example MEASure Subsystem ALL ALL MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt ALL The ALL query makes a set of measurements on the displayed waveform using the se
272. he enable value An integer 0 through 10 An integer from 0 through 255 OUTPUT XXX MESEIl 3 MESE lt N gt The query returns the current setting Tables 9 6 and 9 7 list the Module Event Status Enable register bits bit weights and what each bit masks for the mainframe and logic analyzer respectively MESE lt N gt lt enable_value gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MESE1 Table 9 6 Table 9 7 Instrument Commands MESE lt N gt Module Event Status Enable Agilent 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Mainframe Intermodule Module Event Status Enable Register Bit Position 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Weight 128 84 32 16 8 4 2 1 Enables not used not used not used not used not used not used RNT Intermodule Run Until Satisfied MC Intermodule Measurement Complete Agilent 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Module Event Status Enable Register Bit Position 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Weight 128 84 32 16 8 4 2 1 Enables not used not used not used not used Pattern searches failed Trigger found RNT Run Until Satisfied MC Measurement Complete Query Returned Format lt N gt lt enable_value gt Example Instrument Commands MESR lt N gt Module Event Status Register MESR lt N gt Module Event Status Register MESR lt N gt The MESR query returns the contents of
273. he first pattern is placed in the leftmost label with the following patterns being placed in a left to right fashion as seen on the Compare display Specifying more patterns than there are labels simply results in the extra patterns being ignored Because don t cares Xs are allowed in the data pattern it must always be expressed as a string You may still use different bases but don t cares cannot be used in a decimal number 20 6 lt label_name gt lt line_num gt lt data_pattern gt Example Query Returned Format COMPare Subsystem DATA a string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters integer from 245760 to 245760 B 0 1IX a 01011121314 1516171X H 0 11 121314 15 1617 8 9 A B C D E F X 10 1 12131415 16 171819 3 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE DATA CLOCK 42 HBO11X101X OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE DATA 0UT3 0 HFF40 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 COMPARE DATA 129 BXX00 B1101 B10XX OUTPUT XXX MACH2 COMPARE DATA 511 4 64 16 256 TET y 116 Ul T MACHine 1 2 COMPare DATA lt label_name gt lt line_num gt The DATA query returns the value of the compare listing image for a given label and state row MACHine 1 2 COMPare DATA lt label_name gt lt line_num gt lt data_pattern gt lt NL gt
274. he slope and the occurrence count 112 ABSolute PERCent percentage of waveform voltage level ranging from 10 to 90 of the Vtop to Vbase voltage or a voltage level POSitive NEGative integer from 1 to 100 OUTPUT XXX MARKER OAUTO CHANNEL1 PERCent 50 POSITIVE 5 MARKer OAUTo The OAUTo query returns the current settings MARKer OAUTo MANual CHANnel lt N gt lt type gt lt level gt lt slope gt lt occurrence gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MARKER OAUTO 32 9 Command lt O_marker _time gt Example Query Returned Format Example MARKer Subsystem OTIMe OTIMe MARKer OTIMe lt O_marker_time gt The OTIMe command moves the O marker to the specified time with respect to the trigger marker time in seconds from trigger marker to O marker OUTPUT XXX MARKER OTIME 1E 6 MARKer OTIMe The OTIMe query returns the time in seconds between the O marker and the trigger marker MARKer OTIMe lt O_marker_time gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MARKER OTIME 32 10 Command lt time gt Example Query Returned Format Example MARKer Subsystem RUNTIl Run Until RUNTil Run Until MARKer RUNTil OFF LT lt time gt GT lt time gt INRange lt time gt lt time gt OUTRange lt time gt lt time gt The RUNTil command allows you to set a stop cond
275. he trigger was found If no trigger is found the oscilloscope defaults to auto trigger The display window configuration is not altered by AUToscale Example OUTPUT XXX AUTOSCALE To demonstrate a quick oscilloscope setup requires hardware Use the AC CAL OUTPUT signal available at the rear panel ofthe card The square wave put out by the AC CAL OUTPUT is normally used for calibration and probe compensation Connect the AC CAL OUTPUT signal from the rear panel output connector to CHAN 1 also on the rear panel Ensure that the mainframe is connected to a controller Enter the program listed on the next page and execute it The following program expects the oscilloscope to be connected to a signal 28 3 Oscilloscope Root Level Commands AUToscale Example This program selects the oscilloscope in slot B issues an autoscale command waits 5 seconds for the oscilloscope to collect data and then gets and prints the measurement 10 OUTPUT XXX SELECT 2 20 OUTPUT XXX AUTOSCALE 25 WAIT 5 D O U 30 DIM Me 200 40 OUTPUT MEASURE SOURCE CHANNEL1 ALL 50 E ER XXX Me 60 PRINT Mes 70 END The three Xs XXX after the OUTPUT and ENTER statements in the above example refer to the device address required for programming over either GPIB or RS 232 C Refer to chapter 1 Introduction to Programming for information on initializing the interface
276. hen a command error occurs the event summary bit ESB in the Status Byte Register will also be set OUTPUT XXX ESE 32 ESE The ESE query returns the current contents of the enable register lt mask gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX ESE 8 6 Common Commands ESR Event Status Register Table 8 2 Standard Event Status Enable Register Bit Position Bit Weight Enables 1 128 PON Power On 6 64 URO User Request 5 32 CME Command Error 4 16 EXE Execution Error 3 8 DDE Device Dependent Error 2 4 OYE Query Error 1 2 ROC Request Control 0 1 OPC Operation Complete ESR Event Status Register u u The ESR query returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register Reading the register clears the Standard Event Status Register Returned Format lt status gt lt NL gt lt status gt An integer from 0 to 255 Example If a command error has occurred and bit 5 of the ESE register is set the string variable Esr_event will have bit 5 the CME bit set 10 OUTPUT XXX ESE 32 lEnables bit 5 of the status register 20 OUTPUT XXX ESR Queries the status register 30 ENTER XXX Esr_event Reads the query buffer Common Commands ESR Event Status Register Table 8 3 shows the Standard Event Status Register The table details the meaning of each bit position in the Standard Event Status Register and the bit weight
277. hen talk to another instrument while they are executing you should send all the commands before sending the lt program message terminator gt Message Communication and System Functions Protocols Protocol Overview The instrument and controller communicate using lt program message gt s and lt response message gt s These messages serve as the containers into which sets of program commands or instrument responses are placed lt program message gt s are sent by the controller to the instrument and lt response message gt s are sent from the instrument to the controller in response to a query message A lt query message gt is defined as being a lt program message gt which contains one or more queries The instrument will only talk when it has received a valid query message and therefore has something to say The controller should only attempt to read a response after sending a complete query message but before sending another lt program message gt The basic rule to remember is that the instrument will only talk when prompted to and it then expects to talk before being told to do something else Protocol Operation When the instrument is turned on the input buffer and output queue are cleared and the parser is reset to the root level of the command tree The instrument and the controller communicate by exchanging complete lt program message gt sand lt response message gt s This means that the controller should alwa
278. ic TTIMe TTYPe TYPE UPLoad VAXis VOLume VRUNs WIDTh WLISt XCONdition XMARker X0Tag X0Time XPATtern XSEarch XSTate XTAG XTIMe XWINdow Subsystem SFORmat TFORmat STRigger TTRigger SPA MODE TINTerval SLISt TLISt TWAVeform SLISt TLISt TWAVeform STRigger SWAVeform TTRigger TWAVeform INTermodule TINTerval INTermodule HISTogram MACHine MMEMory SCHart MMEMory SLISt TLISt TWAVeform SYMBol Mainframe TLISt TWAVeform OVERView SLISt TLISt SLISt TLISt TWAVeform WLISt SLISt TLISt TWAVeform SLISt TLISt TWAVeform SLISt TLISt WLISt SLISt TLISt TWAVeform WLISt Mainframe Programming and Documentation Conventions Command Set Organization Command Set Organization The command set for the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzers is divided into 19 separate groups common commands system commands and 17 sets of subsystem commands Each of the 19 groups of commands is described in a separate chapter in Parts 2 and 3 Commands Each of the chapters contain a brief description of the subsystem a set of syntax diagrams for those commands and finally the commands for that subsystem in alphabetical order The commands are shown in the long form and short form using upper and lowercase letters As an example AUToload indicates that the long form of the command is AUTOLOAD and the short form of the command is AUT Each of the commands contain a description of the command its arguments a
279. ic analyzer will operate in conjunction with a controller When the logic analyzer is in the addressed talk listen mode the following is true e Each device on the GPIB resides at a particular address ranging from 0 to 30 e The active controller specifies which devices will talk and which will listen e An instrument therefore may be talk addressed listen addressed or unaddressed by the controller 2 3 Programming Over GPIB Communicating Over the GPIB Bus HP 9000 Series 200 300 Controller If the controller addresses the instrument to talk it will remain configured to talk until it receives e aninterface clear message IFC e another instrument s talk address OTA e its own listen address MLA e a universal untalk UNT command If the controller addresses the instrument to listen it will remain configured to listen until it receives e an interface clear message IFC e its own talk address MTA e a universal unlisten UNL command Communicating Over the GPIB Bus HP 9000 Series 200 300 Controller Because GPIB can address multiple devices through the same interface card the device address passed with the program message must include not only the correct instrument address but also the correct interface code The device address is calculated by multiplying the Interface Select Code by 100 and adding the instrument address Interface Select Code Selects the Interface Each interface card has
280. ication or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance No other warranty is expressed or implied Agilent Technologies specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Exclusive Remedies The remedies provided herein are the buyer s sole and exclusive remedies Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract tort or any other legal theory Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent Technologies products For any assistance contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales Office Certification Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Institute s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members About this edition This is the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzers Programmer s Guide HP is a registered trademark and or Hewlett Packard is a registered trademark of Hewlett Pac
281. ied 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 OUTPUT XXX ACQUIRE COUNT 16 ACQuire COUNt The COUNt query returns the last specified count ACQuire COUNt lt count gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX ACQ COUN 29 4 Command Example Query Returned Format Example ACQuire Subsystem TYPE TYPE ACQuire TYPE NORMal AVERage The TYPE command selects the type of acquisition that is to take place when a DIGitize or STARt command is executed One of two acquisition types may be chosen the NORMal or AVERage mode In the NORMal mode with the ACCumulate command OFF the oscilloscope acquires waveform data and then displays the waveform When the oscilloscope makes a new acquisition the previously acquired waveform is erased from the display and replaced by the newly acquired waveform When the ACCumulate command is ON the oscilloscope displays all the waveform acquisitions without erasing the previously acquired waveform In the AVERage mode the oscilloscope averages the data points on the waveform with previously acquired data Averaging helps eliminate random noise from the displayed waveform In this mode the ACCumulate command is OFF When AVERage mode is selected the number of averages must also be specified using the COUNt command Previously averaged waveform data is erased from the display and the newly averaged waveform is displayed OUTPUT XXX ACQUIRE TYPE NORMAL ACQuire TY
282. ies logic analyzer such as including the headers with a query response Example This example combines variables and constants in order to make it easier to switch from MACHINEI to MACHINE2 In BASIC the amp operator is used for string concatenation 5 OUTPUT XXX SELECT 1 Select the logic analyzer 10 LET Machine MACHINE2 Send all instructions to machine 2 20 OUTPUT XXX Machine amp TYPE STATE Make machine a state analyzer 30 Assign all labels to be positive 40 OUTPUT XXX Machine SFORMAT LABEL CHAN 1 POS 50 OUTPUT XXX Machine SFORMAT LABEL CHAN 2 POS 60 OUTPUT XXX Machine amp SFORMAT LABEL OUT POS 99 E If you want to observe the headers for queries you must bring the returned data into a string variable Reading queries into string variables requires little attention to formatting Example This command line places the output of the query in the string variable Result ENTER XXX Result In the language used for this book HP BASIC 6 2 string variables are case sensitive and must be expressed exactly the same each time they are used 1 18 Example Example Introduction to Programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Numeric Base The output of the logic analyzer may be numeric or character data depending on what is queried Refer to the specific commands in Parts 2 and 3 of th
283. ing the oscilloscope module 112 a string of up to five characters enclosed in single quotes OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY LABEL CHANNEL1 CLK DISPlay LABel CHANnel lt N gt The LABel query returns the label string assigned to the specified channel If no label has been assigned the default channel identifier single character and single number is returned DISPlay LABel CHANnel lt N gt lt label_str gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY LABEL CHANNEL2 Command lt module_ number gt lt label gt Example Command lt label gt Example DISPlay Subsystem MINus MINus DISPlay MINus lt module_number gt lt label gt lt label gt The MINus command algebraically subtracts one channel from another and inserts the resultant waveform on the display The first parameter is an optional module specifier always 2 for the oscilloscope The next two parameters are the labels of the waveforms selected to be subtracted The label names are defined in the same manner as the INSert command You cannot subtract analyzer waveforms Always 2 string of 1 alpha and 1 numeric character enclosed by single quotes OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY MINUS 2 C1 C2 OVERlay DISPlay OVERlay lt label gt lt label gt The OVERlay command overlays oscilloscope waveforms The syntax parameters are the labels of the waveforms that are to be overlaid A label
284. integer from 1032192 to 1032192 integer from lt state_low_value gt to 1032192 a string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters string from 0 to 22 1 HFFFFFFFF string from lt label_low_value gt to 2 1 HFFFFFFFF Example Query Returned Format Example Command lt label_name gt lt low_value gt lt high_value gt Example SCHart Subsystem VAXis OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SCHART HAXIS STATES 100 100 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SCHART HAXIS READ 511 511 0 300 MACHine 1 2 SCHart HAXis The HAXis query returns the current horizontal axis label and scaling MACHine 1 2 SCHart HAXis STAtes lt state_low_value gt lt state_high_value gt lt label_name gt lt label_low_value gt lt label_high_value gt lt state_low_value gt lt state_high_value gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SCHART HAXIS VAXis MACHine 1 2 SCHart VAXis lt label_name gt lt low_value gt lt high_value gt The VAXis command allows you to choose which label will be plotted on the vertical axis of the chart and scale the vertical axis by specifying the high value and low value a string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters string from 0 to 2 1 HHFFFFFFFF string from lt low_value gt to 2 1 HHFFFFFFFF OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SCHART VAXIS SUM1 0 99 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SCHART VAXIS BUS HOOFF H0500
285. interface to the printer or to a file on the disk The PRINT SCREEN option allows you to specify a graphics type BTIF format is a black amp white TIFF version 5 0 CTIF and PCX formats are grayscale and EPS is a line drawing in encapsulated PostScript format Ifa file extension is not specified one is appended automatically to the file name The PRINT PARTIAL option allows you to specify aSTART and END state number To print a straight TIFF not BTIF file you must use the print screen command and copy the file to a disk A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the form NNNNNNNNNN when the file resides in the present working directory or a string of up to 64 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the forms NNNNNNNN NNN or NAME_DIR FILENAME when the file does not reside in the present working directory An integer specifying a state number This instruction prints the screen to the printer OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM PRINT SCREEN This instruction prints all to a file named STATE OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM PRINT ALL DISK STATE This instruction prints partial data to a file named LIST OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM PRINT PARTIAL 9 30 DISK list SYSTem PRINt SCReen ALL The PRINt query sends the screen or listing buffer data over the current CONTROLLER communication interface to the controller 11 10 Example Command lt block_data gt lt block_length_ specifier gt lt length
286. ionla gt AND lt expressionlb gt lt expressionla_term gt lt expressionla_term gt OR lt expressionla_term gt lt expressionla_term gt AND lt expressionla_term gt lt expression2a gt lt expression2b gt lt expression2c gt lt expression2d gt lt expressionlb_term gt lt expressionlb_term gt OR lt expressionlb_term gt lt expressionlb_term gt AND lt expressionlb_term gt lt expression2e gt lt expression2f gt lt expression2g gt lt expression2h gt lt term3a gt lt term3b gt lt term3a gt lt boolean_op gt lt term3b gt lt term3c gt lt range3a gt lt term3c gt lt boolean_op gt lt range3a gt lt term3d gt lt term3e gt lt timer3a gt lt term3e gt lt boolean_op gt lt timer3a gt lt term3f gt lt term3g gt lt term3f gt lt boolean_op gt lt term3g gt lt term3g gt lt range3b gt lt term3g gt lt boolean_op gt lt range3b gt lt term3i gt AND NAND OR NOR XOR NXOR 16 7 lt term3a gt lt term3b gt lt term3c gt lt term3d gt lt term3e gt lt term3f gt lt term3g gt lt term3h gt lt term3i gt lt term3j gt lt range3a gt lt range3b gt lt timer3a gt lt timer3b gt Example STRigger STRace Subsystem Qualifier A OTA B OTB OTC D OTD OTE F OTF
287. is lt function gt lt white_space gt lt data gt lt terminator gt RMODE SINGLE lt terminator gt Compound Command Header Compound command headers are a combination of two or more program keywords The first keyword selects the subsystem and the last keyword selects the function within that subsystem Sometimes you may need to list more than one subsystem before being allowed to specify the function The keywords within the compound header are separated by colons For example to execute a single function within a subsystem use the following lt subsystem gt lt function gt lt white_space gt lt data gt lt terminator gt SYSTEM LONGFORM ON To traverse down one level of a subsystem to execute a subsystem within that subsystem use the following lt subsystem gt lt subsystem gt lt function gt lt white_space gt lt data gt lt terminator gt MMEMORY LOAD CONFIG FILE Example Introduction to Programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Duplicate Keywords Common Command Header Common command headers control IEEE 488 2 functions within the logic analyzer such as clear status The syntax is lt command header gt lt terminator gt No white space or separator is allowed between the asterisk and the command header CLS is an example of acommon command header Combined Commands in the Same Subsystem To execute more than one function within the same subsystem
288. is guide for the formats and types of data returned from queries The following example shows logic analyzer data being returned to a string variable with headers off 10 OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM HEADER OFF 20 DIM Rang 30 30 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM RANGE 40 ENTER XXX Rang 50 PRINT Rang 60 END After the program runs the controller displays 1 00000E 05 Numeric Base Most numeric data will be returned in the same base as shown onscreen When the prefix B precedes the returned data the value is in the binary base Likewise 0 is the octal base and H is the hexadecimal base If no prefix precedes the returned numeric data then the value is in the decimal base Numeric Variables If your host language can convert from ASCII to a numeric format then you can use numeric variables Turning off the response headers will help you avoid accidentally trying to convert the header into a number The following example shows logic analyzer data being returned to a numeric variable 10 OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM HEADER OFF 20 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM RANGE 30 ENTER XXX Rang 40 PRINT Rang 50 END Introduction to Programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Definite Length Block Response Data This time the format of the number such as whether or not exponential no
289. ition based on the time interval between the X marker and the O marker In repetitive runs when the time specification is met the oscilloscope stops acquiring data and the advisory Stop condition satisfied is displayed on screen a real number specifying the time in seconds between the X and O markers OUTPUT XXX MARKER RUNTIL LT 1MS MARKer RUNTi1 The RUNTil query will return the current Run Until Time X O setting MARKer RUNTil OFF LT lt time gt GT lt time gt INRange lt time gt lt time gt OUTRange lt time gt lt time gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MARKER RUNTIL 32 11 Command Example Query Returned Format lt time_value gt Example MARKer Subsystem SHOW SHOW MARKer SHOW SAMPle MARKer The SHOW command allows you to select either SAMPle rate or MARKer data when markers are enabled to appear on the oscilloscope menus above the waveform area The SAMPle rate or MARKer data appears on the channel trigger display and auto measure menus Marker data is always present on the marker menu While sample rate data is only present on the marker menu when time markers are turned off OUTPUT XXX MARKER SHOW MARKER TAVerage MARKer TAVerage The TAVerage query returns the average time between the X and O markers If there is no valid data the query returns 9 9E37 MARKER TAVERAGE lt time_value gt lt NL gt
290. its own interface select code This code is used by the controller to direct commands and communications to the proper interface The default is always 7 for GPIB controllers Instrument Address Selects the Instrument Each instrument on the GPIB port must have a unique instrument address between decimals O and 30 The device address passed with the program message must include not only the correct instrument address but also the correct interface select code Example CAUTION Programming Over GPIB Local Remote and Local Lockout For example if the instrument address is 4 and the interface select code is 7 the instruction will cause an action in the instrument at device address 704 DEVICE ADDRESS Interface Select Code x 100 Instrument Address Local Remote and Local Lockout The local remote and remote with local lockout modes may be used for various degrees of front panel control while a program is running The logic analyzer will accept and execute bus commands while in local mode and the front panel will also be entirely active Ifthe Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer is in remote mode the logic analyzer will go from remote to local with any front panel activity In remote with local lockout mode all controls except the power switch are entirely locked out Local control can only be restored by the controller Cycling the power will restore local control but this will
291. k at time of acquisition 1 byte RTC hour 0 through 23 at time of acquisition 1 byte RTC minutes at time of acquisition 1 byte RTC seconds at time of acquisition 27 9 DATA and SETup Commands Acquisition Data Description Acquisition Data Description The acquisition data section consists of a variable number of bytes depending on the acquisition mode and the tag setting The data is grouped in rows of bytes with one sample from each pod in a single row Model Clock Pod Bytes Data Bytes Total Bytes Per Row 1672G 4 bytes 8 bytes 12 bytes 1670G 71E 4 bytes 16 bytes 20 bytes The sequence of pod data within a row is the same as shown above for the number of valid rows per pod starting at byte 229 Agilent 1672G configuration has the following data arrangement per row lt not used gt lt clk pod gt lt pod 4 gt lt pod 3 gt lt pod 2 gt lt pod 1 gt Agilent 1670G and Agilent 1671G configurations have the following data arrangement per row lt not used gt lt clk gt lt pod 8 gt lt pod 7 gt lt pod 6 gt lt pod 5 gt lt pod 4 gt lt pod 3 gt lt pod 2 gt lt pod 1 gt If the data block is unloaded without first using the DBLock command to specify UNPacked data this data block description does not apply Unused pods always have data but it is invalid and should be ignored The depth of the data array is equal to the pod with the greatest number of rows of valid data starting at byte 229
292. kard Company Publication number 01670 97021 March 2002 Printed in Malaysia Edition dates are as follows 01670 97013 January 2000 New editions are complete revisions of the manual Many product updates do not require manual changes and manual corrections may be done without accompanying product changes Therefore do not expect a one to one correspondence between product updates and manual updates
293. kxkxkxkkkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkkkxkkkxkkxkxkkkxkkxkxkkkxkkxkxkkkkkxkkx k Name Machine 1 TIMING configure Machine 1 as a timing analyzer and assign pod 1 to Machine 1 PUT 707 MACH1 NAME TIMING PUT 707 MACH1 TYPE TIMING PUT 707 MACH1 ASSIGN 1 KEKKK KK KK KK KKK KKK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK FH FH A AK AAA RA AAA KK KKK Make a label COUNT give the label a positive polarity and assign the lower 8 bits TPUT 707 MACHINE1 TFORMAT REMOVE ALL TPUT 707 MACH1 TFORMAT LABEL COUNT POS 0 0 B0000000011111111 KAKKKKKXKKKKKKKKX KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK ARA FH AH AK A AAA AAA AA Specify FF hex for resource term A which is the default trigger term for the timing analyzer TPUT 707 MACH1 TTRACE H ERM A COUNT fHEFE KHAKKKKKXKKKKKKKAKX KK KKKKAK KK KARA AAA RARA KK KK AAA KARA AAA FH A AK A AAA Remove any previously inserted labels insert the COUNT label change the seconds per division to 100 ns and display the waveform menu 43 3 WWW Ww io 0 HO Ss o KB OB DBD ds DB DB ds Ba COO WMATA UBRWNE anu N e 01 w ER 0 I IR III I I E I IE a a gl Doe 575 580 595 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 17 lt 2 A 9 OS 9 5 4123 59 925 2 Programming Examples Making a Timing Analyzer Measurement PUT 707 MACH1 TWAVEFORM REMOVE
294. l CHANnel lt N gt PROBe lt atten gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX CHANNEL1 PROBE 30 7 Command lt N gt lt range gt Example Query Returned Format Example CHANnel Subsystem RANGe RANGe CHANnel lt N gt RANGe lt range gt The RANGe command defines the full scale 4x Volts Div vertical axis of the selected channel The values for the RANGe command are dependent on the current probe attenuation factor for the selected channel The allowable range for a probe attenuation factor of 1 1 is 16 mV to 40 V Fora larger probe attenuation factor multiply the range limit by the probe attenuation factor 112 16 mV to 40 V for a probe attenuation factor of 1 1 OUTPUT XXX CHANNEL1 RANGE 4 8 CHANne1 lt N gt RANGe The RANGe query returns the current range setting CHANnel lt N gt RANGe lt range gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX CHANNEL1 RANGE 30 8 CHANnel Subsystem TTL TTL Command CHANnel lt N gt TTL The TTL command sets the vertical range offset and trigger level for the selected input channel for optimum viewing of TTL signals TTL values are Range 6 0 V 1 50 V per division Offset 2 5 V Trigger Level 1 62 V lt N gt 112 Example OUTPUT XXX CHANNEL1 TTL To return to Preset User change the CHANnel RANGe CHANel OFFSet or TRIGger LEVel value 30 9 30 10 31 DISPlay Subsyste
295. l number max_time real number start_pattern lt pattern gt end_pattern lt pattern gt interval_num an integer from 0 to 7 pattern B 0 1 0 011 1213 4 51617 H O 1 2 3 4 5 61718 9 AIBICIDIE F 0111213 41516171819 25 6 SPA Subsystem MODE MODE Command SPA 1 2 MOD T OVERView HISTogram TINTerval The MODE command selects which menu to display State Overview State Histogram or Time Interval A query returns the current menu mode Example OUTPUT XXX SPA1 MODE OVERView OUTPUT XXX SPA2 MODE HISTogram OUTPUT XXX SPA1 MODE TINTerval Query SPA 1 2 MODE Returned Format SPA 1 2 MODE OVERView HISTogram TINTerval lt NL gt g Example 10 DIM String 100 20 OUTPUT XXX SELECT 1 30 OUTPUT XXX SPA1 MODE 40 ENTER XXX String 50 PRINT String 60 END 25 7 Query Returned Format lt bucket_num gt lt number gt Example SPA Subsystem OVERView BUCKet OVERView BUCKet SPA 1 2 OVERVIew S T ZE BUCKet NUMBe r lt bucke t_num gt The OVERView BUCKet query returns data relating to the State Overview measurement You specify SIZE for width of each bucket NUMBer for number of buckets or lt bucket_num gt for the number of hits in the specified bucket number SPA 1 2 0V lt n
296. lapped commands for the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzers are STARt and STOP Response Generation IEEE 488 2 defines two times at which query responses may be buffered The first is when the query is parsed by the instrument and the second is when the controller addresses the instrument to talk so that it may read the response The Agilent 1670G series logic analyzers will buffer responses to a query when it is parsed Syntax Diagrams At the beginning of each chapter in Parts 2 and 3 Commands is a syntax diagram showing the proper syntax for each command All characters contained in a circle or oblong are literals and must be entered exactly as shown Words and phrases contained in rectangles are names of items used with the command and are described in the accompanying text of each command Each line can only be entered from one direction as indicated by the arrow on the entry line Any combination of commands and arguments that can be generated by following the lines in the proper direction is syntactically correct An argument is optional if there is a path around it When there is a rectangle which contains the word space a white space character must be entered White space is optional in many other places XXX lt NL gt Programming and Documentation Conventions Notation Conventions and Definitions Notation Conventions and Definitions The following conventions are used in this manual when describing progr
297. lated machines and modules The details of the WLISt subsystem are in chapter 14 OUTPUT XXX WLIST OTIME 40 0E 6 11 SYSTem Subsystem Introduction SYSTem subsystem commands control functions that are common to the entire Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer including formatting query responses and enabling reading and writing to the advisory line of the instrument The command parser in the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer is designed to accept programs written for the 16500 logic analysis system with an 16550A logic analyzer module Refer to figure 11 1 and table 11 1 for the System Subsystem commands syntax diagram and parameter values The SYSTem Subsystem commands are e DATA e DSP e ERRor e HEADer e LONGform e PRINt e SETup SYSTem Subsystem Figure 11 1 99 system gt Y DATA gt space ee block data a DATA a DSP gt space m string gt ERRor gt space STRing LM HEADer space OFFIO gt ON 1 HE ADer gt LONGform space OFFIO gt ON 1 LONGform gt m PRINI Je space Screen gt C gt Disk pathname EPS O DISK pathname msus m O as gt gt pathname gt PRIN space SCReen gt setup gt space Hm block_data
298. le C or double quotes String parameters representing labels are case sensitive For instance the labels Bus A and bus a are unique and should not be used indiscriminately Also pay attention to the presence of spaces because they act as legal characters just like any other So the labels In and In are also two different labels Keyword data In many cases a parameter must be a keyword The available keywords are always included with the instruction s syntax definition When sending commands either the longform or shortform if one exists may be used Uppercase and lowercase letters may be mixed freely When receiving responses upper case letters will be used exclusively The use of longform or shortform in a response depends on the setting you last specified via the SYSTem LONGform command see chapter 11 Example Introduction to Programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Selecting Multiple Subsystems Selecting Multiple Subsystems You can send multiple program commands and program queries for different subsystems on the same line by separating each command with a semicolon The colon following the semicolon enables you to enter a new subsystem lt instruction header gt lt data gt lt instruction header gt lt data gt lt terminator gt Multiple commands may be any combination of simple compound and common commands MACHINE1 ASSIGN2 SYSTEM HEADERS ON
299. lected source OUTPUT XXX M PERio d lt real number gt ISetime lt real number gt ALLtime lt real number gt REQuency lt real number gt wIDth lt real number gt wIDth lt real number gt 1 12 MEASure ALL R F F P N VPP lt real number gt VA P Plitude lt real number gt REShoot lt real number gt OVERshoot lt real number gt lt NL gt EASUR E SOURC F CHANN ELI ALL If a parameter cannot be measured the instrument responds with 9 9E37 33 4 Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example MEASure Subsystem FALLtime FALLtime MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt FALLtime The FALLtime query makes a fall time measurement on the selected channel The measurement is made between the 90 to the 10 voltage point of the first falling edge displayed on screen If a parameter cannot be measured the instrument responds with 9 9E37 MEASure FALLtime lt value gt lt NL gt 112 time in seconds between the 90 and 10 voltage points of the first falling edge displayed on the screen OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOUR CHAN2 FALLTIME FREQuency MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt FREQuency The FRE ency query makes a frequency measurement on the selected channel The measurement is ma
300. les 43 Programming Examples Introduction This chapter contains short usable and tested program examples that cover the most asked for cases HP BASIC 6 2 Making a timing analyzer measurement Making a state analyzer measurement Making a state compare analyzer measurement Transferring logic analyzer configuration between the logic analyzer and the controller Checking for measurement completion Sending queries to the logic analyzer 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 0 J004a NR EA Y TES Zu ES A ES SL AS Ze E ES ES E ED IAS EAS 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 OU I OU OU OU I OU OU I OU Programming Examples Making a Timing Analyzer Measurement Making a Timing Analyzer Measurement This program sets up the logic analyzer to make a simple timing analyzer measurement This example can be used with the E2433 Logic Analyzer Training Board to acquire and display the output of the ripple counter It can also be modified to make any timing analyzer measurement kk kk TIMING ANALYZER EXAMPLE kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkkxkkk kxx kxx for the Agilent 1670G Logic Analyzer kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkkxkkkxkkxkxkkkxkkxkxkkkxkxkxkkkxkkkxkxkx Select the module slot in which the Agilent 1670G is installed TPUT 707 SELECT 1 kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkx
301. llowing cable supports this configuration e 13242G DB 25 M to DB 25 M 5 meter Figure 3 3 25 pin M 25 pin M e gt 2 gt 3 3 2 4 m 3 5 lt 20 6 q al m 8 q 4 12 4 19 11 e 19 gt 12 20 gt gt gt 6 54600M24 25 pin M to 25 pin M Cable 3 7 Figure 3 4 Programming Over RS 232 C Configuring the Logic Analyzer Interface Figure 3 4 shows the schematic of a 9 pin female to 25 pin male cable The following cables support this configuration e 24542G DB 9 F to DB 25 M 3 meter e 24542H DB 9 F to DB 25 M 3 meter shielded e 45911 60009 DB 9 F to DB 25 M 1 5 meter 9 pin F 25 pin M 4 2 3 gt 3 4 gt 5 ae 6 o q m 6 20 8 q 7 m 3 54600M25 9 pin F to 25 pin M Cable Configuring the Logic Analyzer Interface The RS 232 C menu field in the System External I O menu allows you access to the RS 232 C Settings menu where the RS 232 C interface is configured If you are not familiar with how to configure the RS 232 C interface refer to the Agilent 1670G Series Logic Analyzers User s Guide 3 8 Programming Over RS 232 C Interface Capabilities Interface Capabilities The baud rate stopbits parity protocol and databits must be configured exactly the same for both the controller and the logic analyzer to properly communicate over the RS 232 C bus The RS 232 C interface capabilities of the Agilent 1670G series logic ana
302. lock_data gt ASCII block containing lt filename gt lt file_type gt lt file_description gt Example This example is for sending the CATALOG ALL query OUTPUT 707 MMEMORY CATALOG ALL This example is for sending the CATALOG query without the ALL option Keep in mind if you do not use the ALL option with a DOS disk each filename entry will be truncated at 51 characters OUTPUT 707 MMEMORY CATALOG CD Change Directory Command MMEMory CD lt directory_name gt lt msus gt The CD command allows you to change the current working directory on the hard disk or a DOS flexible disk The command allows you to send path names of up to 64 characters for DOS format Separators can be either the slash or backslash character Both the slash and backslash characters are equivalent and are used as directory separators The string containing double periods represents the parent of the directory lt directory_ String of up to 64 characters for DOS disks ending in the new directory name name gt Example OUTPUT 707 MMEMory CD CHILD_DIR OUTPUT 707 MMEMory CD OUTPUT 707 MMEMory CD SYSTEM SOURCE_DIR DIR INTernal0 The slash character in DOS path names will be automatically translated to the backslash character on the disk therefore any flexible DOS disk used in the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer will be compatible in DOS computers
303. lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX TRIGGER MODE 39 11 Command lt N gt Example Query Returned Format Example Command lt N gt Example TRIGger Subsystem PATH PATH TRIGger MODE PATTern PATH CHANnel lt N gt The PATH command is used to select a trigger path for the subsequent LOGic and LEVel commands This command can only be used in the PATTern trigger mode 112 OUTPUT XXX TRIGGER PATH CHANNEL TRIGger PATH The PATH query returns the current trigger path TRIGger PATH CHANnel lt N gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX TRIGGER PATH SLOPe TRIGger MODE EDGE SOURce CHANnel lt N gt SLOPe POSitive NEGative The SLOPe command selects the trigger slope for the specified trigger source This command can only be used in the EDGE trigger mode 112 OUTPUT XXX TRIG SOUR CHAN1 SLOP POS 35 12 Query Returned Format Example Command lt N gt Example Query Returned Format Example TRIGger Subsystem SOURce TRIGger SLOPe The SLOPe query returns the slope of the current trigger source TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX TRIG SOUR CHAN1 SLOP SOURce TRIGger MODE EDGE SOURce CHANnel lt N gt The SOURce command is used to select the trigger source and is used for a
304. lt percent gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SWAVEFORM TPOSition 18 11 18 12 19 SCHart Subsystem Introduction The State Chart subsystem provides the commands necessary for programming the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer State Chart display The commands allow you to build charts of label activity using data normally found in the Listing display The chart s Y axis is used to show data values for the label of your choice The X axis can be used in two different ways In one the X axis represents states shown as rows in the State Listing display In the other the X axis represents the data values for another label When states are plotted along the X axis X and O markers are available Because the State Chart display is simply an alternative way of looking at the data in the State Listing the X and O markers can be manipulated through the SLISt subsystem Because the programming commands do not force the menus to switch you can position the markers in the SLISt subsystem and see the effects in the State Chart display The commands in the SCHart subsystem are ACCumulate e CENTer HAXis e VAXis Figure 19 1 SCHart Table 19 1 SCHart Subsystem a a ACCumulate space ON e ACCumulate gt CENTer space marker_
305. lyzer are listed below e Baud Rate 110 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 or 19 2k e Stop Bits 1 1 5 or 2 e Parity None Odd or Even e Protocol None or Xon Xoff e Data Bits 8 Protocol None With a three wire interface selecting None for the protocol does not allow the sending or receiving device to control data flow No control over the data flow increases the possibility of missing data or transferring incomplete data With an extended hardwire interface selecting None allows a hardware handshake to occur With hardware handshake the hardware signals control dataflow Xon Xoff Xon Xoff stands for Transmit On Transmit Off With this mode the receiver controller or logic analyzer controls dataflow and can request that the sender logic analyzer or controller stop dataflow By sending XOFF ASCII 19 over its transmit data line the receiver requests that the sender disables data transmission A subsequent XON ASCII 17 allows the sending device to resume data transmission Data Bits Data bits are the number of bits sent and received per character that represent the binary code of that character Characters consist of either 7 or 8 bits depending on the application The Agilent 1670G series supports 8 bit only 8 Bit Mode Information is usually stored in bytes 8 bits at a time With 8 bit mode you can send and receive data just as it is stored without the need to convert the data 3 9 See Also P
306. lyzer when to proceed to the next sequence level When this proceed qualifier is matched for either the specified time or occurrence the trigger sequence will proceed to the next sequence level In the sequence level where the trigger is specified the FIND command specifies the trigger qualifier see SEQuence command The terms A through G and l are defined by the TERM command The meaning of IN_RANGE and OUT_RANGE is determined by the RANGe command Expressions are limited to what you could manually enter through the Timing Trigger menu Regarding parentheses the syntax definitions below show only the required ones Additional parentheses are allowed as long as the meaning of the expression is not changed See figure 22 2 on page 22 11 for a detailed example integer from 1 to the number of existing sequence levels maximum 10 GT LT lt duration_time gt OCCurrence lt occurrence gt greater than less than real number from 8 ns to 5 00 seconds depending on sample period integer from 1 to 1048575 lt qualifier gt see Qualifier on page 22 6 22 14 Example Query Returned Format Example Command lt memory_length gt Example TTRigger TTRace Subsystem MLENgth OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER FIND1 ANYSTATE GT 10E 6 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER FIND3 NOTA AND NOTB OR G OCCURRENCE 10 MACHine 1 2 TTRigger FIND lt N gt
307. m Introduction The Display Subsystem is used to control the display of data from the oscilloscope Refer to Figure 31 1 for the DISPlay Subsystem Syntax Diagram The DISPlay Subsystem commands are e ACCumulate e CONNect e INSert e LABel e MINus e OVERlay e PLUS e REMove This chapter applies only to the oscilloscope option 31 2 DISPlay Subsystem Figure 31 1 CorsP tay SA ml Accumu late space OFF pi ACCumu late gt CONNec space OFF ON 1 CONNect gt INSert space lobel_id Le cbi tid ef siot LABs channel_ label str a LABe 1 m channel_ Minus Je space rede _id gt lobel_id A a slot_ Lec PLUS space i gt label_id gt slot_ eo Le OVER 1 ay gt space gr obel_id Se slot_ EG Y REM EMOME 16532517 DISPlay Subsystem Syntax Diagram 9 gt NI 2 31 3 Table 31 1 Command Example Query Returned Format Example DISPlay Subsystem ACCumulate DISPlay Parameter Values Parameter Value slot_ 1or2 1 analyzer 2 oscilloscope bit_id an integer from 0 to 31 channel_ 1or2 label_str up to five characters enclosed in single quotes making up a label name label_id a string of 1 alpha and 1 nume
308. m 1 to number of existing sequence levels 1 lt qualifier gt lt qualifier gt 1 12 400 ns to 500 seconds A B C D E F G H 1I J FB O 11X 0f011 12 13141516 171X Ef0 1112 31415 16 7 8 9 A B C D E F X 011 12131415 16171819 see Qualifier on page 16 7 integer from 0 to 100 representing percentage 4096 8192 16384 32768 65536 131072 262144 524288 1032192 16 6 lt qualifier gt lt expression gt lt expressionla gt lt expressionla_ term gt lt expressionlb gt lt expressionlb_ term gt lt expression2a gt lt expression2b gt lt expression2c gt lt expression2d gt lt expression2e gt lt expression2f gt lt expression2g gt lt boolean_op gt STRigger STRace Subsystem Qualifier Qualifier The qualifier for the state trigger subsystem can be terms A J Timer 1 and 2 and Range 1 and 2 In addition qualifiers can be the NOT boolean function of terms timers and ranges The qualifier can also be an expression or combination of expressions as shown below and figure 16 2 Complex Qualifier on page 16 11 The following parameters show how qualifiers are specified in all commands of the STRigger subsystem that use lt qualifier gt ANYSTATE NOSTATE lt expression gt lt expressionla gt lt expressionlb gt lt expressionla gt OR lt expressionlb gt lt express
309. m label name RANGE SPACE OFFIO range_num lt a oC Dae range_name Ham low_patt mm 4 on high_patt Y el 25 4 SPA Subsystem RANGE o SPACE m range num Ba TTYPe oo SPACE Gos cal interval gt autorange D wm SPACE Ca Le Je min time mal i Ds max_tine Ba H QUAL fier gt we SPACE label name gt wm start patt J end patt m I QUAL ifier Da SPACE label_name e Ie TiNTerval Je SPACE gt interval num ee min_time i gt max time H TNTerval oo SPACE gt interval num gt T STatistic gt gt SPACE TMINimum TMAXimum TAVerage TOTal TTOTal Ul interval num 01670507 SPA Subsystem Table 25 1 SPA Subsystem Parameter Values Parameter Value bucket_num 0 to number of valid buckets 1 high_patt lt pattern gt label_name a string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters low_patt lt pattern gt memory 4096 8192 16384 32768 65536 131072 262144 524288 1032192 o_patt lt pattern gt x_patt lt pattern gt range_num an integer from 0 to 10 range_name a string of up to 16 alphanumeric characters min_time rea
310. macro This name will then appear in the front panel lists and displays in place of the more generic Macro string The name cannot be used to reference the macro in programs Itis intended for use as a means to clarify or document sequence listings and displays The query returns the user defined macro name MACRo lt gt NAME lt macro_name gt a string up to six alphanumeric characters in length macro number integer 0 through 99 MACRo lt gt NAME MACRo lt gt NAME lt macro_name gt 40 8 Command Query Command syntax lt m gt lt p gt lt name gt Query syntax Returned format MACRo Subsystem PARameter PARameter The PARameter command is used to enable and name parameters for a macro The parameter name is optional and if used is for use on displays and listings only When a parameter is enabled macro calls from the sequence can pass values to the macro These values can then be used as data values in the body of the macro The query returns the current status of a parameter and its name MACRo lt m gt PARameter lt p gt ON OFF lt name gt macro number integer 0 through 99 parameter number integer 0 through 9 string up to six alphanumeric characters in length MACRo lt m gt PARameter lt p gt MACRo lt m gt PARameter lt P gt ON OFF lt name gt 40 9 Command Query MACRo Subsystem PROGram PROGram The P
311. mand lt pod_num gt lt set_hold_ value gt Example SFORmat Subsystem REMove REMove MACHine 1 2 SFORmat REMove lt name gt ALL The REMove command allows you to delete all labels or any one label for a given machine string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT REMOVE A OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT REMOVE ALL SETHold MACHine 1 2 SFORmat SETHold lt pod_num gt lt set_hold_value gt The SETHold setup hold command allows you to set the setup and hold specification for the state analyzer Even though the command requires integers to specify the setup and hold the query returns the current settings in a string For example if you send the integer 0 for the setup and hold value the query will return 3 5 0 0 ns as an ASCII string when you have one clock and one edge specified 01112131415161718 0 11213 4 516 7 8 9 representing the setup and hold values shown in Table 9 2 on the next page OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT SETHOLD 1 2 15 12 Table 15 2 Query Returned Format Example SFORmat Subsystem SETHold Setup and hold values For one clock and one edge 0 3 5 0 0 ns 1 3 0 0 5 ns 2 2 5 1 0 ns 3 2 0 1 5 ns 4 1 5 2 0 ns 5 1 0 2 5 ns 6 0 5 3 0 ns 7 0 0 3 5 ns N A N A MACHine 1 2 SFORMAT S For one clock and both edges 0 4 0 0 0 ns
312. mask for a given label in the compare listing image to compares or don t compares a string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters string of characters 82 characters maximum care don t care OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE CMASK DATA MACHine 1 2 COMPare CMASk lt label_name gt The CMASk query returns the state of the bits in the channel mask for a given label in the compare listing image MACHine 1 2 COMPare CMASk lt label_name gt lt care_spec gt Example Command Example Command COMPare Subsystem COPY OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE CMASK DATA COPY MACHine 1 2 COMPare COPY The COPY command copies the current acquired State Listing for the specified machine into the Compare Listing template It does not affect the compare range or channel mask settings OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 COMPARE COPY DATA MACHine 1 2 COMPare DATA lt label_name gt lt line_num gt lt data_pattern gt lt line_num gt lt data_pattern gt lt data_pattern gt The DATA command allows you to edit the compare listing image for a given label and state row When DATA is sent to an instrument where no compare image is defined such as at power up all other data in the image is set to don t cares Not specifying the lt label_name gt parameter allows you to write data patterns to more than one label for the given line number T
313. maximum and mean time interval measurements from the X marker to the O marker OUTPUT XXX MARKER TMODE ON MARKer TMODe The TMODe query returns the current marker mode choice MARKer TMODe lt state gt lt NL gt ON OFF AUTO OUTPUT XXX MARKER TMODE For compatibility with older systems the MMODe command query functions the same as the TMODe command query 32 14 Command Example Query Returned Format lt state gt Example MARKer Subsystem VMODe VMODe MARKer VMODe OFF O ON 1 The VMODe command allows you to select the voltage marker mode The choices are OFF or ON When OFF voltage marker measurements cannot be made When the voltage markers are turned on the A and B markers can be moved to make voltage measurements When used in conjunction with the time markers TMODe both delta t and delta v measurements are possible OUTPUT XXX MARKER VMODE OFF MARKer VMODe The VMODe query returns the current voltage marker mode choice MARKer VMODe lt state gt lt NL gt 110 1 on 0 off OUTPUT XXX MARKER VMODE 32 15 Query Returned Format lt N gt lt level gt Example Query Returned Format lt valid_runs gt lt total_runs gt Example MARKer Subsystem VOTime VOTime MARKer VOTime CHANNEL lt N gt The VOTime
314. me gt lt pattern gt The TERM command allows you to specify a pattern recognizer term in the specified machine Each command deals with only one label in the given term therefore a complete specification could require several commands Since a label can contain 32 or less bits the range of the pattern value will be between 2 1 and 0 When the value of a pattern is expressed in binary it represents the bit values for the label inside the pattern recognizer term Because the pattern parameter may contain don t cares and be represented in several bases it is handled as a string of characters rather than a number Eight of the 10 terms A through G and I are available terms H and J are not available to timing analyzers for either machine but not both simultaneously If you send the TERM command to a machine with a term that has not been assigned to that machine the error message Legal command but settings conflict is returned A B C D E F G H I J string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters FB 0 1 X 0 011121314 151617IX H 0 1 213 14 5 1617 8 9 A B C D E F X LOU TI 213 1A Sole TIJ Go se OUTPUT XXX MACHINEI OUTPUT XXX MACHINEIl un RIGGER TERM A DATA 255 RIGGER TERM B ABC BXXXX1101 n 16 21 Query Returned Format Example Command lt time_value gt Example Query Returned Forma
315. ment error Wrong data type numeric expected Numeric overflow Missing numeric argument Non numeric argument error character string or block Wrong data type character expected Wrong data type string expected Wrong data type block type D required Data overflow string or block too long Missing non numeric argument Too many arguments Argument delimiter error Invalid message unit delimiter Error Messages Execution Errors Execution Errors 200 201 202 203 211 212 221 222 232 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 Can not do generic execution error Not executable in Local Mode Settings lost due to return to local or power on Trigger ignored Legal command but settings conflict Argument out of range Busy doing something else Insufficient capability or configuration Output buffer full or overflow Mass Memory error generic Mass storage device not present No media Bad media Media full Directory full File name not found Duplicate file name Media protected Internal Errors 300 301 302 303 310 311 312 313 320 Device failure generic hardware error Interrupt fault System error Time out RAM error RAM failure hardware error RAM data loss software error Calibration data loss ROM error Error Messages Query Errors 321 ROM checksum 322 Hardware and firmware incompatible 330 Power on test failed 340 Self test fail
316. mmand The first event in the sequence will occur when the specified pattern is true for a time greater than that indicated by the trigger specification All other pattern true occurrences in the event count are independent of the pattern duration time 35 5 lt time gt Example Query Returned Format Example TRIGger Subsystem CONDition When LT ess than is selected the oscilloscope will trigger on the first transition that causes the pattern specification to be false after the pattern has been true for the number of times specified by the trigger event count DELAY command The first event in the sequence will occur when the specified pattern is true for a time less than that indicated by the trigger specification All other pattern true occurrences in the event count are independent of the pattern duration time real number between 20 ns and 160 ms OUTPUT XXX TRIG COND ENT The oscilloscope cannot be programmed for a pattern duration GT LT or RANge trigger if itis being armed by another module via Group Run or Arm In TRIGger CONDition The CONDition query returns the present condition TRIGger CONDition ENTer EXIT GT lt time gt LT lt time gt RANGe lt time gt lt time gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX TRIG COND 35 6 Command lt count gt Example Query Returned Format Example TRIGger Subsystem DELay DEL
317. mple 3 In this example the leading colon before SYSTEM tells the parser to go back to the root of the command tree The parser can then see the SYSTEM PRINT command OUTPUT XXX MMEM CATALOG SYSTEM PRINT ALL 4 7 Programming and Documentation Conventions Tree Traversal Rules Figure 4 1 SELect x X 0 Common SYSTem MMEMory INTermodule Commands xCLS BEEPer DATA AUToload DELete xESE CAPability DSP CATalog HTIMe xESR CARDcage ERRor CD INPort xIDN CESE HEADer COPY INSert xIST CESR LONGform DOWNload SKEW lt N gt xOPC EO PRINt ITialize TREE OPT LER SETup LOAD CONfig TTIMe xPRE LOCKout LOAD ASSembler xRST ENU Dir SRE ESE lt N gt S xSTB ESR lt N gt PACK xTRG RMODe PURge TST RTC PWD xWAl SELect REName SETColor STORel CONfig STARt UPLoad STOP VOLume XWINdow I I I I SFORmat STRigger SLISt SWAVeform SCHart COMPare CLOC ACQuistion COLUMN ACCumulate ACCumulate CLEar LABe BRANch CLRPattern ACQuisition CENter CMASK MASTer CLEar DATA CENter HAXis COPY MODE FIND LINE CLRPattern VAXis DATA MOPQual MLENght MODe CLRStat FIND MQUa RANGe OPATtern DELay LINE REMove SEQuence OSEarch INSert MENU SETHold STORe OSTate MLENght RANGe SLAVe TAG OTAG RANGe RUNTIl SOPQual TAKenbranch OVERlay REMove SE sQUa TCONtrol REMove TAKenbranch THReshold TER RUNTIl TPOSition TIMER TAVerage TPOSition
318. mum RR TMIN imum TNODe space OFF on Tode gt wode gt space Cl i VMODe VOT ime space channel_ gt VRUNS AT ime o space channel_ gt xAUTo gt space 16530815 Y wanuc channel_ De gt lvi eve aO gt slope MARKer Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued 32 4 MARKer Subsystem Figure 32 1 continued XAUTO ar XT IMe gt space Na marker_time XTIMe T XOTime 165328 16 MARKer Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued Table 32 1 MARKer Parameter Values Parameter Value channel _ 112 marker_time time in seconds It arg time in seconds gt arg time in seconds inrange gt time in seconds inrange_lt time in seconds level level in volts outrange_gt time in seconds outrange It time in seconds V level percentage of waveform voltage level ranging from 10 to 90 of the Vtop to Vbase voltage or a specific voltage level type ABSolute PERCent slope POSitive NEGative occurrence integer from 1 to 100 32 5 Command lt N gt lt level gt Example Query Returned Format Example MARKer Subsystem AVOLt AVOLt MARKer AVOLt CHANnel lt N gt lt level gt The AVOLt command moves the A marker to the specified voltage
319. munication and System Functions Status Reporting Error Messages Common Commands Instrument Commands Module Level Commands SYSTem Subsystem MMEMory Subsystem MACHine Subsystem WLISt Subsystem SFORmat Subsystem 111 Part 1 Part 1 consists of chapters 1 through 7 and contains general information about programming basics GPIB and RS 232 C interface requirements documentation conventions status reporting and error messages If you are already familiar with IEEE 488 2 programming and GPIB or RS 232 C you may want to just scan these chapters If you are new to programming the system you should read part 1 Chapter 1 is divided into two sections The first section Talking to the Instrument concentrates on program syntax and the second section Receiving Information from the Instrument discusses how to send queries and how to retrieve query results from the instrument Read either chapter 2 Programming Over GPIB or chapter 3 Programming Over RS 232 C for information concerning the physical connection between the Agilent Technologies 1670G series logic analyzer and your controller Chapter 4 Programming and Documentation Conventions gives an overview of all instructions and also explains the notation conventions used in the syntax definitions and examples Chapter 5 Message Communication and System Functions provides an overview of the operation of instruments that operate in compliance
320. n request are TMINimum overall minimum interval time TMAXimum overall maximum interval time TAVerage overall average interval time TOTal total number of samples TTOTal overall total time of all interval samples lt interval_number gt number of hits in given interval If TMINimum TMAXaximum TAVErage or TTOTal are not currently valid the real value 9 9E37 is returned SPA 1 2 TINTerval TMINimum TMAXimum 7 0to 7 integer number real number 10 20 30 40 50 60 DIM String 100 STatistic AVerage TTOTal lt time_number gt TOTal lt interval_number gt lt number_hits gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX SELEC OUTPUT XXX SPA1l 7 ENTER XXX String PRINT String END v TINTerval TSTatistic 3 25 25 25 26 26 SYMBol Subsystem Introduction The SYMBol subsystem contains the commands to define symbols on the controller and download them to the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer The commands in this subsystem are e BASE e PATTern e RANGe e REMove WIDTh 26 2 SYMBol Subsystem Figure 26 1 CN a gt GsvmBo Base space Na label name y Binary i gt e PATTern space gt label_name gt symbo name TD Er gt pa pattern_value RANGE space H r label_name e symbo _name He start_value ne gt stop va lye OO WIDTH space Pie lab
321. n Commands TRG Trigger Status Byte Register Bit Position 7 6 0 False Low 1 True High Bit Weight 128 64 32 Bit Name MSS ESB MAV LCL MSB Condition not used 0 instrument has no reason for service 1 instrument is requesting service 0 no event status conditions have occurred 1 an enabled event status condition has occurred 0 no output messages are ready 1 an output message is ready 0 a remote to local transition has not occurred 1 a remote to local transition has occurred not used not used 0 a module or the system has activity to report 1 no activity to report TRG Trigger TRG The TRG command has the same effect as a Group Execute Trigger GET it starts an intermodule group run If the analyzer is not configured for a group run this command has no effect OUTPUT XXX TRG 8 17 Query Returned Format lt result gt Example Table 8 7 Common Commands TST Test TST Test TOL The TST query returns the results of the power up self test The result of that test is a 9 bit mapped value which is placed in the output queue A one in the corresponding bit means that the test failed and a zero in the corresponding bit means that the test passed Refer to table 8 7 for the meaning of the bits returned by a TST query lt result gt lt NL gt An integer 0 through 511 10 OUTPUT XXX TST
322. n a single program message but you must also read them back within a single program message This can be accomplished by either reading them back into a string variable or into multiple numeric variables You can read the result of the query SYSTEM HEADER LONGFORM into the string variable Results with the command ENTER XXX Results When you read the result of multiple queries into string variables each response is separated by a semicolon The response of the query SYSTEM HEADER LONGFORM with HEADER and LONGFORM turned on is SYSTEM HEADER 1 SYSTEM LONGFORM 1 If you do not need to see the headers when the numeric values are returned then you could use numeric variables When you are receiving numeric data into numeric variables the headers should be turned off Otherwise the headers may cause misinterpretation of returned data The following program message is used to read the query SSYSTEM HEADERS LONGFORM into multiple numeric variables ENTER XXX Resultl Result2 1 21 Introduction to Programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Instrument Status Instrument Status Status registers track the current status of the logic analyzer By checking the instrument status you can find out whether an operation has been completed whether the instrument is receiving triggers and more Chapter 6 Status Reporting explains how to check the stat
323. n time between stored states When MSTats is selected the markers are placed on patterns but the readouts will be time statistics OFF PATTern TIME MSTats OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST MMODE TIME MACHine 1 2 TLISt MMODe The MMODe query returns the current marker mode selected MACHine 1 2 TLISt MMODe lt marker_mode gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST MMODE 24 10 Command Example Query Returned Format Example TLISt Subsystem OCONdition OCONdition MACHine 1 2 TLISt OCONdition ENTering EXITing The OCONdition command specifies where the O marker is placed The O marker can be placed on the entry or exit point of the OPATtern when in the PATTern marker mode OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST OCONDITION ENTERING MACHine 1 2 TLISt OCONdition The OCONdition query returns the current setting MACHine 1 2 TLISt OCONdition ENTering EXITing lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TLIST OCONDITION 24 11 Command lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt Example Query Returned Format Example TLISt Subsystem OPATtern OPATtern MACHine 1 2 TLISt OPATtern lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt The OPATtern command allows you to construct a pattern recognizer term for the O Marker which is then used with the OSEarch criteria when moving
324. nd the command syntax Subsystems There are 17 subsystems in this instrument In the command tree figure 4 1 they are shown as branches with the node above showing the name of the subsystem Only one subsystem may be selected at a time At power on the command parser is set to the root of the command tree therefore no subsystem is selected The 17 subsystems in the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzers are e SYSTem controls some basic functions of the instrument e MMEMory provides access to the disk drives e INTermodule provides access to the Intermodule bus IMB e MACHine provides access to analyzer functions and subsystems e WLISt allows access to the mixed timing state functions e SFORmat allows access to the state format functions e STRigger allows access to the state trigger functions e SLISt allows access to the state listing functions e SWAVeform allows access to the state waveforms functions e SCHart allows access to the state chart functions e COMPare allows access to the compare functions e TFORmat allows access to the timing format functions Example Programming and Documentation Conventions Program Examples e TTRigger allows access to the timing trigger functions e TWAVeform allows access to the timing waveforms functions e TLISt allows access to the timing listing functions e SYMBol allows access to the symbol specification functions e SPA all
325. ne 1 2 STRigger FIND lt N gt lt proceed_qualifier gt lt occurrence gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER FIND4 MLENgth MACHine 1 2 STRigger MLENgth lt memory_length gt The MLength command allows you to specify the analyzer memory depth Valid memory depths range from a range from 4096 states or samples through the maximum system memory depth minus 8192 states Memory depth is affected by acquisition mode Ifthe lt memory_depth gt value sent with the command is not a legal value the closest legal setting will be used 4096 8192 16384 32768 65536 131072 262144 524288 1032192 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER MLENGTH 262144 MACHine 1 2 STRigger MLENgth The MLENgth query returns the current analyzer memory depth selection MACHine 1 2 STRigger MLENgth lt memory_length gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER MLENGTH 16 14 Command lt label_name gt lt start_pattern gt lt stop_pattern gt lt N gt Example STRigger STRace Subsystem RANGe RANGe MACHine 1 2 STRigger RANGe lt N gt lt label_name gt lt start_pattern gt lt stop_pattern gt The RANGe command allows you to specify a range recognizer term for the specified machine Since a range can only be defined across one label and since a label must contain 32 or fewer bits the value of the start pattern or stop pattern will be
326. ne_number gt label name I LINE space H r ine_num_mid_screen gt MODE gt space OFF i gt STATe TIME STats MMODe gt Par tern gt space H r label_name gt gt label_pattern e OPAT tern gt space H label_name gt dl OSE arch J space H occurrence TRIGger gt XMARker H r 0SEarch gt Y A 16550821 SLISt Subsystem Syntax Diagram 17 3 Figure 17 1 continued SLISt Subsystem Y H 0STate OTAG gt space 1 time_value state_value H OVERIoy o space col_num me mod_num BEER matinal mal gt gt gt label_name pe REMove RUNTII D gt space gt run_until_spec gt RUNTII TAVerage TMAXimum VRUNS XOTAG AUTO ED RET Y SLISt Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued 16555507 17 4 Figure 17 1 continued SLISt Subsystem t SIE A XOTime Be APA Ttern space gt label_name nae Ds label_pattern APA Ttern gt space gt lobel_nome gt SE arch Da space j occurrence ne p gt A Ie xSEarch gt e XSTate
327. nge LINear 4 0E 3 55 6E 2 INTerval AUTorange LOGarithmic 3 3E 1 8 6E 2 TINTerval QUALifier SPA 1 2 TINTerval QOUALifier lt label_name gt lt start_pattern gt lt end_pattern gt The TINTerval QUALifier command defines the start and stop patterns for a specified label The start and stop patterns determine the time windows for collecting data A query returns the currently defined start and stop patterns for a given label string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters B O 1 O O 1 2 3 4 5 617 1 H 011 213 4151617 8 9 JAIBICIDIEIF 0 1 2 3 4 15 617 8 9 25 22 lt end_pattern gt Example Query Returned Format Example SPA Subsystem TINTerval QUALifier B O 1 0 011121314151617 H 0 11 213 4 151617 8 9 AIB IC D 01112131415161718 9 td H OUTPUT XXX SPA1 TINTerval QUALifier A 0231 0455 OUTPUT XXX SPA2 TINTerval QUALifier DATA H3A 255 SPA 1 2 TINTerval QUALifier lt label_name gt SPA 1 2 TINTerval QUALifier lt label_name gt lt start_pattern gt lt end_pattern gt lt NL gt 10 DIM String 100 20 OUTPUT XXX SELEC TY 30 OUTPUT XXX SPA1 TINTerval QUALifier A 40 ENTER XXX String 50 PRINT String 60 END 25 23 Command lt interval_ number gt lt min_time g
328. ns 6 4 6 5 Block data 1 6 1 20 27 4 Block length specifier 27 4 Block length specifier 11 5 11 11 27 13 Block length specifier gt 27 5 Braces 4 5 BRANch command query 16 10 16 11 22 9 22 10 22 11 C Cable RS 232C 3 3 CAPability command 9 7 CARDcage 9 8 CATalog command 12 8 CD command 12 9 CENTer command 18 6 23 9 CESE command 9 9 CESR command 9 10 chart display 19 2 CLEar command 16 12 20 5 22 12 Clear To Send CTS 3 5 CLOCk command query 15 6 CLRPattern command 17 8 18 6 23 10 24 8 CLRStat command 18 7 23 10 CMASk command query 20 5 CME 6 5 COLumn command query 17 7 24 7 Combining commands 1 9 Comma 1 12 Command 1 6 1 16 CLS 8 5 ESE 8 6 OPC 8 11 PRE 8 13 RST 8 14 SRE 8 15 TRG 8 17 WAI 8 19 ACCumulate 18 5 19 4 23 8 ACQMode 21 5 ACQuisition 16 9 22 9 ARM 13 5 ARMLine 10 5 ASSign 13 6 AUToload 12 7 BASE 26 5 BEEPer 9 6 BRANch 16 10 22 9 CD change directory 12 9 CENTer 18 6 23 9 CESE 9 9 CLEar 20 5 CLOCK 15 6 CLRPattern 17 8 18 6 23 10 24 8 CLRStat 18 7 23 10 CMASk 20 5 COLumn 17 7 24 7 COMPare 20 4 COPY DATA 12 10 20 6 11 5 20 6 27 4 DBLock 10 5 DELay 14 5 18 7 23 10 DOWNload 12 11 DSP 11 6 EDGE EOI 9 FIND HAXis HEAD HISTo HISTo IISTo IISTo IISTo 4 I 4 I ib I LABel 22 13 11 16 13 22 14 19 5 er 1
329. ntax Diagram cont prog_line_num an integer specifying the program line number macro_name character string up to 6 characters in length macro number an integer 0 through 99 specifying macro to act on param_name character string up to 6 characters in length param_number an integer 0 through 9 repeat count an integer from 1 through 20000 wait_event A B C D IMB label_name character string up to 6 characters in length label_value data entry in one of the following forms B01 for binary 001234567 for octal 4H012345679ABCDEF for hexadecimal 01234567839 for decimal PARameter lt gt for passed in macro parameter 0 through 9 40 4 Command MACRo Subsystem INSert INSert The INSert command is the basic command used to build a pattern generator macro This command is used to insert or add a macro statement after the specified line number The first parameter is the line number The instruction and or data will be inserted in the macro after the specified line number You cannot insert a line just before the last data row Macro lines cannot be inserted after the MACRO END line If the line number specified is greater than the MACRO END line number the line will be inserted at the last legal location in the macro The second parameter is the instruction for this macro line The available instructions are described below The third parameter is an opti
330. nts and channel polarity for that label A maximum of 32 bits can be assigned to a label In half channel mode only pods one and three are used FORMat LABel lt label name gt lt polarity gt lt channel assignment gt lt channel assignment gt string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters polarity of the channel outputs NEGative or POSitive 38 5 FORMat Subsystem LABel lt channel a string in one of the following forms assignment gt BOl for binary 4001234567 for octal H0123456789ABCDEF for hexadecimal 10123456789 for decimal Example Full channel mode all bits on pod 4 OUTPUT XXX FORMAT LABEL DATA POS 255 255 0 0 Example Half channel mode all bits on pods 3 and 5 OUTPUT XXX FORMAT LABEL STATUS NEG 15 255 0 Query Syntax FORMat LABel lt label name gt Returned Format FORMat LABel lt label name gt lt polarity gt lt channel assignment gt lt channel assignment gt lt NL gt Example 10 DIM La 100 20 OUTPUT XXX FORMAT LABEL A 30 ENTER XXX La 40 PRINT Las 50 END This example queries and prints the definition of label A 38 6 Command syntax Query syntax Returned format FORMat Subsystem MODe MODe The MODe command is used to specify either FULL or HALF channel output mode Half channel mode allows a higher output data
331. ny subsequent SLOPe and LEVel commands This command can only be used in the EDGE trigger mode Itis the equivalent to the PATH command for the PATTern trigger mode 112 OUTPUT XXX TRIG SOUR CHAN1 TRIGger SOURce The SOURce query returns the current trigger source TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt N gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX TRIGGER SOURCE 35 13 35 14 36 WAVeform Subsystem Introduction The commands of the Waveform subsystem are used to transfer waveform data from the oscilloscope to a controller The waveform record is actually contained in two portions the waveform data and preamble The waveform data is the actual data acquired for each point when a DIGitize command is executed The preamble contains the information for interpreting waveform data Data in the preamble includes number of points acquired format of acquired data average count and the type of acquired data The preamble also contains the X and Yincrements origins and references for the acquired data for translation to time and voltage values The values set in the preamble are based on the settings of the variables in the Acquire Waveform Channel and Timebase subsystems The Acquire subsystem determines the acquisition type and the average count the Waveform subsystem sets the number of points and format mode for sending waveform data over the remote interface and the Channel and Timebase subsystems set all th
332. o construct a pattern recognizer term for the O Marker which is then used with the OSEarch criteria when moving the marker on patterns Because this command deals with only one label at a time a complete specification could require several invocations When the value of a pattern is expressed in binary it represents the bit values for the label inside the pattern recognizer term In whatever base is used the value must be between 0 and JA 1 since a label may not have more than 32 bits Because the lt label_pattern gt parameter may contain don t cares it is handled as a string of characters rather than a number string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters B O 1 X O OILIZI3Z141516171X H 0 1 21314 151617 8 9 JAIBICIDIEIF X 011121314151617 819 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST OPATTERN DATA 255 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST OPATTERN ABC BXXXX1101 17 11 Query Returned Format Example Command lt occurrence gt lt origin gt Example SLISt Subsystem OSEarch MACHine 1 2 SLISt OPATtern lt label_name gt The OPATtern query returns the pattern specification for a given label name MACHine 1 2 SLISt OPATtern lt label_name gt lt label_pattern gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST OPATTERN A OSEarch MACHine 1 2 SLISt OSEarch lt occurrence gt lt origin
333. oRrMat space FORMat POINts Mm PREamble Record gt space Full WINDow RECord I S0URce gt space H r channel_ SOURce SPERiod Y WAVeform Subsystem Syntax Diagram 36 6 Figure 36 3 continued Y WAVeform Subsystem Data Conversion pa XINCr ement m XORI gin pa XREF erence pa YINCrement A YORIgin e YREF erence WAVeform Subsystem Syntax Diagram Continued 16530 SX06 Table 36 1 WAVeform Parameter Values Parameter Value channel_ 112 36 7 Query Returned Format lt count gt Example Query Returned Format lt N gt Example See Also WAVeform Subsystem COUNt COUNt WAVe fo rm COUNt The COUNt query returns the count last specified in the ACQuire Subsystem WAVeform COUNt lt count gt lt NL gt 21418116 32 64 128 256 OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM COUNT DATA WAVe form SOURce CHANnel lt N gt DATA The DATA query returns the waveform record stored in a specified channel buffer The WAVeform SOURce command is used to select the specified channel The data is transferred based on the FORMAT BYTE WORD or ASCII chosen and the RECORD specified FULL or WINDOW Since WAVeform DATA is a query it cannot be used to send a waveform record back to the scope from the controller If a wavefo
334. ocol when connecting the logic analyzer AGILENT 1670 SERIES REAR PANEL HP AGILENT 98628 INTERFACE CARD 13242N 5061 4216 MALE TO MALE DCE OPT 002 FEMALE TO FEMALE 01670814 Cable Example HP Vectra Personal Computers and Compatibles Figures 3 2 through 3 4 give examples of three cables that will work for the extended interface with hardware handshake Keep in mind that these cables should work if your computer s serial interface supports the four common RS 232 C handshake signals as defined by the RS 232 C standard The four common handshake signals are Data Carrier Detect DCD Data Terminal Ready DTR Clear to Send CTS and Ready to Send RTS Figure 3 2 shows the schematic of a 25 pin female to 25 pin male cable The following cables support this configuration e 17255D DB 25 F to DB 25 M 1 2 meter e 17255F DB 25 F to DB 25 M 1 2 meter shielded In addition to the female to male cables with this configuration a male to male cable 1 2 meters in length is also available e 17255M DB 25 M to DB 25 M 1 2 meter 3 6 Programming Over RS 232 C Cable Examples Figure 3 2 2o pin F 25 pin M e m 2 gt 3 3 2 5 lt 20 6 al m 20 i Be 5 6 54600M26 25 pin F to 25 pin M Cable Figure 3 3 shows the schematic of a 25 pin male to 25 pin male cable 5 meters in length The fo
335. of data starting at byte 591 for each pod Bytes 173 through 228 are unused Bytes 229 through 232 contain the number of valid rows of data for pod 8 Bytes 233 through 236 contain the number of valid rows of data for pod 7 Bytes 237 through 240 contain the number of valid rows of data for pod 6 Bytes 241 through 244 contain the number of valid rows of data for pod 5 Bytes 245 through 248 contain the number of valid rows of data for pod 4 Bytes 249 through 252 contain the number of valid rows of data for pod 3 Bytes 253 through 256 contain the number of valid rows of data for pod 2 Bytes 257 through 260 contain the number of valid rows of data for pod 1 88 bytes The trace point location for each pod This byte group is organized in the same way as the data rows starting at byte 173 above These numbers are base zero numbers which start from the first sample stored for a specific pod For example if bytes 341 and 344 contain the value 101008 the data in row 101008 for that pod is the trigger There are 101008 rows of pre trigger data as shown below row 0 row 1 row 101007 row 101008 trigger point row 101009 row 101010 234 bytes Unused 2 bytes Real Time Clock RTC year at time of acquisition Year value is equal to the current year minus 1990 1 byte RTC month 1 January 12 December at time of acquisition 1 byte RTC day of the month at time of acquisition 1 byte RTC day of the wee
336. on the timing waveforms the queries return what state state acquisition memory location the marked pattern is stored in In order to have mixed mode one machine must be a state analyzer with time tagging on use MACHine lt N gt STRigger TAG TIME e DELay e INSert e LINE e OSTate e OTIMe e RANGe e REMove e XOTime e XSTate e XTIMe WLISt Subsystem Figure 14 1 C wust Dd A H DELay m space o delay_value gt ar space i label_name i gt bit_id G module_spec mae FR LINE Je space e line_num_mid_screen gt une gt OSTate gt oT e D space time value gt OTIMe gt RANGE space time_range gt RANGE gt REMove gt COME XT IMe O space e tme_value gt 3 X TIMe WLISt Subsystem Syntax Diagram 01670801 14 3 Table 14 1 Selector Example WLISt Subsystem WLISt Waveforms LISting WLISt Subsystem Parameter Values Parameter Value delay_value real number between 2500 s and 2500 s module_spec 1 bit_id integer from 0 to 31 label_name string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters line_num_mid_screen integer from 1032192 to 1032192 time_value real number time_range real number between 10 ns and 10 ks WLISt Waveforms LISting WLISt The WLISt
337. on Complete The IEEE 488 2 structure provides one technique that can be used to find out if any operation is finished The OPC command when sent to the instrument after the operation of interest will set the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register If the OPC bit and the RQS bit have been enabled a service request will be generated The commands that affect the OPC bit are the overlapped commands OUTPUT XXX SRE 32 RSE 1 lenables an OPC service request Status Byte The Status Byte contains the basic status information which is sent over the bus in a serial poll If the device is requesting service RQS set and the controller serial polls the device the RQS bit is cleared The MSS Master Summary Status bit read with STB and other bits of the Status Byte are not be cleared by reading them Only the RQS bit is cleared when read The Status Byte is cleared with the CLS common command 6 6 Figure 6 2 7 STATUS SUMMARY MESSAGES SERVICE C RQS i A ARR ARS RS BR REQUEST a 7 amp esslmv 3 2 1 0 GENERATION MSS i i y LOGICAL OR Service Request Enabling Status Reporting Serial Poll 4 READ BY SERIAL POLL STATUS BYTE REGISTER 4 READ BY STB SERVICE REQUEST ENABLE REGISTER SRE lt NRf gt 5RE 16508
338. onal instruction argument This parameter will only appear when required by a specific instruction The last parameter s are the data assignments for this line These assignments are normally made one per label starting with the left most column in the display In addition to the normal data values parameters passed in with a macro call can be inserted within the body of the macro Instructions NOOP The NOOP instruction means there is no operation for this line BREak The BREak instruction causes the execution of the sequence to stop at this line Use the RESume command to advance to the next macro line MACRo Subsystem INSert SIGNal The SIGNal instruction outputs a signal to the internal Intermodule Bus IMB This signal is used to trigger the logic analyzer WAIT The WAIT instruction causes the pattern generator to stop and wait for the occurrence of the specified event pattern s The event to be waited for by this particular command is specified by the optional instruction argument parameter Once the specified event occurs the pattern generator program proceeds to the next state Valid wait events are AIBICIDIIMB Their patterns are set using the SEQuence EPATtern command REPeat The REPeat instruction allows a group of states to be executed repetitively some number of times The repeat count is specified in the optional instruction argument parameter Inserting a REPeat instruction causes three lines to be gene
339. ontents LER LCL Event Register 9 11 LOCKout 9 12 MENU 9 12 MESE lt N gt Module Event Status Enable 9 14 MESR lt N gt Module Event Status Register 9 16 RMODe 9 18 RTC Real time Clock 9 18 SELect 9 19 SETColor 9 21 STARt 9 22 STOP 9 22 XWINdow 9 23 Module Level Commands ARMLine 10 5 DBLock 10 5 MACHine 10 6 WLISt 10 6 SYSTem Subsystem DATA 11 5 DSP Display 11 6 ERRor 11 7 HEADer 11 8 LONGform 11 9 PRINt 11 10 SETup 11 11 MMEMory Subsystem AUToload 12 7 CATalog 12 8 CD Change Directory 12 9 COPY 12 10 DOWNload 12 11 INITialize 12 13 Contents 4 Part 3 13 14 Contents LOAD CONFig 12 14 LOAD IASSembler 12 15 MKDir Make Directory 12 16 MSI Mass Storage Is 12 17 PACK 12 18 PURGe 12 18 PWD Present Working Directory 12 19 REName 12 19 STORe CONFig 12 20 UPLoad 12 21 VOLume 12 22 Logic Analyzer Commands MACHine Subsystem MACHine 13 4 ARM 13 5 ASSign 13 6 LEVelarm 13 7 NAME 13 8 REName 13 8 RESource 13 9 TYPE 13 10 WLISt Subsystem WLISt Waveforms LISting 14 4 DELay 14 5 INSert 14 6 LINE 14 7 OSTate 14 7 OTIMe 14 8 RANGe 14 8 REMove 14 9 XOTime 14 9 XSTate 14 10 XTIMe 14 10 Contents 5 15 16 17 Contents SFORmat Subsystem SFORmat 15 6 CLOCk 15 6 LABel 15 7 MASTer 15 9 MOPQual 15 10 MQUal 15 11 REMove 15 12 SETHold 15 12 SLAVe 15 14 SOPQual 15 15 SQUal 15 16 THReshold 15 16 STRigger STRace Subsystem Q
340. ows access to the System Performance Analysis SPA functions Program Examples The program examples in the following chapters and chapter 28 Programming Examples were written on an HP 9000 Series 200 300 controller using the HP BASIC 6 2 language The programs always assume a generic address for the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzers of XXX In the examples you should pay special attention to the ways in which the command and or query can be sent Keywords can be sent using either the long form or short form if one exists for that word With the exception of some string parameters the parser is not case sensitive Uppercase and lowercase letters may be mixed freely System commands like HEADer and LONGform allow you to dictate what forms the responses take but they have no affect on how you must structure your commands and queries The following commands all set the timing waveform delay to 100 ms Keywords in long form numbers using the decimal format OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM DELAY 1 Keywords in short form numbers using an exponential format OUTPUT XXX MACH1 TWAV DEL 1E 1 Keywords in short form using lowercase letters numbers using a suffix OUTPUT XXX machl twav del 100ms Inthese examples the colon shown as the first character ofthe command is optional on the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer The space between DELay and the argument is required
341. pped command An overlapped command is a command that allows execution of subsequent commands while the device operations initiated by the overlapped command are still in progress OUTPUT XXX STOP Command lt display name gt Example Instrument Commands XWINdow XWINdow XWINdow OFF O XWINdow ON 1 lt display name gt The XWINdow command opens or closes a window on an X Window display server that is a networked workstation or personal computer with X Window software The XWINdow ON command opens a window If no display name is specified the display name already stored in the logic analyzer X Window configuration menu is used Ifa display name is specified that name is used The specified display name also is stored in non volatile memory in the logic analyzer A string containing an Internet IP Address optionally followed by a display and screen specifier For example TZS e407 oi or I2 3 427 11 0 0 To open a window specifying and storing the display name OUTPUT XXX XWINDOW ON 12 3 47 11 To open a window using the stored display name OUTPUT XXX XWINDOW ON To close the X Window OUTPUT XXX XWINDOW OFF 9 23 10 Module Level Commands Introduction The logic analyzer module level commands access the global functions of the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer These commands are e ARMLine MACHine WLISt e DBLock Fig
342. pper and lower case letters are equivalent The mnemonic SINGLE has the same semantic meaning as the mnemonic single lt white space gt lt white space gt is defined to be one or more characters from the ASCII set of 0 32 decimal excluding 10 decimal NL lt white space gt is used by several instrument listening components of the syntax It is usually optional and can be used to increase the readability of a program Suffix Multiplier The suffix multipliers that the instrument will accept are shown in table 5 1 Table 5 1 lt suffix mult gt Value Mnemonic 1818 EX 1815 PE 1E12 T 1E9 G 1E6 MA 1E3 K 1E 3 M 1E 6 U 1E 9 N 1E 12 P 1E 15 F 1E 18 A Message Communication and System Functions Syntax Overview Suffix Unit The suffix units that the instrument will accept are shown in table 5 2 Table 5 2 lt suffix unit gt Suffix Referenced Unit V Volt S Second Status Reporting Introduction Status reporting allows you to use information about the instrument in your programs so that you have better control of the measurement process For example you can use status reporting to determine when a measurement is complete thus controlling your program so that it does not get ahead of the instrument This chapter describes the status registers status bytes and status bits defined by IEEE 488 2 and discusses how they are implemented in the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzers Also
343. query returns the current voltage level of the selected source at the O marker MARKer VOTime lt level gt lt NL gt 112 level in volts where the O marker crosses the waveform OUTPUT XXX MARKER VOTIME CHANNEL1 For compatibility with older systems the OVOLt query functions the same as the VOTime query VRUNS MARKer VRUNS The VRUNSs query returns the number of valid runs and the total number of runs made Valid runs are those where the edge search for both the X and O markers was successful resulting in valid marker time measurement MARKer VRUNs lt valid_runs gt lt total_runs gt lt NL gt positive integer positive integer OUTPUT XXX MARKER VRUNS 32 16 Query Returned Format lt N gt lt level gt Example MARKer Subsystem VXTime VXTime MARKer XVOLt CHANnel lt N gt The VXTime query returns the current voltage level of the selected channel at the X marker MARKer VXTime lt level gt lt NL gt 112 level in volts where the X marker crosses the waveform OUTPUT XXX MARKER VXTIME CHANNEL1 For compatibility with older systems the XVOLt query functions the same as the VXTime query 32 17 Command lt N gt lt type gt lt level gt lt slope gt lt occurrence gt Example Query Returned Format Example MARKer Subsystem XAUTo XAUTo MARKer XAU
344. query returns the line number for the state currently in the box at center screen WLISt LINE lt line_num_mid_screen gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX WLIST LINE OSTate WLISt OSTate The OSTate query returns the state where the O Marker is positioned If data is not valid the query returns 2147483647 WLISt OSTate lt state_num gt lt NL gt integer OUTPUT XXX WLIST OSTATE 14 7 Command lt time_value gt Example Query Returned Format Example Command lt time_range gt Example WLISt Subsystem OTIMe OTIMe WLISt OTIMe lt time_value gt The OTIMe command positions the O Marker on the timing waveforms in the mixed mode display If the data is not valid the command performs no action real number OUTPUT XXX WLIST OTIME 40 0E 6 WLISt OTIMe The OTIMe query returns the O Marker position in time If data is not valid the query returns 9 9E37 WLISt OTIMe lt time_value gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX WLIST OTIME RANGe WLISt RANGe lt time_value gt The RANGe command specifies the full screen time in the timing waveform menu Itis equivalent to ten times the seconds per division setting on the display The allowable values for RANGe are from 10 ns to 10 ks real number between 10 ns and 10 ks OUTPUT XXX WLIST RANGE 100E 9 WLISt Subsystem REMove Query WLISt RAN
345. query returns the oldest error from the error queue The optional parameter determines whether the error string should be returned along with the error number If no parameter is received or if the parameter is NUMeric then only the error number is returned Ifthe value of the parameter is STRing then the error should be returned in the following form lt error_number gt lt error_message string gt A complete list of error messages for the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer is shown in chapter 7 Error Messages If no errors are present in the error queue a zero No Error is returned Numeric SYSTem ERRor lt error_number gt lt NL gt String SYSTem ERRor lt error_number gt lt error_string gt lt NL gt An integer A string of alphanumeric characters Numeric 10 OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM ERROR 20 ENTER XXX Numeric String 50 OUTPUT XXX SYST ERR STRING 60 ENTER XXX String 11 7 Command Example Query Returned Format Example SYSTem Subsystem HEADer HEADer SYSTem HEADer ON 1 OFF O The HEADer command tells the instrument whether or not to output a header for query responses When HEADer is set to ON query responses will include the command header OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM HEADER ON SYSTem HEADer The HEADer query returns the current state ofthe HEADer command SYSTem HEADer
346. r found 1810 GOTO 1850 1820 PRINT No errors found 1830 1840 1850 END 43 13 HOonoau e a NS Fa DO ONO OVO OO OO O ou es UK NO EH WWWWNHNNNNNNNDN N It WNDHOVVONAUBWwN H OCW o00000000000000000000000o00o0 i kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkkxkxxkxx S kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxx xxk INITIALIZE Programming Examples Transferring the Logic Analyzer Configuration Transferring the Logic Analyzer Configuration This program uses the SYSTem SETu configuration to your controller This p query to transfer the logic analyzer program also uses the SYSTem SETup command to transfer a logic analyzer configuration from the controller back to the logic analyzer The SYSTem SETup command differs from the SYSTem DATA command because it only transfers the configuration and not the acquired data ETUP COMMAND AND QUERY EXAMPLE KKEKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK for the Agilent 1670G series GPIB DEFAULT ADDRESS KKEKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK REAL Address Address 7 ASSIGN Comm TO Address CLEAR SCR xkkkkk kkkkkk INTITIALIZE The variable Numbytes contains EN VARIABLE REAL Numbytes Numbytes 0 FOR NUMB the number of bytes in the buffer ER OF BYTES KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKK KKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK
347. r not the last byte of a reply from the instrument is to be sent with the EOI bus control line set true or not If EOI is turned off the logic analyzer will no longer be sending IEEE 488 2 compliant responses OUTPUT XXX EOI ON EOI The EOI query returns the current status of EOL EOI 1 0 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX EOI LER LCL Event Register LER The LER query allows the LCL Event Register to be read After the LCL Event Register is read it is cleared A one indicates a remote to local transition has taken place A zero indicates a remote to local transition has not taken place LER 0 1 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX LER Command Example Query Returned Format Example Command lt module gt lt menu gt Example Instrument Commands LOCKout LOCKout LOCKout ON 1 OFF O The LOCKout command locks out or restores front panel operation When this function is on all controls except the power switch are entirely locked out OUTPUT XXX LOCKOUT ON LOCKout The LOCKout query returns the current status of the LOCKout command LOCKout 0 1 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX LOCKOUT MENU MENU lt module gt lt menu gt The MENU command displays the specified menu The first parameter indicates system or analyzer The optional second parameter specifies the menu The default is 0 Table 9 5 lists the p
348. rameters assignment parameters level parameters name parameters rename parameters resource parameters type parameters state format subsystem commands state trace subsystem commands state list subsystem commands state waveform subsystem commands state chart subsystem commands compare subsystem commands timing format subsystem commands timing trace subsystem commands timing waveform subsystem commands timing listing subsystem commands symbol subsystem commands Reference see chapter 13 see chapter 13 see chapter 13 see chapter 13 see chapter 13 see chapter 13 see chapter 13 see chapter 15 see chapter 16 see chapter 17 see chapter 18 see chapter 19 see chapter 20 see chapter 21 see chapter 22 see chapter 23 see chapter 24 see chapter 26 10 4 Command Example Query Returned Format Example Command Example Module Level Commands ARMLine ARMLine ARMLine MACHine 1 2 The ARMLine command selects which machine analyzer generates the arm out signal This command is only valid when two analyzers are on However the query is always valid OUTPUT XXX ARMLINE MACHINE1 ARMLine ARMLine MACHine lt N gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX ARMLine DBLock DBLock PACKed UNPacked The DBLock command specifies the data block format that is contained in the response from a SYSTem DATA query See Chapters 11 and 27 for more information on the
349. rate greater than 100 MHz but with only 20 channels per Full channel output mode limits the maximum data rate to 100 MHz but allows use of 40 channels per The output mode selection sets the upper limit for the clock rate see FORMat CLOCk command FORMat MODe FULL HALF FO RMat RMat MOI IMO De De FULL HALF Assigning labels in half channel mode erases previously assigned labels 38 7 Command Command Syntax lt label name gt Example FORMat Subsystem REMove REMove The REMove is used to delete a single label or all labels from the format menu If a label name is specified it must exactly match a label name currently active in the format menu FORMat REMove ALL lt label name gt a string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters OUTPUT XXX FORMAT RE MOVE ALL 38 8 39 SEQuence Subsystem SEQuence Subsystem The commands of the Sequence subsystem allow you to write a pattern generator program using the parameters set in the Format subsystem Cs seauence gt A Column space P column_num He COLumn Je nae gt label_name D 3 gt DECimal HEXadecimal ASCii SYMBol TWOS ul Y SEQuence Subsy stem Syntax Diagram space H
350. rated the REPeat instruction line a data line within the body of the repeat and an END LOOP instruction line No data appears in the REPEAT and END LOOP lines The data specified as part of the remote control command string appears in the body of the repeat loop Additional data lines can be added to the body of the repeat loop by inserting lines as needed The repeat loop is assigned a loop number by the system and is used to connect the limits of the repeat loop 40 6 Command Syntax lt line_number gt lt event gt lt count gt lt m gt lt p gt lt data_value gt Example MACRo lt m gt INSert lt line_number gt NOOP WAIT lt event gt SIGNal REPeat lt count gt lt data_value gt lt data_value gt integer which line instruction data will be inserted after AIB Cc D IMB integer repeat count macro number integer 0 through 99 parameter number integer 0 through 9 a string in one of the following forms BOl for binary 001234567 for octal HO123456789ABCDEF for hexadecimal 0123456789 for decimal PARameter lt p gt OUTPUT XXX MACRO4 INSERT 3 BREAK PARI 113 MACRo Subsystem BRE INSert 40 7 Command Query Command syntax lt macro_name gt lt gt Query syntax Return format MACRo Subsystem NAME NAME The NAME command is used to specify aname for a
351. relate to the command tree System Commands The system commands reside at the top level of the command tree These commands are always parsable ifthey occur at the beginning of a program message or are preceded by a colon START and STOP are examples of system commands Subsystem Commands Subsystem commands are grouped together under a common node of the tree such as the MMEMORY commands Common Commands Common commands are independent of the tree and do not affect the position of the parser within the tree CLS and RST are examples of common commands Tree Traversal Rules Command headers are created by traversing down the command tree For each group of keywords not separated by a branch one keyword must be selected As shown on the tree branches are always preceded by colons Do not add spaces around the colons The following two rules apply to traversing the tree A leading colon the first character of a header or a lt terminator gt places the parser at the root of the command tree Executing a subsystem command places you in that subsystem until a leading colon or a lt terminator gt is found The parser will stay at the colon above the keyword where the last header terminated Any command below that point can be sent within the current program message without sending the keywords s which appear above them 4 6 Programming and Documentation Conventions Tree Traversal Rules The following examples are written u
352. res id RESour ce J space mm res terms ae RESource TYPE space TIMing TYPE 16550802 5 6 Message Communication and System Functions Syntax Overview Syntax Overview This overview is intended to give a quick glance at the syntax defined by IEEE 488 2 It will help you understand many of the things about the syntax you need to know IEEE 488 2 defines the blocks used to build messages which are sent to the instrument A whole string of commands can therefore be broken up into individual components Figure 5 1 is an example syntax diagram and figure 5 2 shows a breakdown of an example lt program message gt There are a few key items to notice e A semicolon separates commands from one another Each lt program message unit gt serves as a container for one command The lt program message unit gt s are separated by a semicolon e A lt program message gt is terminated by a lt NL gt new line The recognition ofthe lt program message terminator gt or lt PMT gt by the parser serves as a signal for the parser to begin execution of commands The lt PMT gt also affects command tree traversal Chapter 4 Programming and Documentation Conventions e Multiple data parameters are separated by a comma e The first data parameter is separated from the header with one or more spaces e The header MACHINE 1 ASSIGN 2 3 is an example of a compo
353. ressing 3 10 Lockout Command 3 11 4 Programming and Documentation Conventions Truncation Rule 4 3 Infinity Representation 4 4 Sequential and Overlapped Commands 4 4 Response Generation 4 4 Syntax Diagrams 4 4 Notation Conventions and Definitions 4 5 The Command Tree 4 5 Tree Traversal Rules 4 6 Command Set Organization 4 12 Subsystems 4 12 Program Examples 4 13 5 Message Communication and System Functions Protocols 5 3 Syntax Diagrams 5 5 Syntax Overview 5 7 6 Status Reporting Event Status Register 6 4 Service Request Enable Register 6 4 Bit Definitions 6 4 Contents 2 Contents Key Features 6 6 Serial Poll 6 7 7 Error Messages Part 2 9 Device Dependent Errors 7 3 Command Errors 7 3 Execution Errors 7 4 Internal Errors 7 4 Query Errors 7 5 Instrument Commands Common Commands CLS Clear Status 8 5 ESE Event Status Enable 8 6 ESR Event Status Register 8 7 IDN Identification Number 8 9 IST Individual Status 8 9 OPC Operation Complete 8 11 OPT Option Identification 8 12 PRE Parallel Poll Enable Register Enable 8 13 RST Reset 8 14 SRE Service Request Enable 8 15 STB Status Byte 8 16 TRG Trigger 8 17 TST Test 8 18 WAI Wait 8 19 Instrument Commands BEEPer 9 6 CAPability 9 7 CARDcage 9 8 CESE Combined Event Status Enable 9 9 CESR Combined Event Status Register 9 10 EOI End Or Identify 9 11 Contents 3 10 11 12 C
354. ric character for the oscilloscope or 6 characters for the timing modules ACCumulate DISPlay ACCumulate ON 1 0FF 0 The ACCumulate command works in conjunction with the commands in the Acquisition Subsystem In the Normal mode the ACCumulate command turns infinite persistence on or off OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY ACC ON DISPLAY ACCumulate The ACCumulate query reports if accumulate is turned on or off DISPlay ACCumulate 1 0 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY ACCUMULAT Py E 31 4 DISPlay Subsystem CONNect CONNect Command DISPlay CONNect ON 1 OFF O The CONNect command sets the Connect Dots mode When ON each displayed sample dot will be connected to the adjacent dot by a straight line When OFF only the sampling points will be displayed Example OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY CONNECT ON Query DISPlay CONNect The CONNect query reports if connect is on or off Returned Format DISPlay CONNect 1 0 lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX DISPLAY CONNECT Command lt label gt lt bit id gt Example DISPlay Subsystem INSert INSert DISPlay INSert 2 lt label gt 1 lt label gt lt bit_id gt The INSert command inserts waveforms into the current display Time correlated waveforms from the logic analyzer may be added to the current display The waveforms are added just below any currently displayed signals
355. rigger is to be generated on entry ENTer to a specific logic pattern when exiting EXIT the specified pattern or if a specified pattern duration LT GT RANGe is met The specified pattern is defined by using the LOGic command When ENTer is chosen the oscilloscope will trigger on the first transition that makes the pattern specification true for every input the number of times specified by the trigger event count DELay command When EXIT is selected the oscilloscope will trigger on the first transition that causes the pattern specification to be false after the pattern has been true for the number of times specified by the trigger event count DELay command When RANge is selected the oscilloscope will trigger on the first transition that causes the pattern specification to be false after the pattern has been true for the number of times specified by the trigger event count DELAY command The first event in the sequence will occur when the specified pattern is true for a time greater than that indicated by the first duration term and less than that indicated by the second duration term All other pattern true occurrences in the event count are independent of the pattern duration range time When GT greater than is selected the oscilloscope will trigger on the first transition that causes the pattern specification to be false after the pattern has been true for the number of times specified by the trigger event count DELAY co
356. rm record is saved for later reloading into the oscilloscope the SYSTem DATA command should be used WAVeform DATA 800008000 lt block data gt lt NL gt 112 OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM DATA Chapter 37 Programming Examples for an example using the DATA command 36 8 Command Example Query Returned Format Example Query Returned Format lt points gt Example WAVeform Subsystem FORMat FORMat WAVeform FORMat 1 BYT E WORD ASCii The FORMat command specifies the data transmission mode of waveform data over the remote interface See Format for Data Transfer earlier in this chapter for information on the formats OUTPUT XXX WAV FORM WORD WAVeform FORMat The FORMat query returns the current format WAVeform FORMa t BYT OUTPUT XXX WAV E WORD ASCii lt NL gt EFORM FORMAT POINts WAVeform POINts When WAVeform RECord is set to FULL the POINts query always returns a value of 8000 points When WAVeform RECord is set to WINdow then the query returns the number of points displayed on screen WAVeform POINts integer OUTPUT XXX WAV lt points gt lt NL gt EFORM POINTS 36 9 WAVeform Subsystem PREamble PREamble Query WAVeform SOURce CHANnel lt N gt PREamble The PREamble query returns the preamble of the specified channel The channel is specified u
357. rn X OJALL The CLRPattern command allows you to clear the patterns in the selected Specify Patterns menu OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLISt CLRPATTERN X 17 8 Query Returned Format lt line_number gt lt label_name gt lt pattern_ string gt Example Command lt line_num_mid_ screen gt Example SLISt Subsystem DATA DATA MACHine 1 2 SLISt DATA lt line_number gt lt label_name gt The DATA query returns the value at a specified line number for a given label The format will be the same as the one shown in the listing display MACHine 1 2 SLISt DATA lt line_number gt lt label_name gt lt pattern_string gt lt NL gt integer from 1032192 to 1032192 string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters B O 1 X O 0111213141516171X H 0 1 213 14 5 1617 8 9 A B C D E F X 0111213141516171819 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST DATA 512 RAS LINE MACHine 1 2 SLISt LINE lt line_ num mid screen gt The LINE command allows you to scroll the state analyzer listing vertically The command specifies the state line number relative to the trigger that the analyzer highlights at the center of the screen integer from 1032192 to 1032192 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SLIST LINE 0 17 9 Query Returned Format Example Command lt marker_mode gt Example SLISt Subsystem M
358. rned as the first parameter Numbers are always returned in decimal format MACHine 1 2 SFORmat LABel lt name gt lt polarity gt lt assignment gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT LABEL DATA 15 8 Command lt clock_id gt lt clock_spec gt Example Query Returned Format Example SFORmat Subsystem MASTer MASTer MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MASTer lt clock_id gt lt clock_spec gt The MASTer clock command allows you to specify a master clock for a given machine The master clock is used in all clocking modes Master Slave and Demultiplexed Each command deals with only one clock J K L M therefore a complete clock specification requires four commands one for each clock Edge specifications RISing FALLing or BOTH are ORed At least one clock edge must be specified JIKILIM OFF RISing FALLing BOTH OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT MASTER J RISING MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MASTer lt clock_id gt The MASTer query returns the clock specification for the specified clock MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MASTer lt clock_id gt lt clock_spec gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 SFORMAT MASTER lt clock_id gt Command lt clock_pair_ id gt lt qual_ operation gt Example Query Returned Format Example SFORmat Subsystem MOPQual MOPQual MACHine 1 2 SFORmat MOPQual lt clock_pair_i
359. ro but it does not remove the macro from the macro list The macro is still accessible from the sequence but the macro consist of only two lines The command REMove MACRo can be used to totally remove all contents of a macro as well as any external reference to that macro Note that while Macro0 can be totally cleared it cannot be removed from the macro list 40 2 MACRo Subsystem Figure 40 1 Macro y hacra number gt N E 3 NE Da inser gt space prog_number a JER NOOP i wm abel value WAIT A gt wait event u de ae BE SiGnal gt i m REPeat aa Pe repeat count Hm BREA NAME Da space He macro_name gt H PARameter e param_number o space on E u param name PARameter param number gt y A 16522812 MACRo Subsystem Syntax Diagram 40 3 MACRo Subsystem Figure 40 1 continued T D e PROgran space a prog_line_number u e nooP gt gt label_value wart Di wait event de Repeat gt repeat count H PROgram m space prog_line_number gt Remove Da space AL J m prog_line_number e prog_line_number Esd Ds prog_line_number 16522810 J MACRo Subsystem Sy
360. rogramming Over RS 232 C RS 232 C Bus Addressing The controller and the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer must be in the same bit mode to properly communicate over the RS 232 C This means that the controller must have the capability to send and receive 8 bit data For more information on the RS 232 C interface refer to the Agilent 1670G Series Logic Analyzers User s Guide For information on RS 232 C voltage levels and connector pinouts refer to the Agilent 1670G Series Logic Analyzers Service Guide RS 232 C Bus Addressing The RS 232 C address you must use is dependent on the computer or controller you are using to communicate with the logic analyzer HP Vectra Personal Computers or compatibles If you are using an HP Vectra Personal Computer or compatible it must have an unused serial port to which you connect the logic analyzer s RS 232 C port The proper address for the serial port is dependent on the hardware configuration of your computer Additionally your communications software must be configured to address the proper serial port Refer to your computer and communications software manuals for more information on setting up your serial port address HP 9000 Series 300 Controllers Each RS 232 C interface card for the HP 9000 Series 300 controller has its own interface select code This code is used by the controller for directing commands and communications to the proper interface by specifying the correct interface code
361. ror gt 99 T IF Error gt 9 TH ENTER 707 USING 1A Errors ENTER 707 USING 1A Commas ENTER 707 USING K Line Error_return IVAL Error 10 IF Error_return 0 THEN GOTO 1820 EN GOTO 1580 GOTO 1550 Ao GOTO 1610 ENTER 707 USING 2A Errors ENTER 707 USING 1A Comma ENTER 707 USING K Line GOTO 1610 ENTER 707 USING 3A Error ENTER 707 USING 1A Comma ENTER 707 USING K Line 43 12 Programming Examples Making a State Compare Measurement 1620 Ke TERIOR FETE FER TTT TE TET KT TR TFT TR LK FH RK IF RK RRE TFT TE KR TFT TH FE FE RK TI KK KTR I RR IF ER TH LK TE TR ER RK KK KT KK RR I TER 1630 Test for the last error The error number of the last error is the same 1640 as the error number of the first number after the last error 1650 1660 Error_line IVAL Line 10 1670 IF Error_line Error_line2 THEN GOTO 1780 1680 Error_line2 Error_line 1690 1700 KRM ERROR RAKE RR ELEKTR HK RE kk kkrk k k kk IK IE N TE FT TR LA KK FE N CT KH ER FE IK N TI ZT FE LK TR AK HE I N IF ERR EER 1710 Print the error numbers and the corresponding line numbers on the 1720 controller screen 1730 1 1740 PRINT Error number Error is on line number Error line 1750 1760 EXT Error 1770 1780 PRINT 1790 PRINT 1800 PRINT Last erro
362. s In addition note the external markings on the instrument that are described under Safety Symbols Warning e Before turning on the instrument you must connect the protective earth terminal of the instrument to the protective conductor of the mains power cord The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact You must not negate the protective action by using an extension cord power cable without a protective conductor grounding Grounding one conductor of a two conductor outlet is not sufficient protection e Only fuses with the required rated current voltage and specified type normal blow time delay etc should be used Do not use repaired fuses or short circuited fuseholders To do so could cause a shock of fire hazard e Service instructions are for trained service personnel To avoid dangerous electric shock do not perform any service unless qualified to do so Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present e If you energize this instrument by an auto transformer for voltage reduction make sure the common terminal is connected to the earth terminal of the power source e Whenever it is likely that the ground protection is impaired you must make the instrument inoperative and secure it against any unintended operation e Do not operate the instrumen
363. s not remove the macro from the macro list This means the macro is still accessible from the sequence but the macro consists of only two lines The command REMove MACRo can be used to totally remove all contents of a macro as well as any external reference to the macro Note that while Macro0 can be totally cleared it cannot be removed from the macro list MACRo lt macro number gt REMove lt program line number gt lt program line number gt ALL MACRo an integer 0 through 99 an integer specifying the program line to be removed OUTPUT XXX MACRO1 REM 1 3 40 13 40 14 41 SYMBol Subsystem SYMBol Subsystem The SYMBol subsystem contains the commands that allow you to define symbols on the controller and download them to the Pattern Generator ae y Comma OL rro onae pal inbennane no gt E E O AA E gt pattern_value RANGE gt space j label name gt symbol name D r gt start_value mad J gt stop value gt Hi REMove gt WIDTh space j label name Lm Dia width_value 16522b11 SYMBol Subsystem Syntax Diagram 41 2 SYMBol Subsystem lt label_name gt string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters lt symbol_name gt string of up to 16 alphanumeric characters lt pattern_value gt string of
364. samp_period gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM SPERIOD TAVerage MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform TAVerage The TAVerage query returns the value of the average time between the X and O markers If there is no valid data the query returns 9 9E37 MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform TAVerage lt time_value gt lt NL gt real number OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM TAVERAGE 23 18 TWAVeform Subsystem TMAXimum TMAXimum Query MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform TMAXimum The TMAXimum query returns the value of the maximum time between the X and O markers If there is no valid data the query returns 9 9537 Returned Format MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform TMAXimum lt time_value gt lt NL gt lt time_value gt real number Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM TMAXIMUM TMINimum Query MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform TMINimum The TMINimum query returns the value of the minimum time between the X and O markers If there is no valid data the query returns 9 9537 Returned Format MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform TMINimum lt time_value gt lt NL gt lt time_value gt real number Example OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM TMINIMUM TPOSition Command MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform TPOSition STARt CENTer END DELay lt time_val gt POSTstore lt percent gt The TPOSition command controls where the trigger point is placed The
365. selector is used as a part of a compound header to access the settings normally found in the Mixed Mode menu Because the WLISt command is a root level command it will always appear as the first element of a compound header The WLISt subsystem is only available when one or more state analyzers with time tagging on are specified OUTPUT XXX WLIST XTIME 40 0E 6 WLISt Subsystem DELay DELay Command WLISt DELay lt delay_value gt The DELay command specifies the amount of time between the timing trigger and the horizontal center of the the timing waveform display The allowable values for delay are 2500 s to 2500 s lt delay_value gt real number between 2500 s and 2500 s Example OUTPUT XXX WLIST DELAY 100E 6 Query WLISt DELay The DELay query returns the current time offset delay value from the trigger Returned Format WLISt DELay lt delay_value gt lt NL gt Example OUTPUT XXX WLIST DELAY 14 5 Command lt module_spec gt lt label_name gt lt bit_id gt Example WLISt Subsystem INSert INSert WLISt INSert lt module_spec gt lt label_name gt sbit_id gt OVERlay ALL The INSert command inserts waveforms in the timing waveform display The waveforms are added from top to bottom up to a maximum of 96 waveforms Once 96 waveforms are present each time you insert another waveform
366. sets are displayed when symbols are used BINary is not available for labels with more than 20 bits assigned In this case the base will default to HEXadecimal string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters BINary HEXadecimal OCTal DECimal ASCii OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SYMBOL BASE DATA HEXADECIMAL Command lt label_name gt lt symbol_name gt lt pattern_value gt Example SYMBol Subsystem PATTern PATTern MACHine 1 2 SYMBol PATTern lt label_name gt lt symbol_name gt lt pattern_value gt The PATTern command creates a pattern symbol for the specified label Because don t cares X are allowed in the pattern value it must always be expressed as a string You may still use different bases but don t cares cannot be used in a decimal number string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters string of up to 16 alphanumeric characters B O 1 X 0 011121314151617IX H 0 1 213 14 5 1617 8 9 A B C D E F X OILI 1311561 71819 2 2 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SYMBOL PATTERN STAT MEM_RD H01XX 26 6 Command lt label_name gt lt symbol_name gt lt start_value gt lt stop_value gt Example SYMBol Subsystem RANGe RANGe MACHine 1 2 SYMBol RANGe lt label_name gt lt symbol_name gt lt start_value gt lt stop_value gt The RANGe command creates a range symbol
367. sing HP BASIC 6 2 The quoted string is placed on the bus followed by a carriage return and linefeed CRLF The three Xs XXX shown in this manual after an ENTER or OUTPUT statement represents the device address required by your controller Example 1 In this example the colon between SYSTEM and HEADER is necessary since SYSTEM HEADER is a compound command The semicolon between the HEADER command and the LONGFORM command is the required lt program message unit separator gt The LONGFORM command does not need SYSTEM preceding it since the SYSTEM HEADER command sets the parser to the SYSTEM node in the tree OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM HEADER ON LONGFORM ON Example 2 In the first line of this example the subsystem selector is implied for the STORE command in the compound command The STORE command must be in the same program message as the INITIALIZE command since the lt program message terminator gt will place the parser back at the root of the command tree A second way to send these commands is by placing MMEMORY before the STORE command as shown in the fourth line of this example 2 OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY INITIALIZE STORE FILE FILE DESCRIPTION OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY INITIALIZE OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY STORE FILE FILE DESCRIPTION Exa
368. sing the SOURCE command Returned Format WAVeform PREamble lt format gt lt type gt lt points gt lt count gt lt Xincrement gt lt Xorigin gt lt Xreference gt lt Yincrement gt lt Yorigin gt lt Yreference gt lt NL gt lt N gt 112 lt format gt 01112 0 ASCII 1 BYTE 2 WORD lt type gt 1 2 1 Normal 2 Average Example OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM PREAMBLE For more information on the fields in PREamble see the commands which query the individual fields For example see the FORmat command for an explanation of the format field 36 10 Command Example Query Returned Format Example Command lt N gt Example WAVeform Subsystem RECord RECord WAVeform SOURce CHANnel lt N gt RECord FULL WINDow The RECord command specifies the data you want to receive over the bus The choices are FULL or WINdow When FULL is chosen the entire 8000 point record of the specified channel is transmitted over the bus In WINdow mode only the data displayed on screen will be returned OUTPUT XXX WAV SOUR CHAN1 REC FULL WAVeform RECord The RECord query returns the present mode chosen WAVeform RECord FULL WINDow lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX WAVEFORM RECORD SOURce WAVeform SOURce CHANnel lt N gt The SOURce command specifies the channel that is to be used for all subsequent waveform
369. sitive pulse width measurement on the selected channel The measurement is made by finding the time difference between the 50 points of the first rising and the next falling edge displayed on screen Ifa parameter cannot be measured the instrument responds with 9 9E37 MEASure PWIDth lt value gt lt NL gt 112 positive pulse width in seconds OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHANNEL2 PWIDTH RISetime MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt RISetime The RISetime query makes a risetime measurement on the selected channel by finding the 10 and 90 voltage levels of the first rising edge displayed on screen Ifa parameter cannot be measured the instrument responds with 9 9E37 MEASure RISetime lt value gt lt NL gt 112 risetime in seconds OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOUR CHAN1 RISETIME 33 8 Command lt N gt Example Query Returned Format Example MEASure Subsystem SOURce SOURce MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt The SOURce command specifies the source to be used for subsequent measurements If the source is not specified the last waveform source is assumed 112 OUTPUT XXX M EASUR E SOURCE MEASure SOURce CHAN1 The SOURce query returns the presently specified channel MEASure SOURce C HANnel lt OUTPUT XXX M EASUR E SOURCE gt l
370. stem 0 at power up The appropriate module or system must be selected before any module or system specific commands can be sent SELECT 0 selects the System and SELECT 1 selects the logic analyzer state and timing Select 2 1 and 2 through 10 are accepted but no action will be taken When a module is selected the parser recognizes the module s commands and the System Intermodule commands When SELECT 0 is used only the System Intermodule commands are recognized by the parser Figure 9 2 shows the command tree for the SELect command An integer 0 through 1 2 1 and 2 through 10 unused Example Query Returned Format Example Figure 9 2 Select Command Tree Instrument Commands SELect The command parser in the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer is designed to accept programs written for the 16500 logic analysis system with an 16550A logic analyzer module however ifthe parameters 2 through 10 are sent an Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer will take no action OUTPUT XXX SELECT 0 SELect The SELect query returns the current module selection SELect lt module gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX SELECT 0 SELECTS SYSTEM 1 SELECTS LOGIC ANALYZER 01670512 Instrument Commands SETColor SETColor Command SETColor lt color gt lt hue gt lt sat gt lt lum gt DEFault
371. t Example STRigger STRace Subsystem TIMER MACHine 1 2 STRigger TERM lt term_id gt lt label_name gt The TERM query returns the specification of the term specified by term identification and label name MACHine 1 2 STRAce TERM lt term_id gt lt label_name gt lt pattern gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TERM B DATA TIMER MACHine 1 2 STRigger TIMER 1 2 lt time_value gt The TIMER command sets the time value for the specified timer The limits of the timer are 400 ns to 500 seconds in 16 ns to 500 us increments The increment value varies with the time value of the specified timer There are two timers and they are available for either machine but not both machines simultaneously real number from 400 ns to 500 seconds in increments which vary from 16 ns to 500 us OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TIMER1 100E 6 MACHine 1 2 STRigger TIMER 1 2 The TIMER query returns the current time value for the specified timer MACHine 1 2 STRigger TIMER 1 2 lt time_value gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 STRIGGER TIMER1 16 22 Command lt poststore gt Example Query Returned Format Example STRigger STRace Subsystem TPOSition TPOSition MACHine 1 2 STRigger TPOSition STARt CENTer END POSTstore lt poststore gt The TPO
372. t lt max_time gt Example Query Returned Format Example SPA Subsystem TINTerval TINTerval TINTerval TINTerval SPA 1 2 T NTerval TINTerval lt interval_number gt lt min_time gt lt max_time gt The TINTerval TINTerval command specifies the minimum and maximum time limits for the given interval A query returns these limits for a specified interval 0to 7 real number real number OUTPUT XXX SPA2 TINTerval TINTerval 4 1 0E 3 47 0E5 OUTPUT XXX SPA1 TINTerval TINTerval 3 6 8E 7 4 90E2 SPA 1 2 TINTerval TINTerval lt interval_number gt SPA 1 2 TINTerval TINTerval lt interval_number gt lt min_time gt lt max_time gt lt NL gt 10 20 30 40 50 60 DIM String 10 OU OU PUT XXX S EN PRI END NT String 0 PUT XXX SE 1 EC PA2 1 ER XXX String 1 PINTerval TINTerval 6 25 24 Query Returned Format lt interval_ number gt lt number_hits gt lt time_number gt Example SPA Subsystem TINTerval TSTatistic TINTerval TSTatistic SPA 1 2 T TM NTerval TSTatistic Nimum TMAXimum TAVerage TOTal TTOTal lt interval_number gt The TINTerval TSTatistic query returns either the time or the number of samples associated with the requested statistic The statistics you ca
373. t 1670G series logic analyzer PON power on Indicates power has been turned on URQ user request Always returns a 0 from the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer CME command error Indicates whether the parser detected an error The error numbers and strings for CME EXE DDE and OYE can be read from a device defined queue which is not part of IEEE 488 2 with the query SYSTEM ERROR EXE execution error Indicates whether a parameter was out of range or inconsistent with current settings DDE device specific error Indicates whether the device was unable to complete an operation for device dependent reasons QYE query error Indicates whether the protocol for queries has been violated RQC request control Always returns a 0 from the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer OPC operation complete Indicates whether the device has completed all pending operations OPC is controlled by the OPC common command Because this command can appear after any other command it serves as a general purpose operation complete message generator 6 5 Example Status Reporting Key Features LCL remote to local Indicates whether a remote to local transition has occurred MSB module summary bit Indicates that an enable event in one of the status registers has occurred Key Features A few of the most important features of Status Reporting are listed in the following paragraphs Operati
374. t 1670G series logic analyzer 4 bytes for the length of the section data in bytes format depends on the type of data The total length of a section is 16 for the section header plus the length of the section data When calculating the value for lt length gt remember to include the length of the section headers The format of the setup block is not affected by the DBLock command setting OUTPUT XXX SETUP lt block data gt SYStem SETup The SYStem SETup query returns a block of data that contains the current configuration to the controller SYStem SETup lt block data gt lt NL gt 27 13 27 14 Part 4 Oscilloscope Commands 28 Oscilloscope Root Level Commands Introduction Oscilloscope Root Level commands control the basic operation of the oscilloscope Refer to figure 28 1 for the module level syntax command diagram The Root Level commands are e AUToscale e DIGitize This chapter only applies to the oscilloscope option 28 2 Oscilloscope Root Level Commands AUToscale Figure 28 1 AUToscale DIGI tize 16530 SX09 Root Level Command Syntax Diagram AUToscale Command AUToscale The AUToscale command causes the oscilloscope to automatically select the vertical sensitivity vertical offset trigger source trigger level and timebase settings for optimum viewing of any input signals The trigger source is the lowest numbered channel on which t
375. t NL gt ou 33 9 Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example MEASure Subsystem VAMPlitude VAMPlitude MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt VAMPlitude The VAMPlitude query makes a voltage measurement on the selected channel The measurement is made by finding the relative maximum VTOP and minimum VBASe points on screen Ifa parameter cannot be measured the instrument responds with 9 9E37 MEASure VAMPlitude lt value gt lt NL gt 112 difference between top and base voltage OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHANNEL2 VAMP VBASe MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt VBASe The VBASe query returns the base voltage relative minimum of a displayed waveform The measurement is made on the selected source If a parameter cannot be measured the instrument responds with 9 9E37 MEASure VBASe lt value gt lt NL gt 112 voltage at base relative minimum of selected waveform OUTPUT XXX MEASURE SOURCE CHAN1 VBAS 33 10 Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example Query Returned Format lt N gt lt value gt Example MEASure Subsystem VMAX VMAX MEASure SOURce CHANnel lt N gt VMAX The VMAX query returns the absolute maximum voltage of the selecte
376. t in the presence of flammable gasses or fumes Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard e Do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the instrument e Capacitors inside the instrument may retain a charge even if the instrument is disconnected from its source of supply e Use caution when exposing or handling the CRT Handling or replacing the CRT shall be done only by qualified maintenance personnel Safety Symbols A Instruction manual symbol the product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for you to refer to the instruction manual in order to protect against damage to the product Hazardous voltage symbol Earth terminal symbol Used to indicate a circuit common connected to grounded chassis WARNING The Warning sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in personal injury Do not proceed beyond a Warning sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met CAUTION The Caution sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operating procedure practice or the like which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product Do not proceed beyond a Caution symbol until the indicated conditions are fully understood
377. t o space o module_spec a MLENgiN a space label_name memor y _length a MLENgth Y TWAVeform Subsyste m Syntax Diagram 01670803 23 3 Figure 23 1 continued TWAVeform Subsystem Y a MMODe space OFF PATTern be OCONdition gt space S ENTering lt EXITing gt OCONdition eC OPATtern gt gt space pA gt label name LHC label_pattern I gt oPattern gt space gt lobel_nome eC search Daa space occurrence ae 0SEarch space time value Range space m time range RANGe paa REMove Y TWAVeform Subsystem Syntax Diagram continued 01670504 23 4 Figure 23 1 continued TWAVeform Subsystem y a RUNT space gt run_until_spec SPERiod space gt sample_period pe SPERiod mi TAVerage H TMAXimum ae TMINimum gt TPOSition gt gt space ES ED N STARI C END wm DELay time_val POSTstore percent mm TPOSition ru pe XCONdition D gt space EXITing ENTering gt mei XCONditiom
378. t the configuration of the machines when the last run was performed Any changes made since the last run through either front panel operations or programming commands do not affect the stored configuration until anew run is performed SYSTem DATA lt block data gt lt NL gt Byte Position 1 11 12 13 17 21 25 29 DATA and SETup Commands Section Header Description Section Header Description The section header uses bytes 1 through 16 this manual begins counting at 1 there is no byte 0 The 16 bytes of the section header are as follows 10 bytes Section name DATA space space space space space space in ASCII for the DATA instruction 1 byte Reserved 1 byte Module ID 34 decimal for the Agilent 1670G 4 bytes Length of block in number of bytes that when converted to decimal specifies the number of bytes contained in the data block Section Data For the SYSTem DATA command the lt section data gt parameter consists of two parts the data preamble and the acquisition data These are described in the following two sections Data Preamble Description The block data is organized as 554 bytes of preamble information followed by a variable number of bytes of data The preamble gives information for each analyzer describing the amount and type of data captured where the trace point occurred in the data which pods are assigned to which analyzer and other information The preamble byt
379. t your commands to the pattern generator To select the pattern generator use this command SELect 2 37 4 Programming the Pattern Generator Command Set Organization Command Set Organization The command set for the Agilent 1670G pattern generator is divided into four separate subsystems The subsystems are FORMat SEQuence MACRo and the SYMBol subsystem Each of the subsystems commands are covered in their individual sections later in this chapter Each of these sections contain a description of the subsystem syntax diagrams and the commands in alphabetical order The commands are shown in long form and short form using upper and lower case letters For example FORMat indicates that the long form of the command is FORMAT and the short form is FORM Each of the commands contain a description of the command and its arguments the command syntax and a programming example The following figure shows the command tree for the pattern generator on Ber Module Level FORMat SEQuence MACRo lt H gt SYMBal STEP CLOCK COLumn PROGram BASE RESume LABel PROGram REMove RANGe REMove REMove INSert PATTern MODe INSert PARameter REMove DELay EPATtern NAME WIDTH Pattern Generator Command Tree Table 37 1 Programming the Pattern Generator Command Set Organization Table 37 1 shows the alphabetical command to subsystem directory Alphabetical Command to Subsystem Directory Command Where Us
380. tation is used is dependent upon your host language The output will resemble 1 E 5 in BASIC Definite Length Block Response Data Definite length block response data also referred to as block data allows any type of device dependent data to be transmitted over the system interface as a series of data bytes Definite length block data is particularly useful for sending large quantities of data or for sending 8 bit extended ASCII codes The syntax is a pound sign followed by a non zero digit representing the number of digits in the decimal integer Following the non zero digit is the decimal integer that states the number of 8 bit data bytes to follow This number is followed by the actual data Indefinite length block data is not supported on the Agilent Technologies 1670G series logic analyzer For example for transmitting 80 bytes of data the syntax would be NUMBER OF DIGITS THAT FOLLOW ACTUAL DATA ee 800000080 lt eighty bytes of data gt lt terminator gt pt NUMBER OF BYTES Ek TO BE TRANSMITTED 16508 BL22 Figure 1 2 Definite Length Block Response Data The 8 states the number of digits that follow and 00000080 states the number of bytes to be transmitted which is 80 Example Example Example Introduction to Programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Multiple Queries Multiple Queries You can send multiple queries to the logic analyzer withi
381. ter PAUSE 1 kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxxkxx 5 PRINT GOT THE PRINT Press Continue to continue ENTER Comm Term SETUP the program END THE S ETUP KKHKKKKKKXKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KK KK Make sure buffer is not empty IF Numbytes 0 THEN PRINT BUFFER IS PAUSE END IF I KHAKKKKKXKKKKKKKKKk KK Ak S EMPTY END THE S F TUP COMMAND kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkkxkxkxkxkxkkkxxkx k Send the Setup command OUTPUT Comm USING 16A SYSTE PRINT SYST SETUP 8 EM SETUP command has been sent PRINT Press Continue to continue program PAUSI I E i kkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxxkxx S END THE BLOCK SETUP KR kk kk RR RR Send the block length to the Agilent 1670G in the proper format OUTPUT Comm USING 8A Numbytes 1 KAKKKKKXKKKKKKKKXKKKKkkkxk SAVE BUFE ER POINTERS kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkxkxkxkkkxkxkxkxkkkxxk Save the transfer buffer pointer so it can be restored after th I transfer STATUS Buff 5 Streg 43 15 78 79 80 8l 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 23 II I IE O I SIE Programming Examples Transferring the Logic Analyzer Configuration KKKKKKKKKKKK RANSF Transfer the setup from ER SETUP TO THE Agilent 1670G kk
382. the Module Event Status register The lt N gt index specifies the module For the Agilent 1670G series the lt N gt index 0 or 1 refers to system or logic analyzer respectively Refer to table 9 8 for information about the Module Event Status Register bits and their bit weights for the system and table 9 9 for the logic analyzer MESR lt N gt lt enable_value gt lt NL gt An integer 0 through 10 2 through 10 unused An integer from 0 through 255 OUTPUT XXX MESR1 Instrument Commands MESR lt N gt Module Event Status Register Table 9 8 Agilent 1670G Series Logic Analyzer System Module Event Status Register lt N gt 0 Bit Bit Weight Bit Name Condition 1 128 not used 6 64 not used 5 32 not used 4 16 not used 3 not used 2 not used 1 RNT 0 Run until not satisfied 1 Run until satisfied 0 1 MC 0 Measurement not satisfied 1 Measurement satisfied Table 9 9 Agilent 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Module Event Status Register lt N gt 1 Bit Bit Weight Condition 7 128 not used 6 64 not used 5 32 not used 4 16 not used 3 8 1 One or more pattern searches failed 0 Pattern searches did not fail 2 4 1 Trigger found 0 Trigger not found 1 2 0 Run until condition not satisfied 1 Run until condition satisfied 0 1 0 Measurement not satisfied 1 Measurement satisfied Instrument Commands RMODe RMODe Command RMODe SINGle REPetitive The RM
383. the file The optional lt module gt parameter allows you to store the configuration for either the system or the logic analyzer 1 refers to the logic analyzer and 0 refers to the system If the optional lt module gt parameter is not specified the configurations for both the system and the logic analyzer are stored A string of up to 10 alphanumeric characters for LIF in the following form NNNNNNNNNN or A string of up to 12 alphanumeric characters for DOS in the following form NNNNNNNN NNN Mass Storage Unit specifier INTernal0 for the hard disk drive and INTernall for the flexible disk drive A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters An integer 0 through 1 12 20 Example Query lt name gt lt msus gt Returned Format MMEMory Subsystem UPLoad OUTPUT XXX MMEM STOR DEFAULTS SETUPS FOR ALL MODULES OUTPUT XXX MMEMORY STORE CONFIG STATEDATA INTERNALO ANALYZER 1 CONFIG 1 The appropriate module designator _X is added to all files when they are stored X refers to either an double underscore for the system or an _A for the logic analyzer UPLoad MMEMory UPLoad lt name gt lt msus gt The UPLoad query uploads a file The lt name gt parameter specifies the file to be uploaded from the disk The contents of the file are sent out of the instrument in block data form This command should only
384. tions can be R rising F falling E either or don t care Edges are sent in the same string with the rightmost string character specifying what the rightmost bit will be The lt edge_spec gt string length must match the exact number of bits assigned to the specified label Ifthe string length does not match the number of bits the Parameter string invalid message is displayed 112 string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters string consisting of R F E to total number of bits For 8 bits assigned OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER EDGE1 DATA F E For 16 bits assigned OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER EDGE1 DATA es BEE es FREM MACHine 1 2 TTRigger EDGE lt N gt lt label_name gt The EDGE query returns the current specification for the given label MACHine 1 2 TTRigger EDGE lt N gt lt label_name gt lt edge_spec gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER EDGE1 DATA 22 13 Command lt N gt lt condition_ mode gt GT LT lt duration_ time gt lt occurrence gt lt time qualifier gt TTRigger TTRace Subsystem FIND FIND MACHine 1 2 TTRigger FIND lt N gt lt time_qualifier gt lt condition_mode gt The FIND command defines the qualifier for a given sequence level The qualifier tells the timing ana
385. tiple queries 1 21 tiple subsystems 1 14 Z ZEEZZZZ SSSES Mm AME command query 13 8 ew Line character 1 7 L 1 7 4 5 otation conventions 4 5 umeric base 1 19 umeric bases 1 12 umeric data 1 12 umeric variables 1 19 O OCONdition command query 23 13 24 11 OPATtern command query 17 11 23 14 24 12 OPC 6 5 Operation Complete 6 6 OR notation 4 5 OSEarch command query 17 12 23 15 24 13 OSTate query 14 7 17 13 24 14 OTAG command query 17 14 24 14 OTIMe command query 14 8 23 16 Output buffer 1 10 Output queue 5 3 OUTPUT statement 1 3 Overlapped command 8 11 8 19 9 22 Overlapped commands 4 4 OVERView BUCKet query 25 8 OVERView HIGH command query 25 9 OVERView LABel command query 25 10 OVERView LOW command query 25 11 OVERView OMARker command query 25 13 OVERView OVSTatistic query 25 14 OVERView XMARker command query 25 15 Index 3 Index P PACK command 12 18 Parameter syntax rules 1 12 Parameters 1 7 Parity 3 9 Parse tree 5 8 Parser 5 3 PATTern command 26 6 PON 6 5 Preamble description 27 6 PRINt command 11 10 program example sending queries to the logic analyzer 28 18 state analyzer 28 5 state compare 28 9 SYSTem SETup command 28 14 SYSTem SETup query 28 14 timing analyzer 28 3 transferring configuration to analyzer 28 14 transferring configuration to the controller 28 14 Program examples 4 13 28 2 Program messa
386. to_level_num o a BRANch lt N gt CLEor Je space ALL SEQuence RESource EDGE D space label name e edge_spec m EDGE Ne space H label_name gt FIND lt N gt space gt proceed_qualifier u 3 gt 1 gt e duration_time gt occurrence a Daa occurrence e FIND lt N gt gt He MLENgtn space memory_length gt pa MLENgth gt a RANGe lt N gt ja space gt label_name gt start_pattern u pa RANGe lt N gt Lal He SEQuence o space o num_of_levels gt pe SEQuence gt y 1655581 A TTRigger Subsystem Syntax Diagram 22 3 Figure 22 1 continued TTRigger TTRace Subsystem Y e SPERiod gt spac e Pa sample_period pe SPERiod nae TCONtrol lt N gt el Ham timer num E TERM space space eC TCONtrol lt N gt gt gt space timer num He term_id Lee label_name TERM space e TIMER lt timer_num gt S space gt timer value TIMER lt timer_num gt TPOSition gt sp ace term_id Lec gt label_name gt gt gt e STARt gt em ND
387. tor 24 7 TLISt Subsystem 24 1 24 3 24 4 24 5 24 6 24 7 24 8 24 9 24 10 24 11 24 12 24 13 24 14 24 15 24 16 23 23 24 19 24 17 24 18 24 19 24 20 24 21 XSEarch command query 17 21 23 24 TMAXimum query 17 17 23 20 24 16 24 20 TMINimum query 17 18 23 20 24 17 TPOSition command query 16 23 18 11 22 22 23 20 Trailing dots 4 5 Transmit Data TD 3 4 3 5 Truncation rule 4 3 TTRigger selector 22 8 TTRigger TTRace Subsystem 22 1 22 8 22 4 22 5 22 6 22 7 22 8 22 9 22 10 22 11 22 12 22 13 22 14 22 15 22 16 22 17 22 18 22 19 22 20 22 21 22 22 TWAVeform selector 23 8 TWAVeform Subsystem 23 1 23 3 23 4 23 5 23 6 23 7 23 8 23 9 23 10 23 11 23 12 23 13 23 14 23 15 23 16 23 17 23 18 23 19 23 20 23 21 23 22 23 23 23 24 23 25 TYPE command query 13 10 XSTate query 14 10 17 21 24 21 XTAG command query 17 22 24 21 XTIMe command query 14 10 23 25 XWINdow command 9 23 XXX 4 5 4 7 XXX meaning of 1 6 U Units 1 12 UPLoad command 12 21 Uppercase 1 11 URQ 6 5 Vv VAXis command query 19 6 19 7 VRUNSs query 17 18 23 21 24 17 WwW White space 1 7 White space 5 9 WIDTh command 26 8 WLISt selector 10 6 14 4 WLISt Subsystem 14 1 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 7 14 8 14 9 14 10 X XCONdition command query 23 22 24 18 XOTag query 17 19 24 18 XOTime query 14 9 17 19 23 22 24 19 XPATtern command query 17 20
388. trigger point can be placed at the start center end a percentage of poststore or a value specified by delay The poststore option is the same as 23 19 lt time_val gt lt percent gt Example Query Returned Format Example Query Returned Format lt valid_runs gt lt total_runs gt Example TWAVeform Subsystem VRUNs the User Defined option when setting the trigger position from the front panel The TPOSition command is only available when the acquisition mode is set to manual real number from 2 x sample_period to 516096 x sample_period integer from 1 to 100 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TWAVEFORM TPOSITION CENTER MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform TPOSition The TPOSition query returns the current trigger setting MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform TPOSition STARt CENTer END DELay lt time_val gt POSTstore lt percent gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TWAVEFORM TPOSition VRUNs MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform VRUNS The VRUNSs query returns the number of valid runs and total number of runs made Valid runs are those where the pattern search for both the X and O markers was successful resulting in valid delta time measurements MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform VRUNs lt valid_runs gt lt total_runs gt lt NL gt zero or positive integer zero or positive integer OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM VRUNS 23 20
389. tus Register when all pending device operations have finished The commands which affect this bit are the overlapped commands An overlapped command is a command that allows execution of subsequent commands while the device operations initiated by the overlapped command are still in progress The overlapped commands for the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer are STARt and STOP OUTPUT XXX OPC FORC The OPC query places an ASCII 1 in the output queue when all pending device operations have been completed 1 lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX OPC Query Returned Format lt option gt lt module gt Example Common Commands OPT Option Identification OPT Option Identification OPT The OPT query identifies the software installed in the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer This query returns nine parameters The first parameter indicates whether you are in the system The next two parameters indicate any software options installed and the next parameter indicates whether intermodule is available for the system The last five parameters list the installed software for the modules in slot A through E for an 16500A mainframe However the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzers have only one slot A therefore only the first parameter of the last five will be relevant A zero in any of the last eight parameters indicates that the corresponding software is not currently installed The name returned for softwar
390. type gt space Az STAtes Ds state_low_value zn BER DE state_high_value FEE S lobel_nome a Daa label_low_value nae EN obel high value H Da state_low_value gt state_high_volue gt HAXis gt vax s we space abel name em low value el wy high_value H r 16555519 SCHart Subsystem Syntax Diagram SCHart Subsystem Parameter Values Parameter state_low_value state_high_value label_name label_low_value label_high_value low_value high_value marker_type Value integer from 1032192 to 1032192 integer from lt state_low_value gt to 1032192 a string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters string from 0 to 22 1 HFFFFFFFF string from lt label_low_value gt to 2 1 HFFFFFFFF string from 0 to 22 1 HFFFFFFFF string from low_value to 2 1 HFFFFFFFF X O XO TRIGger 19 3 Selector Example Command Example Query Returned Format Example SCHart Subsystem SCHart SCHart MACHine 1 2 SCHart The SCHart selector is used as part of a compound header to access the settings found in the State Chart menu It always follows the MACHine selector because it selects a branch below the MACHine level in the command tree OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 SCHART VAXIS A 0 9 ACCumulate MACHine 1 2 SCHart ACCumulate ON 1 OFF 0 The ACCumulate command controls whether the chart display gets
391. ualifier 16 7 STRigger STRace State Trigger 16 9 ACQuisition 16 9 BRANch 16 10 CLEar 16 12 FIND 16 13 MLENgth 16 14 RANGe 16 15 SEQuence 16 16 STORe 16 17 TAG 16 18 TAKenbranch 16 19 TCONtrol 16 20 TERM 16 21 TIMER 16 22 TPOSition 16 23 SLISt Subsystem SLISt 17 7 COLumn 17 7 Contents 6 18 Contents CLRPattern 17 8 DATA 17 9 LINE 17 9 MMODe Marker Mode 17 10 OPATtern 17 11 OSEarch 17 12 OSTate 17 13 OTAG 17 14 OVERlay 17 15 REMove 17 15 RUNTi Run Until 17 16 TAVerage 17 17 TMAXimum 17 17 TMINimum 17 18 VRUNs 17 18 XOTag 17 19 XOTime 17 19 XPATtern 17 20 XSEarch 17 21 XSTate 17 21 XTAG 17 22 SWAVeform Subsystem SWAVeform 18 4 ACCumulate 18 5 ACQuisition 18 5 CENTer 18 6 CLRPattern 18 6 CLRStat 18 7 DELay 18 7 INSert 18 8 MLENsth 18 8 RANGe 18 9 REMove 18 10 TAKenbranch 18 10 TPOSition 18 11 Contents 7 19 20 21 22 Contents SCHart Subsystem SCHart 19 4 ACCumulate 19 4 CENTer 19 5 HAXis 19 5 VAXis 19 6 COMPare Subsystem COMPare 20 4 CLEar 20 5 CMASk 20 5 COPY 20 6 DATA 20 6 FIND 20 8 LINE 20 8 MENU 20 9 RANGe 20 9 RUNTi Run Until 20 10 SET 20 12 TFORmat Subsystem TFORmat Timing Format 21 4 ACQMode 21 5 LABel 21 6 REMove 21 7 THReshold 21 8 TTRigger TTRace Subsystem Qualifier 22 6 TTRigger TTRace Trace Trigger 22 8 ACQuisition 22 9 BRANch 22 9 CLEar 22 12 EDGE 22 13 FIND 22 14 Contents 8 23 Contents
392. uery returns the current acquisition mode MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform ACQuisition AUTOmatic MANual lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE2 TWAVEFORM ACQUISITION CENTer MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform CENTer lt marker_type gt The CENTer command centers the waveform display about the specified markers X O XO TRIGger OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM CENTER X 23 8 Command Example Command Example Command lt delay_value gt Example TWAVeform Subsystem CLRPattern CLRPattern MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform CLRPattern X O ALL The CLRPattern command clears the patterns in the selected Specify Patterns menu OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM CLRPATTERN ALL CLRStat MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform CLRStat The CLRStat command clears the waveform statistics without having to stop and restart the acquisition OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM CLRSTAT DELay MACHine 1 2 TWAVeform DELay lt delay_value gt The DELay command specifies the amount of time between the timing trigger and the center of the the timing waveform display The allowable values for delay are 2500 s to 2500 s real number between 2500 s and 2500 s OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TWAVEFORM DELAY 100E 6 Query Returned Format Example Command lt module_spec gt lt label_name gt lt bit_id gt
393. umber gt lt NL gt 0 to number of valid buckets 1 integer number 10 20 30 40 50 60 DIM String 100 OU ERView BUCKet SIZE NUMBer lt bucket_num gt PUT XXX SELECT 1 OU PUT XXX SPA2 0V ERView BUCKet 23 EN ER XXX String PRI END T String 25 8 Command lt high_pattern gt Example Query Returned Format Example SPA Subsystem OVERView HIGH OVERView HIGH SPA 1 2 OVERView HIGH lt high_pattern gt The OVERView HIGH command sets the upper boundary of the State Overview measurement A query returns the current setting of the upper boundary Setting the upper boundary defaults the data accumulators statistic counters and the number of buckets and their size FB O 1 0 011121314151617 H 011 21314 1516 17 8 9 JAIBICIDIEIF 0 1 2 3 4 15 617 8 9 OUTPUT XXX SPA1l OVERView HIGH 23394 OUTPUT XXX SPA2 O0VERView HIGH 04371 SPA 1 2 OVERView HIGH SPA 1 2 OVERView HIGH lt high_pattern gt lt NL gt 10 DIM String 100 20 OUTPUT XXX SELECT 1 30 OUTPUT XXX SPA1 OVERView HIGH 40 ENTER XXX String 50 PRINT String 60 END 25 9 Command lt label_name gt Example Query Returned Format Example SPA Subsystem OVERView LABel OVE
394. ument is unable to execute a command for a strictly device dependent reason Query Error A query error will be reported if the proper protocol for reading a query is not followed This includes the interrupted and unterminated conditions described in the following paragraphs Syntax Diagrams The example syntax diagram is in this chapter are similar to the syntax diagrams in the IEEE 488 2 specification Commands and queries are sent to the instrument as a sequence of data bytes The allowable byte sequence for each functional element is defined by the syntax diagram that is shown The allowable byte sequence can be determined by following a path in the syntax diagram The proper path through the syntax diagram is any path that follows the direction of the arrows If there is a path around an element that element is optional If there is a path from right to left around one or more elements that element or those elements may be repeated as many times as desired Figure 5 1 Message Communication and System Functions Syntax Diagrams machine 1 Example Syntax Diagram a gt space gt arm_source ASSign space Na pod_list pa ASSIGN LEVE arm space gt arm_level AME space m machine_name H REName J space me j newtext DEFault REName gt space m
395. und header It places the parser in the machine subsystem until the lt NL gt is encountered e A colon preceding the command header returns you to the top of the command tree Message Communication and System Functions Syntax Overview Figure 5 2 TWAVEFORM OSEARCH 38 TRIGGER DELAY 3 8 ns lt NL gt lt progrom messoge unit gt TWAVEFORM OSEARCH 38 TRIGGER lt commond progrom header gt lt progrom header seporotor gt lt program data gt TWAVEF ORM OSEARCH SP 30 TRIGGER SP SP lt white space gt lt white spoce gt lt white space gt lt program mnemonic gt E lt progrom mnemonic gt lt program dato gt lt progrom dato separator gt lt progrom dato gt TWAVEFORM OSEARCH 30 M TRIGGER lt decimal numeric program data gt lt program data gt 30 TRIGGER lt program message unit separator gt SP SP lt program message terminator gt SP lt NL gt lt progrom messoge unit gt lt white space gt E lt white space gt DELAY 3 8 ns rene lt white spoce gt NL lt program header gt lt program dad separator gt lt program data gt DELAY 3 8 ns Se ern lt white space gt lt decimal program data gt lt suffix program dota gt SP ns lt white space gt lt suffix multiplier gt lt suffix unit gt n S 16500 BL31 lt program message gt Parse Tree Message Communication and System Functions Syntax Overview Upper Lower Case Equivalence U
396. ure 10 1 S Module Level Commands LA Y 4 Grin 4 Pi ARMLine a DBLock Je space pa DBLock a MACHine space machine_num gt gt m PACKed gt gt gt ARM arm_parm gt assign Vo assign_parm gt H LEVelarm Jo level_parm gt name_parm gt H RENome rename_parm gt Resource Dee res_parm P type_parm gt e SFoRmat e gt sformat_cmds strace_cmd s mh slist_cmds m SWAVeform Be P swaveform_ M cmds COMPare i TFORmat Z a schart_cmd s nn compare_cmds Im gt tformat_cmds gt ttrace_cmds H TWAVeform A J A I gt twaveform_cmds Sus A JH Wlist_cmds gt tlist_cmds J symbol_cmd p N Module Level Syntax Diagram 16555501 10 3 Table 10 1 Module Level Commands Module Level Parameter Values Parameter machine_num arm_parm assign_parm level_parm name_parm rename_parm res_parm type_parm sformat_cmds strace_cmds slist_cmds swaveform_cmds schart_cmds compare_cmds tformat_cmds ttrace_cmds twaveform_cmds tlist_cmds symbol_cmds Type of Parameter or Command MACHine 1 2 arm pa
397. us of the instrument Programming Over GPIB Introduction This section describes the GPIB interface functions and some general concepts of GPIB In general these functions are defined by IEEE 488 1 GPIB bus standard They deal with general bus management issues as well as messages which can be sent over the bus as bus commands Programming Over GPIB Interface Capabilities Interface Capabilities The interface capabilities of the Agilent 1670G series logic analyzer as defined by IEEE 488 1 are SH1 AH1 T5 TEO L3 LEO SR1 RL1 PPO DC1 DT1 CO and E2 Command and Data Concepts GPIB has two modes of operation command mode and data mode The bus is in command mode when the ATN line is true The command mode is used to send talk and listen addresses and various bus commands such as a group execute trigger GET The bus is in the data mode when the ATN line is false The data mode is used to convey device dependent messages across the bus These device dependent messages include all of the instrument commands and responses found in chapters 8 through 27 of this manual Addressing By attaching the logic analyzer printer or controller to the GPIB Port you automatically place the GPIB interface in talk only or talk listen mode Talk only mode must be used when you want the logic analyzer to talk directly to a printer without the aid of a controller Addressed talk listen mode is used when the log
398. values for the label inside the pattern recognizer term Since the pattern parameter may contain don t cares and be represented in several bases it is handled as a string of characters rather than a number Eight of the 10 terms A through G and I are available terms H and J are not available to either machine but not both simultaneously If you send the TERM command to a machine with a term that has not been assigned to that machine an error message Legal command but settings conflict is returned A B C D E F G 1I string of up to 6 alphanumeric characters B O 1 X 0 011121314151617IX H 0 1 213 14 51617 8 9 A B C D E F X 0 1 2 3 14 15 16 7 18 19 3 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER TERM A DATA 255 OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER TERM B ABC fBXXXX1101 22 20 Query Returned Format Example Command lt time_value gt Example Query Returned Format Example TTRigger TTRace Subsystem TIMER MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TERM lt term_id gt lt label_name gt The TERM query returns the specification of the term specified by term identification and label name MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TERM lt term_id gt lt label_name gt lt pattern gt lt NL gt OUTPUT XXX MACHINE1 TTRIGGER TERM B DATA TIMER MACHine 1 2 TTRigger TIMER 1 2 lt time_value gt
399. which unit is being used However exponential notation is only applicable to the decimal number base Tables 5 1 and 5 2 in chapter 5 Message Communications and System Functions list all available suffixes Do not combine an exponent with a unit The following numbers are all equal 28 0 28E2 280E 1 28000m 0 028K The base of a number is shown with a prefix The available bases are binary B octal HQ hexadecimal H and decimal default The following numbers are all equal B11100 034 H1C 28 You may not specify a base in conjunction with either exponents or unit suffixes Additionally negative numbers must be expressed in decimal Introduction to Programming the Agilent Technologies 1670G Series Logic Analyzer Parameter Data Types When a syntax definition specifies that a number is an integer that means that the number should be whole Any fractional part would be ignored truncating the number Numeric parameters that accept fractional values are called real numbers All numbers are expected to be strings of ASCII characters Thus when sending the number 9 you send a byte representing the ASCII code for the character 9 which is 57 or 0011 1001 in binary A three digit number like 102 will take up three bytes ASCII codes 49 48 and 50 This is taken care of automatically when you include the entire instruction in a string String data String data may be delimited with either sing
400. with 8 digits If the total length of the block all sections is 14506 bytes the block length specifier would be 800014506 since the length must be represented with 8 digits Sections consist of a section header followed by the section data as follows lt section header gt lt section data gt 16 bytes total 10 bytes for the section name 1 byte reserved always 0 1 byte for the module ID code 25 for pattern generator 4 bytes for the length of the data in bytes lt section data gt Example DATA and SETup Commands The section data format varies for each section and may be any length Note that the total length of a section is 16 for the section header plus the length of the section data Thus when calculating the length of a block of configuration data don t forget to add the length of the headers 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 DIM Block 32000 allocate enough memory for block data DIM SpecifierS 2 OUTPUT XXX EOI ON OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM HEAD OFF OUTPUT XXX SELECT 1 Iselect module OUTPUT XXX SYSTEM DATA send the data query ENTER XXX USING 2A Specifier lread in 8 ENTER XXX USING 8D Blocklength read in block length ENTER XXX USING K Block lread in data 42 3 Command Syntax Query Syntax Returned Format DATA and SETup Commands SYSTem DATA SYSTem DATA The DATA command
401. x xx k SELECT THE Agilent 1670G MODULI Select th module slot in which the Agilent 1670G is installed OUTPUT 707 SELECT 1 kkxkkxkxkxkxkxx KKKKKKKKKKK CONFIGURE THE STATE ANALYZER kkkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkkxkxkxk xx Name Machine 1 STATE configure Machine 1 as a state analyzer assign pod 1 to Machine 1 and display System External I O menu of the Agilent 1 PUT 707 PUT 707 PUT 707 PUT 707 KKKKKKKKK Ma PUT 707 PUT 707 KKKKKKKKK The trigger specification will use five sequence levels with the trigger level on level four Resource terms A through E and RANGE1 will be used to store only desired counts from the 8 bit 670G Logic Analyzer MACHINE1 NAME STATE MACHINE1 TYPE STATE MACHINE1 ASSIGN 1 MENU 1 0 KKKKKKKKKK SE TUP THE FORMAT SPECIFICATION KKEKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KK KKK ke a label SCOUNT give the label a positive polarity and assign the lower 8 bits MACHINE1 SFORMAT REMOVE ALL MACHINE1 SFORMAT LABEL SCOUNT POS 0 0 255 KKKKKKKKKK SE TUP HE TRIGGER SPECIFICATION KKKKKKKKKKKKK KAKA KKK ripple counter Display the state trigger menu 43 5 WWWWW WW UY OANA BW Ss o KR OB DDB BB BR Ba COO WMAATA UU RPWNE VS I aa a a a al U PWDNDHOVO OD NOS UT sr
402. yntax Returned Format MACRo Subsystem PROGram MACRo lt m gt PROGram lt line_number gt lt optional_label gt NOOP WAIT lt event gt REPeat lt count gt BREAK lt data_value gt lt data_value gt SIGNal integer specifying the line of instruction data to be modified a string of up to six characters specifying a label A B cc D IMB integer repeat count macro number integer 0 through 99 parameter number integer 0 through 9 a string in one of the following forms BOl for binary 14001234567 for octal H0123456789ABCDEF for hexadecimal 10123456789 for decimal PARameter lt p gt MACRo lt gt PROGram lt line_number gt MACRo lt gt PROGram lt line_number gt NOOP WAIT lt event gt SIG IMB BREAK MACRO END START LOOP REPEAT TIMES END LOOP MACRO Macro lt data_value gt lt data_value gt 40 12 Command Command Syntax lt macro number gt lt program line gt Example MACRo Subsystem REMove REMove The REMove allows you to remove one or several lines from the macro If only one parameter is given only that line is deleted If two numbers are specified the range of lines between those values inclusive is deleted The command REMove ALL can be used to totally clear the contents of a macro but it doe
403. ys terminate a lt program message gt before attempting to read aresponse The instrument will terminate lt response message gt s except during a hardcopy output If a query message is sent the next message passing over the bus should be the lt response message gt The controller should always read the complete lt response message gt associated with a query message before sending another lt program message gt to the same instrument The instrument allows the controller to send multiple queries in one query message This is referred to as sending a compound query As will be noted later in this chapter multiple queries in a query message are separated by semicolons The responses to each of the queries in a compound query will also be separated by semicolons Commands are executed in the order they are received Message Communication and System Functions Syntax Diagrams Protocol Exceptions If an error occurs during the information exchange the exchange may not be completed in a normal manner Some of the protocol exceptions are shown below Command Error A command error will be reported if the instrument detects a syntax error or an unrecognized command header Execution Error An execution error will be reported if a parameter is found to be out of range or if the current settings do not allow execution of a requested command or query Device specific Error A device specific error will be reported if the instr

Agilent Technologies 1670G Printer Accessories User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents